Foreword

Introduction certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as

an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
This manual provides information needed to operate data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
and understand the vehicle and its components. systems performed. The EDR is designed to record
More detailed information is contained in the Owner’s data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
Warranty Information for North America booklet, and for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
in the vehicle’s workshop and maintenance manuals. less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
Custom-built Freightliner vehicles are equipped with
various chassis and cab components. Not all of the • How various systems in the vehicle were oper-
information contained in this manual applies to every ating;
vehicle. For details about components in your ve- • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
hicle, refer to the chassis specification pages in- belts were buckled/fastened;
cluded in all new vehicles and to the vehicle specifi-
cation decal, located inside the vehicle. • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle
at all times. • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in These data can help provide a better understanding
this manual were in effect at the time of printing. of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
For the most up-to-date information visit www- occur.
.freightliner.com for the latest version of the NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
driver’s and maintenance manuals. only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
Freightliner Trucks reserves the right to discon- data are recorded by the EDR under normal
tinue models and to change specifications or driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
design at any time without notice and without name, gender, age, and crash location) are re-
incurring obligation. Descriptions and specifica- corded. However, other parties, such as law en-
tions contained in this publication provide no forcement, could combine the EDR data with
warranty, expressed or implied, and are subject the type of personally identifying data routinely
to revisions and editions without notice. acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
Environmental Concerns and is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
Recommendations parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe-
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to dis- cial equipment, can read the information if they have
card materials, you should first attempt to reclaim access to the vehicle or the EDR.
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, fol-
low appropriate environmental rules and regulations Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
when disposing of materials.
Compliance
Event Data Recorder This vehicle must be regularly inspected and main-
tained as indicated in the New Cascadia Mainte-
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices nance Manual, and in the Pre- and Post-Trip Inspec-
that record specific vehicle data. The type and tions and Maintenance chapter in this manual, in
amount of data recorded varies depending on how order to continue satisfactory performance and en-
the vehicle is equipped (such as the brand of engine, sure coverage of the vehicle under the manufactur-
if an air bag is installed, or if the vehicle features a er’s warranty.
collision avoidance system, etc.).
Many maintenance procedures ensure that the ve-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder hicle and engine continue to comply with applicable
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

STI-500-9 (1/14/2020)
Part Number STI-500
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword

emissions standards. Maintenance procedures, using You can contact NHTSA by mail at: Administrator,
components engineered to comply with greenhouse NHTSA Headquarters, 1200 New Jersey Avenue
gas emissions and fuel efficiency regulations, may be SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590.
performed by an authorized Daimler Trucks North
America dealer, an independent outlet, or the vehicle For more information about motor vehicle safety,
owner or operator. go to www.safertruck.gov/.
The vehicle owner is responsible for determining the To contact Freightliner about a concern about a
suitability of replacement components to maintain specific vehicle call the Customer Assistance Cen-
compliance with federal and local jurisdictional regu- ter at 1-800-385-4357 or complete a Product
lations. Components including, but not limited to, Concern Form.
tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings,
bumper, hood, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduc- Vehicles domiciled in Canada thought to have a
tion timers are specifically designed and manufac- defect that could cause a crash, injury, or death,
tured to exacting standards for regulatory fuel effi- should immediately be reported to Transport
ciency and greenhouse gas emissions compliance. It Canada and Daimler Trucks North America LLC.
is important that these components are always re-
placed with components that meet or exceed the per- If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it
formance of the originally installed components. may open an investigation; if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport
Customer Assistance Center Canada cannot become involved in individual
Having trouble finding service? Call the Customer problems between you, your dealer, or Daimler
Assistance Center at 1-800-385-4357 or 1-800-FTL- Trucks North America LLC.
HELP. For dealer referrals and breakdown support,
To contact Freightliner about a concern about a
call night or day, weekdays or weekends. For specifi-
specific vehicle call the Customer Assistance Cen-
cation requests and all other concerns and inquiries,
the Customer Assistance Center is available 6:00 ter at 1-800-385-4357 or complete a Product
A.M. to 3:30 P.M. PST Monday through Friday. Our Concern Form.
people are knowledgeable, professional, and commit- To contact Transport Canada, call the Defect In-
ted to following through to help you keep your truck vestigations and Recalls Division toll-free in
moving. Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the
Gatinuau-Ottawa area or internationally.
Reporting Safety Defects You can also contact Transport Canada by mail at:
Vehicles domiciled in the USA thought to have a Transport Canada, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, On-
defect that could cause a crash, injury, or death, tario, K1A 0N5 Canada.
should immediately be reported to the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) The following websites contain more information
and Daimler Trucks North America LLC. on Canadian recalls:

If the NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may English: www.tc.gc.ca/recalls.

open an investigation; if it finds that a safety de- French: www.tc.gc.ca/rappels.
fect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA For additional road safety information, please visit
cannot become involved in individual problems the Road Transportation website:
between you, your dealer, or Daimler Trucks North
America LLC. English: www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline

toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153).
To e-mail NHTSA, go to www.safertruck.gov/.

STI-500-9 (1/14/2020)
Part Number STI-500
Printed in U.S.A.
 Foreword

French: www.tc.gc.ca/fr/services/routier

© 2016–Current Daimler Trucks North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Trucks North America LLC is a Daim-
ler company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written per-
mission of Daimler Trucks North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Trucks North
America LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 97208–3849 U.S.A. or refer to
www.Daimler-TrucksNorthAmerica.com and www.FreightlinerTrucks.com.

STI-500-9 (1/14/2020)
Part Number STI-500
Printed in U.S.A.
 Contents
Chapter Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Event Data Recorder, Emissions and Fuel Efficiency Compliance,
Customer Assistance Center, Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
1 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
2 Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
3 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
4 Driver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
5 Driver Assistance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
6 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
7 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
8 Cab and Sleeper Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
9 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
10 Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
11 Optional Engine Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
12 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
13 Brake Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
14 Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
15 Automated and Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
16 Manual Transmissions and Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
17 Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
18 Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
19 Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
20 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
21 Vehicle Appearance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
22 Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
23 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
24 In An Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
26 Telematics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
 1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Customer Assistance Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Vehicle Identification

Component Information Label label. If the tires and rims currently on the vehicle
have a lower load capacity than that shown on the
NOTE: Labels shown in this chapter are ex- tire and rim label, then the tires and rims determine
amples only. Actual specifications may vary from the load limitations on each of the axles.
vehicle to vehicle. Tractors built without a fifth wheel that are intended
The component information label lists the vehicle for service in the U.S. have an incomplete vehicle
model, identification number, and major component certification label and a final certification label at-
models and serial numbers. See Fig. 1.1. The com- tached by the final-stage manufacturer. The incom-
ponent information label is attached to the outside of plete vehicle document included with the vehicle cer-
the ziplock document bag. tifies that the vehicle conforms to all applicable
FMVSS regulations in effect on the date of comple-
COMPONENT INFORMATION
tion.
SEE VEHICLE ID NO.
WHEN ORDERING PARTS

MANUFACTURED BY: DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC

MODEL: PX113064S T BASE MODEL: CA113DC DATE OF MFR: 07/15
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
VEHICLE ID NO:

ENGINE MOD:
1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 CUSTOMER: N00000

DETROIT DD13 12.8L 410 HP / 1800 RPM, 20

WHEELBASE:

ENGINE NO:
164

999999S9999999
Standard Labels
MAIN TRANS MOD: DT12-DB-1450 HEAVY DUTY 12-SPEED DIRECT TRANS NO: 99999999999999
PTO. MOD: PTO. NO:
FRONT AXLE MOD: MFS-12-143A 12,000# FF1 SINGLE FRONT AXL FRONT AXLE NO: MON99999999 In Canada, tractors with fifth wheels are marked as
1ST INT AXLE MOD:
2ND INT AXLE MOD:
MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES DUALTRAC 74-7 1ST INT AXLE NO: FOR99999999
2ND INT AXLE NO:
certified by means of the Canadian National Safety
3RD INT AXLE MOD:
4TH INT AXLE MOD:
3RD INT AXLE NO:
4TH INT AXLE NO:
Mark printed on the vehicle certification label, which
5TH INT AXLE MOD:
6TH INT AXLE MOD:
5TH INT AXLE NO:
6TH INT AXLE NO:
is attached to the driver-side door frame B-pillar. See
REAR AXLE MOD: MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES DUALTRAC 74-7 REAR AXLE NO:
RATIO:
FOR99999999
2.47
Fig. 1.5.
PAINT MFR: ELITE BC PAINT C
PAINT CODE: CAB COLOR A: L0306EB
FOR COMPLETE PAINT INFORMATION
SEE VEHICLE SPECIFICATION SHEET.
Trucks built without a cargo body and tractors built
without a fifth wheel that are intended for service in
06/21/2016 f080196
Canada have an incomplete vehicle certification label
Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label attached to the driver-side B-pillar. After completion
of the vehicle, a complete certification label must be
Component GWR Label attached by the final-stage manufacturer to certify
that the vehicle conforms to all applicable Canada
The component GWR label is located on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) regulations
passenger-side B-pillar. See Fig. 1.2. The label pro- in effect on the date of completion.
vides maximum GWR ratings for each component.
See Fig. 1.3 for a typical component GWR label. Emissions Labels
Aftertreatment System Indicators
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Label
Standard Labels Engines and vehicles manufactured after December
NOTE: Due to the variety of Federal Motor Ve- 31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada are
hicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) certification re- required to meet all EPA regulations effective as of
quirements, not all of the labels shown will apply the vehicle build date, and are equipped with an
to your vehicle. emission aftertreatment system (ATS). Vehicles do-
miciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may not
Tractors with or without fifth wheels purchased in the have aftertreatment equipment, depending upon local
U.S. are marked as certified by means of an FMVSS statutory emissions guidelines. See Table 1.1.
certification label. See Fig. 1.4. This label is attached
to the driver-side B-pillar, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
The tire and rim portion of the FMVSS certification
label certifies suitable tire and rim combinations that
can be installed on the vehicle, for the given gross
axle weight rating. Tires and rims installed on the
vehicle at the time of manufacture may have a higher
load capacity than that certified by the tire and rim

1.1
 Vehicle Identification

6
5

A B C

10/11/2016 f720776
A. Driver-Side B-Pillar B. Driver-Side Door C. Passenger-Side B-Pillar
1. EPA Noise Emission Control Label 4. Entry/Exit Warning Decal 6. Component GWR Label
2. Customer Assistance Label 5. Vehicle Emission Control
3. FMVSS Certification Label Information Label
Fig. 1.2, Label Locations

COMPONENT FRONT AXLE 1ST INT AXLE 2ND INT AXLE 3RD INT AXLE 4TH INT AXLE 5TH INT AXLE 6TH INT AXLE REAR AXLE COMPONENT GVWR
COMPONENT (KG)LBS
MAXIMUM GWR BY

AXLES: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 CHASSIS:

SUSPENSION: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 ENG/TRANS:
TIRES: ( 5601) 12350 ( 9253) 20400 ( 9253) 20400 5TH WHEEL:
RIMS: ( 6713) 14800 (11612) 25600 (11612) 25600 PARK BRAKE:
HUBS/SPOKES: ( 6032) 13300 (10432) 23000 (10432) 23000 AXLE:
BRAKES: ( 6032) 13300 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000
STEERING: ( 6032) 13300 VIN: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999

06/21/2016 f080200

Fig. 1.3, Component GWR Label

1.2
Vehicle Identification

MANUFACTURED BY: DAIMLER TRUCKS N.A. LLC GAWR/PNBE GAWR/PNBE TIRES RIMS KPA PSI "S"
KGS LBS COLD COLD
DATE OF MFR: 07/15
GVWR/PNBV-KG: 23,587 FRONT AXLE: 5,443 12,000 275/80R22.5(G) 22.5X8.25 758 110 S
GVWR/PNBV-LBS: 52,000 1ST INT AXLE: 9,072 20,000 445/50R22.5(L) 22.5X14.0 827 120 S
THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH ALL 2ND INT AXLE:
APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE 3RD INT AXLE:
SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT AT THE DATE
OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. 4TH INT AXLE:
VEHICLE ID NO: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 5TH INT AXLE:
TYPE: TRUCK/TRACTOR TT/CT 6TH INT AXLE:
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN: U.S.A. REAR AXLE: 9,072 20,000 445/50R22.5(L) 22.5X14.0 827 120 S
06/22/2016 f080199

Fig. 1.4, Vehicle Certification Label

Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations

Build Date Regulation: Emissions Components
GHG17: GHG14 components (see NOTE below) plus OBD16 instrumentation and
sensor upgrades, and component technology that meets NHTSA and EPA 2017 fuel
efficiency and greenhouse gas emission standards (GHG17) requirements.
From January 1, 2016 NOTE: GHG14 includes aerodynamic and fuel efficiency components including, but
not limited to, tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings, bumper, hood,
vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to meet
regulatory fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions standards.
Table 1.1, Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations

VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC DATE OF MANUFACTURE: 07/15
THIS COMPLETE VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSIONS
APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM AND HEAVY TRUCKS. THE FOLLOWING ACTS, OR THE CAUSING
THEREOF BY ANY PERSON ARE PROHIBITED BY THE NOISE CONTROL ACT OF 1972.
A. THE REMOVAL OR RENDERING INOPERABLE OF, OTHER THAN FOR PURPOSES OF
MAINTENANCE, REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY NOISE CONTROL DEVICE OR
ELEMENT OF DESIGN (LISTED IN THE OWNER'S MANUAL) INCORPORATED INTO THIS
VEHICLE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE NOISE CONTROL ACT.
B. THE USE OF THIS VEHICLE AFTER SUCH DEVICE OR ELEMENT OF DESIGN HAS BEEN
REMOVED OR RENDERED INOPERABLE.

06/21/2016 f080197

10/10/2006 f080024 Fig. 1.6, Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label

(complete vehicle)
Fig. 1.5, Canadian National Safety Mark
control hardware. Such vehicles will have an
It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter exhaust
plumbing, ATS, or other components in any way that
incomplete vehicle noise emission control infor-
would bring the engine/vehicle out of compliance with mation label (Fig. 1.7). For such vehicles, it is
certification requirements [Ref: 42 U.S.C. S7522(a) the final-stage manufacturer’s responsibility to
(3)]. It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the complete the vehicle in conformity to U.S. or
vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations. Canadian EPA regulations (40 CFR Part 205)
and label it for compliance.
EPA Noise Emission Control Label
Vehicle Emission Control Information
A vehicle noise emission control label (Fig. 1.6) is
located on the driver-side B-pillar as shown in Label
Fig. 1.2. It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
the vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations. requirements as specified by federal greenhouse gas
IMPORTANT: Certain Freightliner incomplete and fuel efficiency regulations (GHG14). Model year
vehicles may be produced with incomplete noise 2017 and later vehicles meet similar requirements as

1.3
 Vehicle Identification

VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC DATE OF MANUFACTURE: 01/16
THIS INCOMPLETE VEHICLE AS DELIVERED BY DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC
CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSIONS APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM
AND HEAVY TRUCKS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FINAL STAGE MANUFACTURER
TO COMPLETE THIS VEHICLE WHILE MAINTAINING CONFORMANCE TO 40 CFR PART 205,
INCLUDING LABELING FOR COMPLIANCE (SEC. 205.55-41).

CERTIFIED
10/17/2016 f080201a
CLEAN IDLE
Fig. 1.7, Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label
(incomplete vehicle)

specified by GHG17 requirements. These vehicles

are equipped with components that increase fuel effi- 02/20/2012 f080179
ciency and reduce GHG emissions. Components
may include, but are not limited to, low-rolling resis- Fig. 1.9, CARB Clean Idle Label
tance tires; aerodynamic devices such as hood, cab
side extenders, and fuel tank fairings; vehicle speed
limiters; and idle shutdown timers.
A Vehicle Emission Control Information Label is lo-
cated on the driver-side door. See Fig. 1.8. It is the
owner’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle so that
it conforms to EPA and NHTSA regulations.

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

Manufactured By: DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC Date of Manufacture: 07/15
VIN/NIV: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 REGULATORY CLASS: High-roof day cab tractors above 33,000
VEH FAMILY CD: GDTN2TRAC13C pounds GVWR.
GVWR-PNBV-KG: 23,587
GVWR-PNBV-LBS: 52,000 EMISSION CONTROL IDENTIFIERS: LRRA, ARF, TGR

THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH U.S. EPA AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS FOR 2016
HEAVY DUTY VEHICLES. See owner's manual for proper maintenance of this vehicle.

06/21/2016 f080198

Fig. 1.8, Vehicle Emission Control Information Label

Certified Clean Idle Label

The California Air Resources Board (CARB) requires
model year 2008 and newer heavy-duty diesel en-
gines to meet CARB’s Heavy-Duty Diesel Engine
Idling Requirement in order to limit emissions of par-
ticulate matter and NOx.
Certified vehicles are equipped with a label placed
near the bottom exterior edge of the driver-side door.
See Fig. 1.9.

Customer Assistance Label

The customer assistance center telephone number is
printed on the customer assistance label. The label
also includes a QR code encoded with the VIN, read-
able by dealer apps to bring up information about the
vehicle. The customer assistance label is located on
the driver-side B-pillar, as shown in Fig. 1.2.

1.4
 2
Vehicle Access
Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Grab Handles and Access Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Cab-to-Sleeper Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Sleeper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Sleeper Luggage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Vehicle Access

Door Locks and Handles 1 2 3 4

One common key operates the ignition switch and all
of the door locks.
IMPORTANT: Each key is numbered. Record
the number so a duplicate key can be made, if
needed.
To unlock the driver’s door from outside the cab, in-
sert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise. See Fig. 2.1. To remove the key, turn it
counterclockwise to the original position. Pull out on
the door pull handle to open the door.

03/28/2016 f720769
2 1. Lock Button
2. Integral Door Upper Grab Handle
1
3. Door Lever
4. Door Control Panel
Fig. 2.2, Door Interior
3
Grab Handles and Access
Steps
02/02/2017 f720397 CAUTION
1. Key 3. Door Pull Handle
2. Lockset Slipping or falling from the vehicle can result in
personal injury or property damage.
Fig. 2.1, Exterior Door Handle
Wet or dirty shoes greatly increase the chance of
To unlock the passenger’s door from outside the cab, slipping or falling. If your shoes are wet or dirty,
insert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter be especially careful when entering or exiting the
turn counterclockwise. Turn the key clockwise to the vehicle.
original position to remove it. Always maintain three-point contact with the ve-
NOTE: The cab door locks can be operated hicle when entering or exiting the cab. Three-
when the doors are open. point contact means both feet and one hand, or
both hands and one foot.
To lock a door from outside the cab, insert the key in
the lockset and turn it in the direction opposite to the When steps are mounted on battery box covers,
unlocking direction (counterclockwise for the driver’s make sure that the cover is latched and secure
door, clockwise for the passenger’s door). Close the before using the steps.
door if it is open. Do not step on the fuel tank, battery box, frame,
To lock either door from inside the cab, push the lock etc. unless adequate slip resistant surfaces and
button downwards. See Fig. 2.2. handholds are provided.

To open the door from the inside, lift up on the door Do not jump from the vehicle.
lever. This will unlatch the door whether or not it is For ease of entry and exit, there is a handle on both
locked. the A-pillar and the B-pillar. In addition, the steering
To unlock the door without unlatching it, pull the lock wheel may be used to provide a secure handhold.
button upwards.

2.1
 Vehicle Access

There are at least two access steps to provide se-

cure footholds. CAUTION
Entering the Driver Side Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not at-
tempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
1. Open the driver-side door and place anything would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to
that you are carrying in the cab. slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of per-
2. Facing the cab, grasp the B-pillar and A-pillar
sonal injury.
grab handles with your hands. See Fig. 2.3.
1. Grasp the steering wheel with your right hand
and the A-pillar grab handle with your left hand,
3 and place your left foot on the top step. See
Fig. 2.3.
2. Face into the cab, and grasp the B-pillar grab
handle with your right hand.
3. Step down on the bottom step with your right
foot, grasping the grab handles lower as you
move down.
4. Step to the ground with your left foot first.

Entering the Passenger Side

1. Open the passenger-side door and place any-
thing that you are carrying in the cab.
2. Facing the cab, grasp the B-pillar and A-pillar
grab handles with your hands. See Fig. 2.4.

2
1
03/28/2016 f720770 2
1. B-Pillar Grab Handle 3. Steering Wheel 1
2. A-Pillar Grab Handle
Fig. 2.3, Driver-Side Cab Access

3. Step up on the bottom step with your right foot.

4. Step up on the top step with your left foot, grasp-
ing the grab handles higher as you move up.
5. Step into the cab with your right foot first, and
grasp the steering wheel with your left hand.

Exiting the Driver Side

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
while carrying any items in your hands. Place
them in an accessible location on the seat or
cab floor and make sure they will not get in your
way as you exit, then retrieve them after you 03/28/2016 f720771
have exited the cab. 1. B-Pillar Grab Handle
2. A-Pillar Grab Handle

Fig. 2.4, Passenger-Side Cab Access

2.2
Vehicle Access

3. Step up on the bottom step with your left foot. in and from the sleeper area. To open the sleeper
door from the inside, push down on the lever handle
4. Step up on the top step with your right foot, located inside the sleeper compartment aft of the
grasping the grab handles higher as you move door, or pull out on the upper lever located inside the
up. cab door opening; see Fig. 2.6. To open the sleeper
5. Step into the cab with your left foot first, while door from outside, open the cab door, then pull out
holding on to the grab handle with your right on the upper lever located inside the cab door open-
hand. ing. To close the door, pull on the strap attached to
the inside of the door, or push it closed from the out-
Exiting the Passenger Side side, until it latches.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab IMPORTANT: The sleeper doors have two-stage
while carrying any items in your hands. Place latching. When closing the doors, ensure that
them in an accessible location on the seat or they are completely latched to prevent wind
cab floor and make sure they will not get in your noise and water intrusion.
way as you exit, then retrieve them after you
have exited the cab.

CAUTION
Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not at-
tempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to 1
slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of per-
sonal injury. 2

1. Grasp the A-pillar grab handle with both hands,

and place your right foot on the top step. See
Fig. 2.4.
2. Face into the cab, and grasp the B-pillar grab
handle with your left hand. 08/29/2016 f602302a

3. Step down on the bottom step with your right 1. Sleeper Door
foot, grasping the grab handles lower as you 2. Luggage Compartment Door
move down. Fig. 2.5, Sleeper Doors
4. Step to the ground with your left foot first.
Sleeper Luggage Door
Cab-to-Sleeper Access To open the sleeper luggage door (Fig. 2.5, Ref. 2),
To open the sleeper access on vehicles with vinyl pull out on the lower lever located inside the cab
sleeper curtains, unzip the sleeper curtains. If de- door opening; see Fig. 2.6. To close the sleeper lug-
gage door, push it closed until it latches.
sired, unsnap the curtains all the way around the
sides and top, and remove the curtains.
To open the sleeper access on vehicles with velour
Back-of-Cab Access
sleeper curtains, unfasten the snaps at one side, When trailer air and electrical connections cannot be
then push the curtain to the opposite side. reached conveniently from the ground, Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Regulations require commercial carri-
Sleeper Door ers to provide back-of-cab access.

The sleeper door (Fig. 2.5, Ref. 1) is not intended for A grab handle is typically located on the back wall of
entry or exit. The door is intended only as a conve- the sleeper or cab. Steps are mounted on the frame
nient means to stow or remove personal belongings

2.3
 Vehicle Access

whenever moving around, and always face in to-

ward the deck plate when climbing up or down.
Wet or dirty shoes, steps, or grab rails greatly
increase the chance of slipping or falling. If your
shoes or the contact areas are wet or dirty, clean
and dry them as much as possible before ac-
cessing the back of cab area, and be especially
1
careful when climbing or standing on the vehicle.
A
C Never jump onto, or off of, a vehicle; doing so
C
E
S
creates a very high likelihood of a fall and per-
S
sonal injury.
IMPORTANT: Climb onto, and down from, back-
of-cab access facing in toward the vehicle, as
B
A
you would on a ladder. Do not climb up or down
G
G facing out away from the vehicle.
A
G
E

2
3

03/31/2016 f720773
1. Sleeper Door Lever
2. Luggage Door Lever
Fig. 2.6, Sleeper Door Levers

rail, and a deck plate is mounted across the top of

the frame rails. See Fig. 2.7.

CAUTION
Follow these rules for back-of-cab access. Failing
to follow these rules could lead to a fall, and pos-
sible personal injury. 2
03/30/2016 f720772
Never step on any exterior part unless it has a
slip-resistant surface meant for safe stepping. If 1. Deck Plate 3. Grab Handle
the surface is movable, such as a battery box 2. Steps
cover with a slip-resistant surface, be certain it is Fig. 2.7, Back-of-Cab Access
firmly secured.
Be careful not to trip on items such as chains or
air lines in the back-of-cab area.
Always follow safety procedures for back-of-cab
access, maintaining three-point contact—both
hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand—

2.4
Vehicle Access

Accessing Back-of-Cab Area 2. Slowly tilt the hood with both hands on the grab
handle.
WARNING 3. As the hood starts to open, walk backwards as
you pull. The hood will stop in the full-open posi-
External surfaces of the exhaust system remain tion.
hot after the engine has been shut down. When 4. If it is available, lock the right-hand hood strut.
accessing the back of the cab or sleeper, do not See Fig. 2.8.
touch any part of the exhaust system other than
the exhaust-mounted grab handle, if equipped, or
severe burns could occur.
1. Facing the deckplate, grasp the grab handle with
both hands. Reach up as far as is comfortable.
2. Place one foot on the bottom step and pull your-
self up.
3. Place your other foot on the top step.
4. Move your lower hand to a higher position on the
grab handle.
5. Step onto the deck plate.

Exiting Back-of-Cab Area

1. Facing toward the center of the vehicle, grasp
the grab handle with both hands.
2. Step one foot at a time onto the top step.
A
3. Move your upper hand to a lower position on the
grab handle.
4. Move one foot to the bottom step.
5. Step to the ground with your upper foot first.

Hood Opening and Closing

The hood can be raised to a full-open position. Tilt-
assist struts help you to both raise the hood and 10/22/2019 f880967
lower it into the vehicle operating position. A. Locking Lever
In the vehicle operating position, the hood is secured Fig. 2.8, Lockable Right-Hand Hood Strut
to the cab-mounted cowl by a hold-down latch on
each side. Closing the Hood
Newer vehicles may have a locking right-hand hood 1. Disengage the locking hood-strut if engaged.
strut. This means the hood can be secured in the
open position by engaging the yellow lever located 2. Push on the hood above the grille, tilting it to-
midway on the strut. To lower the hood, the yellow ward the closed position.
lever must be flipped up. 3. As the hood goes over center, allow it to settle
on the rear supports.
Opening the Hood
4. Make sure the hood is flush with the cowl, then
1. Release both hood hold-down latches by pulling secure the hood by engaging both hood hold-
the handles outward. down latches.

2.5
 Vehicle Access

IMPORTANT: Make sure that both hood hold-

down latches are fully engaged before operating
the vehicle.

Remote Keyless Entry

New Cascadia vehicles with the optional remote key-
less entry feature are typically delivered with two key
fobs.
Each key fob has three buttons. See Fig. 2.9

07/318/2018 f546880
1. Door Lock 2. Door Unlock 3. Lamp Check
Fig. 2.9, Key Fob

• Door Lock: Locks the driver and passenger

door with a single press.
• Door Unlock: Unlocks the driver and passen-
ger door with a single press; if the door unlock
button is pressed and held for three seconds,
the driver and passenger windows will roll
down.
• Lamp Check: A single press causes all exte-
rior lamps to flash individually for pre-trip in-
spections.

2.6
 3
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Unit: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Driver Display Overview: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Digital Gauges and System Monitors: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Infotainment: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Analog Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Instrumentation Control Unit: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Driver Display Overview: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Digital Gauges and System Monitors: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Infotainment: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Warnings, Indicators, and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Instruments

Instrumentation Control Unit: The driver display screen provides information on

various vehicle systems as well as warnings, cau-
ICUC tions, and notifications on systems status.
The instrumentation control unit (ICU) provides the Ignition Sequence
driver with engine and vehicle information. A New
Cascadia vehicle can be equipped with either an When the ignition is turned on, the ICU runs a self-
ICUC or ICC5. See Fig. 3.1 for a typical ICUC check. Observing the ignition sequence is a good
layout. way to ensure the ICU is functioning properly.
This section provides general system and operating IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
instructions for ICUC components. Following sections ICU self-check is complete.
provide more detailed information.

7
6

A B C D E F

5 4 3
06/28/2018 f611362

1. Speedometer 5. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge C. Vehicle Operations

2. Coolant Temperature Gauge 6. Tachometer D. Maintenance
3. Primary and Secondary Air 7. Driver Display E. Infotainment
Pressure Gauge A. Home F. User Settings
4. Fuel and DEF Level Gauge B. Drive Time Systems

Fig. 3.1, Instrument Cluster Overview - ICUC

ICUC ICUC
The instrument cluster unit (common), or ICUC, is NOTE: Air gauges in the ICUC do not complete
comprised of six physical gauges, indicator lamps a sweep of their dials during the ignition se-
(telltales), a six inch portrait driver display screen, quence.
steering wheel mounted switches, and audible warn-
ing systems. Warning and indicator lamps illuminate When the ignition is turned on, the following actions
in red (warning), amber (caution), green (status on), should occur in the ICUC:
or blue (high-beam headlights active). • Freightliner and engine logo displays on the
driver display until startup is complete

3.1
 Instruments

• Speedometer and tachometer complete a full

sweep of their dials
• Warning and indicator lamps illuminate, then 1
are extinguished (if not active)
• Audible alert sounds for any active faults
• Active alerts are displayed on the ICUC
screen. 3

If the ICUC receives active fault codes, it displays

them one after the other until the ignition is turned
off. The alerts are displayed until they are acknowl-
edged. If there are no active faults, the ICUC dis-
plays the home screen after the self-check com-
pletes.
IMPORTANT: If any red or amber warning and
indicator lamps do not illuminate during the
ICUC self-check or do not go out (if not active)
after the self-check completes, take the vehicle
2
to an authorized Freightliner service facility as
soon as possible.
If active faults are present, take the action out-
04/21/2016 f611363
lined in "Warnings, Indicators, and Messages"
tables in this chapter, then take the vehicle to 1. Top Level Menu Categories
2. Static Menu
an authorized Freightliner service facility as 3. Current Screen Indicator
soon as possible.
Fig. 3.2, ICUC Driver Display
ICUC Screen Navigation If present, the screen indicator dashes communicate
In the ICUC, the driver display screen is broken up how many display screens are available in the cur-
into three areas: a navigable menu at the top of the rent menu category. See Fig. 3.2.
screen, the display area (with a screen indicator if To navigate the ICUC menus, use the Menu Right
there is more than one page), and a static display at and Menu Left switches on the steering wheel to
the bottom of the screen. See Fig. 3.2. move between the top-level menus.
NOTE: To adjust the brightness of ICUC screen Use the Menu Up and Menu Down buttons to move
go to User Settings. from screen to screen within the selected category.
The ICUC top level menu categories allows a driver See Fig. 3.4 for an overview of steering wheel
to quickly carry out common actions. Top level menu mounted switches.
categories include Home, Drive Time Systems, Ve-
hicle Operations, Maintenance, Infotainment, and For Quick Access Systems menus press the Quick
Access System Settings button in the right-hand
User Settings. See Fig. 3.1.
switch pod. If Quick Access Systems menus are not
The static menu display shows vehicle speed, trans- available, the button will bring up the home screen.
mission gear indicators, cruise control settings, and a
clock. Soft telltales are also displayed in this area. Time and Date
See Fig. 3.3.
Time and date are set automatically when the
NOTE: Some optional features have icons in the vehicle is equipped with a tachograph. When a
static display area, for example, Optimized Idle vehicle is equipped with a tachograph only the
status and Descent Mode. time zone can be changed.

3.2
Instruments

7 8 9 The correct time and date is required for the follow-

ing ICU functions to work:
• Alarm clock
6 1
• Maintenance
5 2 • Prognostics
3
Software Updates
4 A software update consists of three steps:
06/13/2016 f611364
1. Downloading the software.
1. Gear Indicator
2. Gear Mode 2. Installing the software.
3. Clock
4. Soft Telltales 3. Activating the software by restarting the system.
5. Adaptive Cruise Control and Tracked Vehicle
A popup message will appear when an update is
Distance
6. Cruise Control Symbol (adaptive cruise control available. In addition, the software update option in
shown) the diagnostics menu will be active.
7. Cruise Control Set Speed The vehicle must be in neutral gear, the parking
8. Cruise Control Overspeed brake set, and the engine off before a software up-
9. Cruise Control Underspeed
date can start. Once started, a software update can-
Fig. 3.3, ICUC Static Display not be cancelled.

15 8
16 7
9 6
14 1
10 5

13 11 4
2
12 3

09/28/2016 f611352a

1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 7. Headlamp Interrupt** 13. Back Button

2. Quick Access System Settings 8. Cruise Cancel 14. Menu Left
3. Cruise Decelerate/Set 9. Volume Increment Up 15. Menu Accept (OK)
4. Phone Hang-Up/Reject 10. Menu Right 16. Menu Up
5. Marker Interrupt** 11. Volume Increment Down ** Not available in all markets
6. Phone Pick-Up 12. Menu Down

Fig. 3.4, ICUC Steering-Wheel-Mounted Switches

ICUC time and alarm clock settings are found under During the software update process, progress mes-
User Settings. See "Driver Display: ICUC" in this sages will be provided. See Fig. 3.5 for typical ICUC
chapter for details. software update screens.

3.3
 Instruments

If a software update is interrupted, the system will

ask if you want to restart the process or inform you
that the vehicle cannot be driven until the update is
complete. If a software update fails, the system will
attempt to revert to the previous version. A notifica-
tion will appear when a software update has been
successfully installed.
Failure to install software updates may make data
less secure and/or mean vehicle systems are not
operating at their best.
NOTE: An estimation of installation time will be
given before the software update starts. Installa-
tion can take several minutes. During installation
individual functions and controls will not be
available or only available to a limited degree.

Driver Display Overview: ICUC

Below is an overview of ICUC driver display screens
and functions.

ICUC Alert Messages

Alert messages are displayed when certain condi-
tions occur. They include warnings, cautions, and
notices that require the driver’s attention. Not all alert
messages are critical to the operation of the vehicle.
More important messages take priority over less im-
portant messages. The header text and color indi-
cates the priority of the on-screen message, listed
from the highest to the lowest:
• Warning (red)
• Caution (amber)
• Status/Informational (blue, green, white, and
grey)
Warnings alert the driver to situations or conditions
that may pose a threat to control of the vehicle. Fol-
low all instructions given in the message.
Cautions alert the driver to situations or conditions
that may result in damage to vehicle components, or
derating of engine power.
Status notices alert the driver to situations or condi-
tions that may improve fuel efficiency or improve ve-
hicle drivability.
See Fig. 3.6 for typical alert messages.

ICUC Watch for Ice Popup

When ambient air temperature drops below 34°F
04/29/2019 f611643 (1°C), a Watch For ICE popup message will appear.
Fig. 3.5, Example ICUC Software Update Screens
3.4
Instruments

10/31/2016 f611444

Fig. 3.6, Sample Alert Messages

See Fig. 3.7. Acknowledge and dismiss this mes- In the ICUC, time can be displayed in 12 or 24 hour
sage by pressing the back button in the left hand format. Time format is set under Time Settings under
steering wheel switch pod. User Settings.
1. Select the gear icon to open the User Settings
menu. The last settings menu accessed will
open.
2. If not on the Settings Options List Screen, use
the Up arrow in the left-hand steering wheel
switch pod to move to this screen.
3. Press OK to access the settings menus.
4. Use the Down arrow in the left-hand steering
wheel switch pod to get to Time.
5. Press OK to access Time.
6. Use the Right arrow to navigate from 12h to 24h
or 24h to 12h.
7. Press OK on the left-hand steering wheel switch
05/21/2019 f611753 pod to choose an option.
Fig. 3.7, ICUC Watch for Ice Popup Setting An Alarm
An ambient air temperature below 34°F (1°C) will In the ICUC, one alarm can be set under Alarms
also cause a snowflake icon to appear next to the under the User Settings. See Fig. 3.8.
display temperature. The snowflake icon will display
The alarm triggers a repeated chirping sound as well
until the ambient air temperature rises to 37°F (3°C).
as a alarm pop-up. Both can be dismissed by press-
If the temperature drops below 34°F (1°C) after rising ing the back button on the left hand steering wheel
above 37°F (3°C), the Watch For ICE popup and switch pod.
snowflake will reappear. 1. Select the gear icon to open the User Settings
menu. The last settings menu accessed will
ICUC Time and Alarm Settings open.
Time Settings: Display Format 2. If not on the Alarms screen, use the Down arrow
NOTE: Local Time Offsets can also be viewed in the left-hand steering wheel switch pod to
under this menu. move to this screen.
3. Press OK to access the alarm clock options.

3.5
 Instruments

Basic Information Screens

04/25/2019 f611636

Fig. 3.8, ICUC Alarm Clock Screens

4. Use the Up and Down arrow to choose hour, There are currently three top-level menu options
minute, and am/pm and alarm status. under Basic Information:
5. Press OK to set the alarm. • Home
• Trip
ICUC Driver Display Screens
• Leg
The six ICUC top-level menu categories are:
The Home screen displays a fuel consumption bar
• Basic Information graph, the current outside temperature, the vehicle
• Drive Time Systems charging system voltage, compass direction of travel,
and odometer. See Fig. 3.9.
• Vehicle Operations
The Trip report screen displays calculations based on
• Maintenance the engine run time such as trip mpg. See Fig. 3.10.
• Infotainment The trip Leg report screen which displays calcula-
• User Settings tions based on engine run time such as length of trip
leg, average speed, hours. See Fig. 3.11.
Quick Access Systems are also available via the
right-hand steering wheel Quick Access System Set- Drive Time Systems Screens
tings button (see Fig. 3.4).
There are currently four menu options under Drive
NOTE: Screens will vary depending on vehicle Time Systems:
options. Some screens are accessible only
• Speed
when the vehicle is parked and the parking
brake is on. • Driving Assistance
• Eco Driver Feedback
• Video

3.6
Instruments

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

06/29/2016 f611355

NOTE: Navigate the top-level menu by using the Menu right and Menu left buttons on the steering wheel. Navigate to
Quick Access Systems using the Quick Access Systems switch. When navigating the categories, the last-used menu
screen in each category is displayed, which is not necessarily the screen shown in this illustration.
1. Startup 4. Vehicle Operations 7. User Settings
2. Basic Information 5. Maintenance 8. Quick Access Systems (if
3. Drive Time Systems 6. Infotainment available)

Fig. 3.9, ICUC Top-Level Menu Categories and Navigation

The Speed screen shows the current vehicle speed • Gauges

as well as temperature, odometer and PasSmart in-
• Diesel Particulate Filter
formation. See Fig. 3.9
• Tire Pressure Monitoring
The Driving Assistance screens, depending on sys-
tems installed, show lane departure warnings, adap- • Locks
tive cruise control, active lane assist, traffic sign dis-
play, and/or side guard assist. See Fig. 3.12. • Vehicle Settings

The Eco Driver Feedback screens display bar graphs For information on gauge screens and Tire Pressure
measuring cruise control usage, smooth acceleration, Monitoring see "Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in
and gentle braking. For fuller explanation, see the this chapter. Information on diesel particulate filter
Digital Instruments: ICUC section. monitoring is covered in chapter 12 Emissions and
Fuel Efficiency. For information on Locks see chap-
Depending on systems installed, video is recorded ter 17 Drive Axles.
when active safety systems are engaged or unsafe
driving conditions are detected. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
screens display tire pressure, temperature, and sen-
Vehicle Operations Screens sor battery status.

There are currently five top-level menu options under

Vehicle Operations:

3.7
 Instruments

04/25/2019 f611608 04/25/2019 f611611

Fig. 3.10, Basic Information: Trip Report Fig. 3.12, Drive Time Systems: Driver Assistance

04/25/2019 f611609 04/25/2019 f611619

Fig. 3.11, Basic Information: Trip Leg Report Fig. 3.13, Vehicle Operations: Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
The Vehicle Settings screen provides access to ve-
hicle system settings such as cruise control, trans- mission, attention assist, and idle adjust. See
Fig. 3.14

3.8
Instruments

04/25/2019 f611621 04/25/2019 f611622

Fig. 3.14, Vehicle Operations: Vehicle Settings Fig. 3.15, Maintenance: Alerts

ICUC Maintenance Screens

There are currently five top-level menu options under
Maintenance:
• Alerts
• Diagnostics
• Engine Maintenance
• Trans Prognostics
• Maintenance System
The maintenance screens are used to retrieve fault
codes and other diagnostic and service information
pertaining to the vehicle.
The Alerts screens show all active notices, cautions,
and warnings. See Fig. 3.15.
Fault codes are color-coded to indicate the severity
of the fault. Red indicates a condition that may pose
a threat to control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a
condition that may result in damage to vehicle com-
ponents or derating of engine power. Blue, grey, and 04/25/2019 f611623
green are used to indicate component status.
Fig. 3.16, Maintenance: Diagnostics
The Diagnostics screens show active diagnostic
trouble codes and if a software update is available. The Engine Maintenance screen shows engine
See Fig. 3.16. hours. See Fig. 3.17.

3.9
 Instruments

The Maintenance System screens give information ICUC User Settings Screens
about when maintenance is required. See "Instru-
ments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter for more
details. The ICUC Setting Options List screens (see
Fig. 3.19) allow the driver to choose the following:
• Dash Brightness
• Lighting Settings
• Units Settings
• Time Settings
• Gauge Settings
• Key Alert Settings
• Language Settings
• Safety System Settings
Dash Brightness allows for setting the brightness of
the dashboard display.
Lighting Settings controls if the courtesy and en-
trance lights are on and how long they stay on.
Unit Settings controls the measurement values for
speed, distance traveled, temperature, pressure, and
following distance.
04/25/2019 f611624 Time Settings controls the time display format (12h/
24h) and local time zone offsets.
Fig. 3.17, Maintenance: Engine Maintenance
Gauge Settings allow the driver to change the order
The Trans Prognostics screen shows the transmis- in which gauges are displayed on the gauge screens.
sion filter status, oil level, and a measure of oil life. Key Alert Settings control if the key alerts is on or off.
Submenus of the Trans Prognostics screen allow for
resetting of Filter Status and Oil Life. Language Settings allow the driver to set the ICU
language to be in either English (American), Spanish
(Mexican), or French (Canadian).
Safety System Settings allow the driver to turn safety
features such as Attention Assist, Traffic Sign Dis-
play, Side Guard Assist, and Side Guard Trailer on or
off.

ICUC Quick Access Systems Screens

Quick Access Screens are activated by a button on
the right hand steering wheel pod. There are up to
six top-level menu options:
• Hysteresis
• Cruise Control
• Transmission
04/25/2019 f611626
• Engine Idle Adjust
Fig. 3.18, Maintenance: Trans Prognostics • Power Take Off

3.10
Instruments

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8
04/25/2019 f611635
1. Dash Brightness 3. Unit Settings 6. Key Alert
2. Courtesy and Entrance Light 4. Time 7. Language
Timing 5. Gauge Positioning 8. Safety Systems
Fig. 3.19, ICUC User Settings Screens

• Optimized Idle
Hysteresis allows the driver to set the overspeed and
underspeed in mph (km/h). See Fig. 3.20.
Cruise Control allows the driver to control such fea-
tures as active lane assist, lane position, and follow-
ing distance. See Fig. 3.21. For more information
see "Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter.
Transmission allows the driver to turn the creep
mode or eCoast feature on or off. See Fig. 3.22. See
"Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter for
more information.
Engine Idle Adjust allows the driver to adjust or deac-
tivate the engine idle. It is not available when the ve-
hicle is in motion. See Fig. 3.23. For more informa-
tion see "Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in this
chapter.
Power Take Off allows the driver to customize the
amount of power being transferred. See Fig. 3.24.
The Optimized Idle screens allow the driver to
choose the optimized idle mode and enable or dis- 04/29/2019 f611637

Fig. 3.20, Quick Access Screen: Hysteresis

3.11
 Instruments

04/29/2019 f611638 04/29/2019 f611640

Fig. 3.21, Quick Access Screen: Cruise Control Fig. 3.23, Quick Access Screen: Engine Idle Adjust

04/29/2019 f611639 04/29/2019 f611641

Fig. 3.22, Quick Access Screen: Transmission Fig. 3.24, Quick Access Screen: Power Take Off (PTO)

able the feature. For more information see "Instru-

ments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter

3.12
Instruments

Digital Gauges and System

Monitors: ICUC
ICUC Gauges
In the ICUC there are six digital gauges and three
sets of system screens for the Diesel Particulate Fil-
ter (DPF), Eco Driver Feedback (EDF), and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). 1
The six digital gauges under the Vehicle Operations 2 3
menu of the driver display are:
• Engine Oil Temperature
• Turbo Boost Pressure
• Transmission Oil Temperature
• Front Axle Oil Temperature
• Rear Axle Oil Temperature
• Application Air Pressure
In the ICUC, if a value measured by a digital gauge
04/30/2019 f611615
exceeds the normal range, an amber caution or red
danger popup message will appear. However the bar 1. Engine Oil 3. Transmission Oil
graph color will remain green and the bar graph Temperature Temperature
icons will remain white. 2. Turbo Boost Pressure

NOTE: The order of ICUC digital gauges and Fig. 3.25, Digital Oil and Pressure Gauges - ICUC
therefore the screen on which they display can
be changed under Gauge Settings under Set- Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge
tings. The turbocharger boost pressure gauge (Fig. 3.25)
indicates the pressure in the intake manifold, in ex-
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge cess of atmospheric pressure, being created by the
turbocharger.
NOTICE
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not The transmission oil temperature gauge, (Fig. 3.25)
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani- measures the transmission lubricant operating tem-
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and perature. Temperatures vary by application, but the
investigate the cause to prevent further damage. transmission fluid temperature gauge reading should
Do not operate the engine until the cause has not exceed 250°F (121°C).
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, the optional engine oil tem- NOTICE
perature gauge (Fig. 3.25) should read in the follow-
ing temperature range: A sudden increase in transmission fluid tempera-
• 200 to 260°F (93 to 126°C) for Detroit and ture that is not caused by a load increase may
Cummins engines indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem- the cause has been determined and corrected.
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem.

3.13
 Instruments

Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep

grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem.

Application Air Pressure Gauge

The application air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.26) regis-
1
ters the air pressure being used to apply the brakes.
2 3 The gauge will not register air pressure until the foot
brake pedal is depressed or the trailer hand brake is
applied.

DEF and Diesel Particulate Filter

Monitoring

04/25/2019 f611616
1. Front Axle Oil 3. Application Air
Temperature Pressure
2. Rear Axle Oil
Temperature
Fig. 3.26, Digital Oil and Pressure Gauges - ICUC

Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep

grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If 04/25/2019 f611618
the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem. Fig. 3.27, DPF Start Regen Confirmation Popup - ICUC

Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges See chapter 12 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for
details of Diesel Particulate Filter and DEF level
monitoring.
NOTICE
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
Eco Driver Feedback
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani- Eco Driver Feedback encourages a driver to make
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and economical driving a habit with the goal of saving
investigate the cause to prevent further damage. fuel and reducing wear.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
been determined and corrected. Eco Driver Feedback gauges, located under the
Drive Time Systems menu, display a driver’s perfor-
During normal operation, drive axle oil temperature mance in three categories: gentle braking, smooth
gauges (see Fig. 3.26) should read as follows: acceleration, and cruise control usage. The ICU bar
• 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Detroit™ and graphs display driver performance since the start of
Meritor™ drive axles the vehicle and are newly calculated with each ve-
hicle start. See Fig. 3.28.
• 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Dana Spicer®
drive axles

3.14
Instruments

tire temperature can cause a tire to deteriorate, lead-

ing to tread separation and blowouts.

05/30/2019 f611612a
1. Cruise Control Usage 3. Gentle Braking
2. Smooth Acceleration
05/30/2019 f611460a
Fig. 3.28, Eco Driver Feedback Screen - ICUC
Fig. 3.29, Vehicle Operations: TPMS Axle Tire Pressure,
Examples of driving behavior that increases or de- Temperature, and Sensor Status
creases the amount of green in each column are as
follows: Tire pressure can be displayed in psi or bar units.
Temperature can be displayed in °F or °C. Units of
• Time in cruise control increases the Cruise measure are set under Settings. Sensor battery sta-
Control Usage value. tus is displayed as a bar chart inside the outline of a
• Failure to engage cruise control after the Use
battery.
Cruise Control popup appears decreases the The TPMS will change the color of the tire on the
Cruise Control Usage value ICUC screen if the tire pressure or temperature is
either too high or too low. See Fig. 3.29. It will also
• Pumping the accelerator pedal decreases the
change the color of the sensor battery icon if the
Smooth Acceleration value. power levels are too low. Amber indicates a condition
• Keeping the speed steady with cruise control that may result in damage. Red indicates a condition
off increases the Smooth Acceleration value. that may pose a threat to the vehicle.
• Sudden braking outside of an urban environ- Tire pressure monitoring settings are part of the
ment decreases the Gentle Braking value. TPMS. Threshold temperatures and what triggers
alerts can be set on this screen.
• No incidences of sudden breaking over time
increases the Gentle Braking value. Other ICUC Gauges and
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Measurements
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) In addition to the two screens of gauges displayed
screens display tire pressure, temperature, and sen- under the Vehicle Operations menu described above,
sor battery status. See Fig. 3.29. Maintaining correct the ICUC driver display communicates a number of
tire pressure increases fuel economy. Sustained high values related to vehicle operations. They are listed
in alphabetical order below.

3.15
 Instruments

Alerts Predictive maintenance information is calculated

based on these factors as well as engine and trans-
The Alerts screen stores the current active alerts. mission load and oil temperature.
Alerts are color-coded to indicate severity. Red indi- Currently, predictive maintenance information is given
cates a condition that may pose a threat to control of for engine oil, transmission oil, and axle oil changes.
the vehicle. Amber indicates a condition that may By taking driving conditions into account, predictive
result in damage to vehicle components or derating maintenance provides more accurate intervals for
of engine power. Grey is used for notices. fluid changes.
Just before the service interval ends, a message that
Battery Voltage maintenance is due will appear. See Fig. 3.30.
The Home screen in the ICU displays the vehicle
charging system voltage in the bottom left. By moni-
toring this number, the driver can stay aware of po-
tential battery charging problems and have them
fixed before the batteries discharge enough to create
starting difficulties.
The Home screen will normally show approximately
13.7 to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The
voltage of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts
when the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0
volts is considered a low battery, and a completely
discharged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.
If the Home screen shows an undercharged or over-
charged condition for an extended period, have the
charging system and batteries checked at an autho-
rized Freightliner service facility.
04/25/2019 f611627

Diagnostics Fig. 3.30, Maintenance System Status - ICUC

The Diagnostics screen communicates fault codes
and other diagnostic information about the vehicle. When the service interval is reached, a pop-up notice
that maintenance is due will appear with every key
Fault codes are color-coded to indicate the severity cycle.
of the fault. Red indicates a condition that may pose
a threat to control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a When the service interval is overdue, the color of the
condition that may result in damage to vehicle com- wrench icon on the maintenance screen will change
ponents or derating of engine power. Grey indicates from white to amber and the message will change to
a condition that may affect fuel efficiency or vehicle Maintenance Overdue. This cautionary pop-up will
handling. continue to appear with every key cycle.
Each service interval must be reset in the mainte-
Engine Maintenance nance system when service is performed to provide
for accurate future service intervals and to turn off
Shows the number of hours the engine has been op- pop-up messaging.
erating.
The reset button for maintenance system screens will
Maintenance System not appear until the vehicle has been driven 6.2
miles and the engine has run for fifteen minutes.
NOTE: the wrench icon is indicative of service, Maintenance system information and service recom-
not of something that needs to be fixed. mendations can also be viewed in the Detroit Con-
Standard messaging is based on the number of nect portal. Information on the portal is updated
miles (km) driven or time passed since the last ser- every seven days.
vice.

3.16
Instruments

Transmission Prognostics deactivates when the vehicle reaches 45 mph (72

kmh).
The transmission prognostics screen is only available
for Allison transmissions. It displays information on
the transmission health status (oil filter status, oil
level, and oil life). If transmission health falls below
acceptable limits, a message will pop-up on the
driver display.
NOTE: For a valid oil level measurement, the
vehicle must be stopped on a level surface with
the transmission in neutral (N). 04/22/2016 f611367

Fig. 3.33, ECAS Problem Detected Alert- ICUC

Suspension Air Pressure
The ICUC may display four vehicle air suspension
yellow caution alerts.
These include Suspension Lowered and Suspension
Raised alerts (Fig. 3.31 and Fig. 3.32) indicating that
the current rear suspension height is either below or
above the normal ride height.

11/09/2016 f611472

Fig. 3.34, Load Transfer Alert - ICUC

ICUC Vehicle Operations: Vehicle

Settings
The ICUC Vehicle Operations menu has a submenu
called Vehicle Settings. Settings and controls for ve-
06/29/2016 f611434 hicle features installed on the vehicle can be found
here. These may include:
Fig. 3.31, Suspension Lowered Alert - ICUC
• Cruise Control (See Fig. 3.21.)
• Transmission (See Fig. 3.22.)
• Attention Assist
• Engine Idle Adjust (See Fig. 3.23.)
• Optimized Idle
See Fig. 3.14. Many of these may also be accessible
11/09/2016 f611471 under the Quick Access Systems menu.
Fig. 3.32, Suspension Raised Alert - ICUC
Cruise Control
ECAS Problem Detected alert (Fig. 3.33) indicates Settings for cruise control include setting the over-
the electronically controlled air suspension system speed and underspeed in mph or kph and setting the
has an active fault. following distance in seconds. For full instructions on
A flashing Load Transfer alert (Fig. 3.34) indicates Cruise Control, see chapter 4 Driver Controls.
the ECAS system is applying the maximum available
vehicle load on the drive axle up to the maximum Transmission
allowable limit determined by the gross axle weight
rating (GAWR). Load transfer mode automatically The Transmission vehicle settings menu allows the
driver to turn Creep Mode and eCoast on or off.

3.17
 Instruments

Creep mode is a DT12 Transmission feature that Optimized Idle

helps the driver move the vehicle at slow speeds by
slipping the clutch to reduce torque to the wheels. It Optimized Idle reduces idle time by automatically
is designed to improve maneuverability in situations stopping and restarting the engine. Besides saving
like parking, docking, and slow traffic. fuel, it helps keep the batteries charged while main-
taining engine and cab temperature.
To activate Creep mode for the first time within the
current driving cycle, press the accelerator pedal to The following conditions must be met for the opti-
launch the vehicle, thereby fully engaging the clutch. mized idle to function:
Stopping the vehicle with the service brake will not • Vehicle in neutral gear
cause the vehicle to exit Creep Mode. While in
Creep Mode, a lower gear may be selected and the • Park brake set
transmission can be upshifted or downshifted with
• Hood latched
the shifter stalk.
The eCoast feature is standard on DT12 engines. On • Sleeper fan on
a downslope the clutch will momentarily disengage Optimized idle can be started with the engine running
so the vehicle maintains momentum while the engine or the engine off.
idles. Engine rpms will drop to 600 in eCoast mode.
With the key on, go to Vehicle Settings and scroll
Input from the driver will cause the vehicle to exit
down to Optimized Idle. Press OK.
eCoast mode.
To enable optimized idle, press okay again. A screen
For a fuller coverage of Creep and eCoast mode see
will appear saying the default battery mode is on and
chapter 15 Automated and Automatic Transmis-
sions. interior comfort mode is off.
If you want to optimize the environment of the
Attention Assist sleeper section, turn on comfort mode. Press the
right hand arrow in the left hand switch pod to turn
The Attention Assist feature is intended to support interior comfort mode on and then press OK.
the driver by calling attention to drowsy driving be-
havior and thereby encouraging rest. The vehicle will go into standby mode, an under
hood alarm will briefly sound, and the engine will
The Attention Assist feature estimates the driver’s crank and achieve 900 rpm. The ICUC screen will
attention level based on lane keeping and steering then state that it is in interior comfort mode and the
behavior and activity levels in using turn signals, re- engine and air conditioning/fan will run until it
tarder, and kick down operations. achieves the temperature requested by the driver.
When attention levels drop below a certain threshold, The engine will then shut down.
an audible warning will sound, a visual warning will Optimized idle can be shut off by ICUC controls or
appear on the ICU, and lane departure warnings will pressing the brake. If the sleeper fan is turned off,
be activated if previously disabled. optimized idle will not shut down but the engine will.
Engine Idle Adjust For a fuller description of Optimized Idle, see chapter
11 Optional Engine Systems.
This feature allows the increase or decrease of the
base engine idle speed. Increasing the base engine
idle might be necessary to generate enough power to
Infotainment: ICUC
operate accessories. Safety Information
The following conditions must be met to the engine
idle speed to be adjusted: WARNING
• Engine is running
There is a risk of distraction from operating inte-
• Vehicle is at a standstill grated communication equipment while the ve-
hicle is in motion.
• Transmission is in neutral
A driver can be distracted from the traffic situation if
operating communication equipment integrated in the

3.18
Instruments

vehicle when driving, possibly causing loss of control

of the vehicle.
Only operate this equipment when the road and traf-
fic situation permits, otherwise stop and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
The driver must observe the legal requirements of
the country the vehicle is driving through when oper-
ating the system.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair or limit
your ability to read the display.

Navigation and Infotainment

Reception
Features of both the navigation and infotainment sys-
tem depend on cellular and satellite reception. In cer-
tain situations, such as driving through tunnels,
mountains, or parked in multistory parking lots, re-
ception may be impaired due to interference or there
may be no reception at all.

General ICUC Infotainment 04/25/2019 f611630

Information Fig. 3.35, Infotainment: Radio

The ICUC infotainment system options consist of: 1. Select the single bar note icon to open the info-
• AM/FM Radio tainment menu. The last infotainment menu ac-
cessed will open.
• Satellite Radio: SiriusXM®
2. If not on the Audio screen, press the Up arrow in
• Weather Radio the left-hand steering wheel switch pod to move
• CD player to this screen.

• USB & AUX input 3. Press OK on the left-hand steering wheel switch
pod to access Audio Settings.
• Smart phone Integration
4. Use the Right and Left arrows to navigate from
ICUC Infotainment Screens one audio source to another—from radio to USB
for example.
Use the Menu Up and Menu Down to navigate the
infotainment screens: 5. Use the Up and Down arrows to navigate
through an audio options list of choices. Choices
1. Audio (AM/FM/Weather, SiriusXM, CD, USB, can vary depending on the number of audio
AUX). See Fig. 3.35. sources available and saved presets.
2. Telephone, showing signal strength, battery level, 6. Press OK on the left-hand steering wheel switch
phone number, and active call length. See pod to select an audio source. The audio source
Fig. 3.36. is selected.
7. Press the Back button to return to the main
ICUC Audio Features Audio screen.
Radio and Other Audio Sources
Weather Radio (WX)
Radio stations, presets, and other audio sources can
be accessed under Audio. Weather Radio is an option under Audio.

3.19
 Instruments

Weather radio channels WX1 through WX7, corre-

sponding to frequencies 162.400 MHz though
162.550 MHz, are the standard weather radio chan-
nels used by NOAA Weather Radio in the United
States, Weatheradio Canada/Radiométéo Canada in
Canada, and SARMEX in Mexico. Each system con-
sists of a nationwide network of radio stations broad-
casting official weather warnings, watches, adviso-
ries, forecasts and other non-weather related hazard
information including news on natural disasters
(earthquakes, avalanches, floods), environmental
hazards (oil spills, chemical releases), and public
safety messages (AMBER alerts, network outages).
All services operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The average range for reception from a transmitter is
approximately 40 miles (60 km). The National
Weather Service operates more than 1000 transmit-
ters.

Adjusting the Volume

Volume can be adjusted up using the VOL+ and
down using the —VOL switches in the left-hand 04/25/2019 f611632
steering wheel switch pod.
Fig. 3.36, Infotainment: Active Call
ICUC Telephone Features 6. Press OK on the left-hand steering wheel switch
Telephone is the second screen under infotainment. pod to choose an option.
The main telephone screen shows the connected
7. Press the Back left-hand steering wheel switch
phones current signal and battery strength. If a call is
pod to return to the main screen.
in progress it will show the phone number and call
length.
Analog Instruments
Telephone Settings
Physical instruments are listed here in alphabetical
Telephone settings displays the phone’s call history, order. Some are optional and therefore not found in
contacts, and any contact presets. every vehicle. Digital instruments and gauges are
1. Select the single bar note icon to open the info- described in their ICU section.
tainment menu. The last infotainment menu ac-
cessed will open. Air Intake Restriction Gauge
2. If not on the Telephone Screen, use the Down The air intake restriction gauge indicates the vacuum
arrow in the left-hand steering wheel switch pod on the engine side of the air cleaner. On standard
to move to this screen. installations, it is mounted on the air intake duct in
the engine compartment, and has a go/no-go restric-
3. When on the Telephone screen, select OK on tion indicator without graduations. See Fig. 3.37. As
the left-hand steering wheel switch pod to access an option, a graduated indicator (Fig. 3.38) on the air
Telephone Settings. intake duct or, for easier viewing, a dash-mounted
4. Use the Right and Left arrows to navigate from restriction gauge may be installed.
one telephone setting to another—from contacts Air intake restriction vacuum is measured in inches
to missed calls for example. of water (inH2O). For vehicles equipped with a
5. Use the Up and Down arrows in the left-hand graduated indicator or a restriction gauge on the
steering wheel switch pod to navigate through dash, check the gauge with the engine off. If the yel-
the current Telephone Settings list of choices. low signal stays locked in the red zone once the en-
gine is shut down, or is at or above the values

3.20
Instruments

04/08/2005 f090431

Fig. 3.37, Manual-Reset Air Restriction Indicator, Go/

No-Go
10/31/2016 f611380

Fig. 3.39, Application Air Pressure Gauge

Coolant Temperature Gauge

NOTICE
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined
02/12/2015 f090514
and corrected.
During normal engine operation, the coolant tem-
Fig. 3.38, Air Intake Restriction Indicator, Graduated perature gauge should read 175 to 195°F (79 to
shown in Table 3.1, the air cleaner element needs to 91°C). If the temperature remains below 160°F
be replaced. (71°C), inspect the cooling system to determine the
cause. See Fig. 3.40.
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O) For Detroit engines, if coolant temperature rises
GHG14 and GHG17 above the maximum temperature listed in Table 3.2,
Engine Make
Engines the CHECK engine lamp will illuminate. If the condi-
Cummins 25 tion does not improve, the STOP engine lamp will
Detroit 18 also illuminate and an audible warning will sound.
The engine will then derate or shut down, depending
Table 3.1, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values on the type of engine protection system installed.

NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and Maximum Coolant Temperature
cause a temporary high reading. Engine Make Temperature: °F (°C)
Cummins 225 (107)
Application Air Pressure Gauge Detroit 215 (101)
An application air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.39) regis- Table 3.2, Maximum Coolant Temperature
ters the air pressure being used to apply the brakes,
and should be used for reference only. The gauge
will not register air pressure until the foot brake pedal
is depressed or the trailer hand brake is applied.

3.21
 Instruments

08/16/2019 f611780
10/31/2016 f611384

Fig. 3.40, Analog Coolant Temperature Gauge - ICUC

Fig. 3.41, Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (rear drive
axle gauge shown)
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges
NOTICE
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, drive axle oil temperature
gauges should read as follows:
• 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Detroit™ and
Meritor™ drive axles
• 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Dana Spicer®
drive axles 08/16/2019 f611781

Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep Fig. 3.42, Analog Engine Oil Pressure Gauge - ICUC
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If The engine oil pressure gauge displays the current
the temperature returns to normal when the load de- engine oil pressure. If engine oil pressure falls below
creases, there is no problem. See Fig. 3.41. the minimum levels shown in Table 3.3, the CHECK
engine lamp will illuminate. If the condition does not
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge improve, the STOP engine lamp will also illuminate
and an audible warning will sound. The engine will
then derate or shut down, depending on the type of
NOTICE engine protection system installed.
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure NOTE: Oil pressures in Table 3.3 are given with
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle the engine at operating temperature. With the
to a safe stop and investigate the cause to pre- engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Indi-
vent further damage. Do not operate the engine vidual engines may vary from the listed pres-
until the cause has been determined and sures; observe and record pressures when the
corrected.

3.22
Instruments

engine is new to create a guide for checking

engine condition.

Minimum Oil Pressure*

At Idle Speed: At Rated RPM:
Engine Model
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
Cummins 15 (103) 35 (241)
Detroit 14 (97) 55 (350)
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With
the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition.
Table 3.3, Minimum Engine Oil Pressure

Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

10/31/2016 f611381
NOTICE Fig. 3.43, Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and 1
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the engine until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, the optional engine oil tem-
perature gauge should read in the following tempera- 2
ture range:
• 200 to 260°F (93 to 126°C) for Detroit and
Cummins engines
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
3 4
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem. See Fig. 3.43.
06/28/2016 f611409
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 1. Fuel Gauge Pointer 4. Low DEF Warning
2. DEF Gauge Pointer Lamp
Gauge 3. Low Fuel Warning
The fuel and DEF levels can be measured in a dual Lamp
purpose fuel/DEF level gauge. See Fig. 3.44. Fig. 3.44, Fuel/DEF Gauge
The diesel fuel and DEF levels are indicated on the
gauge. A low fuel warning lamp illuminates amber Primary and Secondary Air Pressure
when the diesel fuel level registers 1/8th of capacity. Gauges
The low DEF warning lamp illuminates amber when
the DEF level reaches 10% of capacity. See chapter
12 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for details of the WARNING
DEF gauge functions.
If air pressure falls below minimum pressure, the
braking ability of the vehicle will be limited. Slow
the vehicle down and bring it to a gradual stop.

3.23
 Instruments

Do not attempt to move the vehicle until air pres-

sure has risen above the minimum level. Moving
a vehicle without adequate braking power could
cause an accident resulting in property damage,
personal injury, or death.
Air pressure gauges register the pressure in the pri-
mary and secondary air systems. See Fig. 3.45. Nor-
mal pressure, with the engine running, is 100 to 120
psi (689 to 827 kPa) in both systems.

08/16/2019 f611782

Fig. 3.46, Analog Speedometer - ICUC

Suspension Air Pressure Gauge

A suspension air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.47) registers
the air pressure applied to the vehicle air
suspension.

08/16/2019 f611779

Fig. 3.45, Analog Combined Application Air Pressure

Gauge - ICUC

NOTE: The low-air warning buzzer only works

when the park brake is released. The low-air
warning buzzer is silenced when the park brake
is set.
If air pressure drops below approximately 70 psi (483
kPa), a warning light illuminates and the driver dis-
play shows a warning. A low-air warning buzzer also
sounds if the park brake is not set.
NOTE: If the pressure in both air systems drops
below 70 psi, the parking brakes will drag or 10/31/2016 f611468
apply.
Fig. 3.47, Suspension Air Pressure Gauge
Speedometer
Tachometer
Two physical speedometer options are available. The
U.S. version of the speedometer (Fig. 3.46) registers The tachometer or rev counter indicates engine
speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers speed in revolutions per minute (rpm) and serves as
per hour (km/h), with mph in larger numbers. The a guide for shifting the transmission and keeping the
metric version of the speedometer face reverses this engine in the appropriate rpm range. The tachometer
arrangement, with km/h in larger numbers. has only one unit of measurement, 0-2500 rpm. For
low idle and rated rpm, consult your vehicle’s engine
identification plate. See Fig. 3.48.

3.24
Instruments

further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until

the cause has been determined and corrected.
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem.

Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge

A turbocharger boost pressure gauge (Fig. 3.50) indi-
cates the pressure in the intake manifold, in excess
of atmospheric pressure, being created by the
turbocharger.

01/02/2020 f611783

Fig. 3.48, Analog Tachometer - ICUC

Transmission Fluid Temperature

Gauge
The transmission fluid temperature gauge, (Fig. 3.49)
measures the transmission lubricant operating tem-
perature. Temperatures vary by application, but the
transmission fluid temperature gauge reading should
not exceed 250°F (121°C).

10/31/2016 f611382

Fig. 3.50, Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge

Voltmeter
The voltmeter indicates the vehicle charging system
voltage when the engine is running and the battery
voltage when the engine is off. By monitoring the
voltmeter, the driver can stay aware of potential bat-
tery charging problems and have them fixed before
the batteries discharge enough to create starting diffi-
culties.
The voltmeter will normally show approximately 13.7
10/31/2016 f611383
to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The voltage
Fig. 3.49, Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when
the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0 volts is
considered a low battery, and a completely dis-
NOTICE charged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.

A sudden increase in transmission fluid tempera- If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or over-
ture that is not caused by a load increase may charged condition for an extended period, have the
indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a charging system and batteries checked at an autho-
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent rized Freightliner service facility.

3.25
 Instruments

On a vehicle equipped with a battery isolator system, optical finger navigation control (OFN) buttons on the
the voltmeter measures the average voltage of all the steering wheel, and visual and audible warning
batteries when the engine is running. When the en- systems.
gine is off, the voltmeter shows only the isolated bat-
The driver display, or A-panel, provides the driver
tery voltage and does not indicate the voltage of the
with information about the vehicle status and vehicle
engine-starting batteries.
systems. The infotainment display, or B-panel, pro-
vides access to phone, radio, navigation, and other
Instrumentation Control Unit: controls. See "Driver Display: ICC5" in this chapter
ICC5 for details on the A-panel display features. See "Info-
tainment: ICC5" in this chapter for details on the
The instrumentation control unit (ICU) provides the B-panel display and multimedia connection unit.
driver with engine and vehicle information. A New
Cascadia vehicle can be equipped with either an Ignition Sequence
ICUC or ICC5. See Fig. 3.51 for a typical ICC5
layout. When the ignition is turned on, the ICU runs a self-
check. Observing the ignition sequence is a good
This section provides general system and operating way to ensure the ICU is functioning properly.
instructions for ICC5 components. Following sections
provide more detailed information. IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the

2
1
3

06/28/2019 f611580b
1. A-Panel: Driver Display 2. B-Panel: Infotainment Display 3. USB2 Ports

Fig. 3.51, ICC5 Dual Display Screens and USB2 ports

ICC5 ICU self-check is complete.

The Instrument Cluster Connect 5, or ICC5, has a ICC5
driver display screen, an infotainment touch screen,
a multimedia connection unit with two USB2 ports, NOTE: There is no Lane Departure Warning
audible self-test.

3.26
Instruments

When the ignition is turned on, the following actions ing and radio controls, and manages the integration
should occur in the ICC5: of phone, smart phone and media sources. Each cor-
ner of the ICC5 infotainment display is a quick ac-
• The logos for the engine and transmission dis-
cess icon for commonly used features. For an over-
play on the infotainment screen. view of menu category icons on the infotainment
• If installed, an Active Brake Assist (ABA) popup screen as well as infotainment quick access icons,
disclaimer appears on the driver display see Fig. 3.54.
screen.
NOTE: Screens may vary depending on vehicle
• If ignition status is set to Adaptive Cruise Con- options. Some screens are accessible only
trol (ACC), the tripmeter and odometer values when the vehicle is parked.
are shown on the driver display screen.
• If the ignition is set to ON, all ICC5 screens ICC5 Steering Wheel Buttons
and options are available. To navigate features and screens, use the Optical
IMPORTANT: If any red or amber warnings do Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons on the
not go out after the self-check completes, take steering wheel. See Fig. 3.55.
the action outlined in the Warnings, Indicators, The buttons in the left-hand pod control the driver
and Messages section in this chapter, then take display features. The buttons in the right-hand pod
the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service provide access to infotainment features and menus.
facility as soon as possible.
ICC5 Touch Screen Operation
ICC5 Screen Navigation IMPORTANT: All keyboard entries are locked
NOTE: The brightness of the ICC5 display when the parking brake is disengaged. Other
screens can be adjusted in Settings. touch screen options still function.
The ICC5 is equipped with two screens. The driver Tapping
display screen in the dashboard in front of the driver
and the infotainment screen. Tap the touch screen to:
The driver display screen provides basic vehicle and • Select a menu item, icon, or entry
environmental information. Battery voltage, outside
• Enter characters with keyboard by tapping on a
ambient air temperature, current time, and current
character buttons.
compass direction are displayed across the top of
the screen. Information such as fuel gauge, current
speed, gear, odometer reading, and primary and sec-
Single-Finger Swipe
ondary air pressure gauges display on the bottom of Use a single-finger swipe to:
the screen. Telltales are displayed at both the top
and bottom of the screen. • Navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or
right.
The driver display screen provides information in two
different modes: a base screen layout and a pilot • Scroll through screens.
screen layout. • Select a menu item, icon, or entry.
The base screen consists of a digital tachometer/
speedometer in the center of the screen. See Touching, Holding and Moving
Fig. 3.52. Touch, hold, and move the finger to:
The pilot screen moves the speedometer and ta- • Select the value on a slider control.
chometer to the bottom of the screen to provide driv-
ing assistance information in the screen’s center. See
Fig. 3.53.
Time and Date
The infotainment screen is a touch screen and dis- Time and date are set automatically when the
plays the standard gauges as well as information vehicle is equipped with a tachograph. When a
about the cab and chassis. It also serves as the
navigation systems screen, provides access to light-

3.27
 Instruments

05/08/2019 f611704

Fig. 3.52, Driver Display Base Screen - ICC5

2. Installing the software.

3. Activating the software by restarting the system.
A popup message and a blue folder will appear in
one of the dynamic telltale locations on the driver
display (see Fig. 3.56, callout 18) when an update is
available. In addition the software update option in
the diagnostics menu will be active.
08/07/2019 f611703
The vehicle must be in neutral gear, the parking
Fig. 3.53, Driver Display Pilot Screen - ICC5 brake set, and the engine off before a software up-
date can start. Once started, a software update can-
vehicle is equipped with a tachograph only the not be cancelled.
time zone can be changed. During the software update process, progress mes-
ICC5 time and alarm clock settings can be found sages will be provided.
under the Settings menu. See the appropriate Driver If a software update is interrupted, the system will
Display section for details. ask if you want to restart the process or inform you
The correct time and date is required for the follow- that the vehicle cannot be driven until the update is
ing ICC5 functions to work: complete. If a software update fails, the system will
attempt to revert to the previous version. A notifica-
• Alarm clock tion will appear when a software update has been
• Navigation guidance with time-dependent traffic successfully installed.
routing Failure to install software updates may make data
less secure and/or mean vehicle systems are not
• Calculation of the expected time of arrival
operating at their best.
• Maintenance
NOTE: An estimation of installation time will be
• Prognostics given before the software update starts. Installa-
tion can take several minutes. During installation
Software Updates individual functions and controls will not be
A software update consists of three steps: available or only available to a limited degree.
1. Downloading the software.

3.28
Instruments

1 2 3

5 4
06/278/2019 f611757
1. Home 3. Digital Switches 5. Settings
2. Status Line 4. Saved Favorites

Fig. 3.54, Infotainment Menu Options, Icons, Status Line - ICC5

Driver Display Overview: ICC5 For a full list of telltales and their meanings, see
Warnings, Indicators, and Messages in this
The ICC5 driver display (or A-panel display) is used chapter.
to communicate information about the current ve-
hicles status and environmental information. The bat- ICC5 Steering Wheel Buttons
tery voltage, outside ambient air temperature, current
time, and current compass direction are displayed To navigate features and screens, use the Optical
across the top of the screen. Information such as fuel Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons on the
gauge, current speed, odometer reading, current steering wheel.
gear, and primary and secondary air pressure The buttons in the left-hand pod control the driver
gauges display on the bottom of the screen. display features. See Fig. 3.57. The buttons in the
The driver display provides information in two differ- right-hand pod provide access to infotainment fea-
ent modes: a base screen layout (see Fig. 3.52) and tures and menus. See Fig. 3.58.
a pilot screen layout (see Fig. 3.53). What screen
displays depends on safety features installed and if Basic ICC5 Functions
the vehicle is in motion.
ICC5 Alert Messages
ICC5 Driver Display Screen Alert messages appear on the driver display when
Each telltale has its screen location except for dy- certain conditions occur. They include warnings, cau-
namic telltales which are displayed in positions 17-20 tions, and notices that require the driver’s attention.
and sorted in priority order from right to left— Not all alert messages are critical to the operation of
meaning position 20 has the highest priority. See the vehicle. More important messages take priority
Fig. 3.56. If there are more that four dynamic tell- over less important messages. The header text and
tales active, only the four highest priority ones are color indicates the priority of the on-screen message,
displayed. listed from the highest to the lowest:
• Warning (red)

3.29
 Instruments

3 7 8
2
9
1

6 5 A 4 12 11 A 10

10/25/2018 f611531
A. Menu Buttons—The left Menu button accesses the driver display. The right Menu button accesses the infotainment
screen.
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 6. Cruise Decelerate/Set 10. Volume Increment Down
2. Back Button 7. Phone Pick-Up 11. Mute Button
3. Quick Access System Settings 8. Back Button 12. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
4. Marker Interrupt** 9. Volume Increment Up ** Not available in all markets.
5. Cruise Cancel
Fig. 3.55, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Optical Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons - ICC5

• Caution (amber) Dates can be displayed as: DD.MM.YYYY, MM/DD/

YYYY, or YYYY/MM/DD. Selection is made using
• Status/Informational (blue, green, white, and
either/or radio buttons.
grey)
Time can be displayed in 12 AM/PM or 24 hour for-
Warnings alert the driver to situations or conditions mat.
that may pose a threat to control of the vehicle. Fol-
low all instructions given in the message. ICC5 Alarm Settings
Cautions alert the driver to situations or conditions
NOTE: The ability to set the alarm clock and
that may result in damage to vehicle components, or
derating of engine power. timers is only available when the parking brake
is engaged.
Status notices alert the driver to situations or condi-
tions that may improve fuel efficiency or vehicle han- Alarm Clock Controls and Features:
dling. • Time of Day
ICC5 Time and Date Settings • Repeat

The following settings can be controlled under Time • Audio Source

and Date: selecting a time zone, turning Automatic • Light Alarm
Summer Time on or off, turning Summer Time on or
off, and setting the date and time format. Tapping on a bar at the bottom of the screen in the
alarm clock menu switches between alarm clocks
Automatic Summer Time is another name for auto- and the sleep timers. If alarms have been set, the
matic daylight saving time. If this is set to on then the
controls for Summer Time are unavailable.

3.30
Instruments

8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16

7 10

17 18 19 20 28 29 30 31
23 24 25
21 26 27
22
04/29/2019 f611644
1. Check Transmission 13. Electronically Controlled Air 21.Water in Fuel
2. High Exhaust Temperature Suspension (ECAS) Problem 22.Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low
3. DPF Status Approaching Full 14. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 23.Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Active
4. Engine Malfunction Lamp 24.Hill Descent Mode Active
5. Check Engine 15. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 25.Gear Teach Mode In Process
6. Stop Engine 16. Unfastened Seat Belt 26.Low Brake Air Pressure
7. Turn Indicator Left 17. Dynamic:Low Engine Oil Pressure 27.Park Brake Applied
8. Blue = High Beams On 18. Dynamic: Software Update 28.Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
9. Tire Pressure: Yellow = Low Available 29.ABS Trailer
10. Turn Indicator Right 19. Dynamic: Supplementary Restraint 30.Active Brake Assist (ABA) Not
11. Engine Brake Engaged System (SRS) Error Available
12. Automatic Traction Control (ATC) 20. Dynamic: Aerodynamic Height 31 Hill Start Aid Active
Active Control Active
Fig. 3.56, ICC5 Driver Display Telltale Locations

corresponding icon in the bar indicates this with the If an alarm includes turning on lights, a light icon is
number of active alarms shown inside a circle. shown on the alarm tile at the bottom right. Wake up
lighting can be set to be turned on at 10% to 100%
Up to fifteen alarms can be shown in a carousel view
brightness.
on the screen. They are sorted from the beginning of
the day on the left and the end of the day on the Alarms can be edited by pressing on the pencil icon
right. If less than fifteen alarms have been set, a Add below the alarm tile. To delete an alarm, press on the
Alarm icon will be available in carousel display at the edit pencil icon and choose Delete.
far right. If fifteen alarms have been created, the Add
Alarm icon is not available. ICC5 Sleep Timer Settings
New alarms are set to be On when created. Alarms The sleep timer’s function is to turn off the light(s)
can be toggled off and on by pressing on an alarm and/or music after a certain period of time. The de-
tile. An active alarm has a red line at the top of the fault value is 30 minutes but the sleep timer can be
alarm tile. set anywhere from 1 minute to 3 hours and 59 min-
utes.
If an alarm has been set to repeat, the selected days
of the week will be listed below the time. ICCC5 Temperature
The audio of an alarm can be set under Audio
NOTE: Pay attention to road conditions when air
Source. Options include up to 15 preset alarm
sounds and any available radio station. temperatures are near freezing.

3.31
 Instruments

3 1
2 2
3
1

6 5 A 4 A
6 5 4
10/25/2018 f611531a 10/25/2018 f611531b
A. Menu Button—Press the button to access A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument panel menus. When the button is instrument panel menus. When the button is
pressed, information appears on the driver display pressed, information appears on the 10-inch head
screen. unit screen.
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 1. Phone Pick-Up
2. Back Button 2. Back Button
3. Quick Access System Settings 3. Volume Increment Up
4. Marker Interrupt 4. Volume Increment Down
5. Cruise Cancel 5. Mute Button
6. Cruise Decelerate/Set 6. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
Fig. 3.57, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Left-Hand Switch Fig. 3.58, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Pod -
Pod - ICC5 ICC5

In the ICC5 the ambient air temperature displays at 1

the top and slightly to the right on the driver display 3
screen. See Fig. 3.52. The temperature can be set 2 4
to display in °F or °C in Settings.
When ambient air temperature drops below 34°F
(1°C), a snowflake icon will appear below the display
temperature. The snowflake icon will display until the
ambient air temperature rises to 37°F (3°C).
08/07/2019 f611763
If the temperature drops below 34°F (1°C) after rising 1. Gauge Screen Name 3. Gauge Name
above 37°F (3°C), the snowflake will reappear. 2. Gauge Icon 4. Gauge Value

Fig. 3.59, Example Gauge Screen - ICC5

Digital Gauges and System
Monitors: ICC5 The default display order of gauges is as follows:
• Coolant Temperature
ICC5 Gauges • Engine Oil Pressure
There are thirteen digital gauges under the Gauges • Engine Oil Temperature
menu on the B-panel or infotainment display. See
Fig. 3.59 for an example screen overview. Twelve • Transmission Oil Temperature
are informational only; if active, Soot Level includes a • Front Axle Oil Temperature
button to start a regeneration.

3.32
Instruments

• Rear Axle Oil Temperature Coolant Temperature Gauge

• Lift Axle Pressure
• Soot Level NOTICE
• Application Air Pressure A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring
• Suspension Air Pressure
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
• Trailer Application Air Pressure cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined
• Trailer Suspension Air Pressure
and corrected.
• Turbo Boost Pressure During normal engine operation, the coolant tem-
The default can be changed. Pressing on an existing perature gauge should read 175 to 195°F (79 to
gauge will cause a popup window to appear with the 91°C). If the temperature remains below 160°F
option to either Remove or Replace the gauge. (71°C), inspect the cooling system to determine the
Choosing Replace will bring up a radio button list of cause.
all available gauges from which to choose; replacing For Detroit engines, if coolant temperature rises
a gauge will move the first gauge into a different above the maximum temperature listed in Table 3.4,
screen placement. Removing a gauge removes the the CHECK engine lamp will illuminate. If the condi-
gauge from the gauge screens. A removed gauge tion does not improve, the STOP engine lamp will
can be added back by pressing the Add or plus sign also illuminate and an audible warning will sound.
button. Doing so will cause a radio button list to ap- The engine will then derate or shut down, depending
pear listing the gauges available to be added. on the type of engine protection system installed.
Gauge units of measurements are controlled under
Settings which can be accessed under the Cab Maximum Coolant Temperature
menu or by pressing the star menu icon in the lower Engine Make Temperature: °F (°C)
left corner. Cummins 225 (107)
Moving between gauge screens can be accom- Detroit 215 (101)
plished by pressing the gauge screen name at the Table 3.4, Maximum Coolant Temperature
top of the screen.
In the ICC5, if a value measured by a digital gauge
exceeds the normal range, the gauge icon, display Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
bar graph color, and gauge value will change color to
amber to indicate caution or red to indicate danger. NOTICE
See Fig. 3.60.
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle
1 2 to a safe stop and investigate the cause to pre-
3
vent further damage. Do not operate the engine
until the cause has been determined and cor-
rected.
The engine oil pressure gauge displays the current
engine oil pressure. If engine oil pressure falls below
08/07/2019 f611764 the minimum levels shown in Table 3.5, the CHECK
engine lamp on the driver display will illuminate. If
1. Red Gauge Icon 3. Red Gauge Value
the condition does not improve, the STOP engine
2. Red Gauge Bar Graph
lamp will also illuminate and an audible warning will
Fig. 3.60, Gauge Caution & Warning Indicator Display - sound. The engine will then derate or shut down, de-
ICC5 pending on the type of engine protection system in-
stalled.
Gauge information can also be viewed on the driver
display. See Fig. 3.63. NOTE: Oil pressures in Table 3.5 are given with
the engine at operating temperature. With the

3.33
 Instruments

engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Indi- safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent
vidual engines may vary from the listed pres- further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until
sures; observe and record pressures when the the cause has been determined and corrected.
engine is new to create a guide for checking Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
engine condition. grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
Minimum Oil Pressure* the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
At Idle Speed: At Rated RPM: creases, there is no problem.
Engine Model
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
Cummins 15 (103) 35 (241) Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges
Detroit 14 (97) 55 (350)
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With NOTICE
the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition. A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
Table 3.5, Minimum Engine Oil Pressure caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
NOTICE During normal operation, drive axle oil temperature
gauges should read as follows:
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not • 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Detroit™ and
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani- Meritor™ drive axles
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage. • 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Dana Spicer®
Do not operate the engine until the cause has drive axles
been determined and corrected. Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
During normal operation, the optional engine oil tem- grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature gauge should read in the following tempera- perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
ture range: the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem.
• 200 to 260°F (93 to 126°C) for Detroit and
Cummins engines Lift Axle Pressure Gauge
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem- The lift axle pressure gauge registers the air pres-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If sure applied to the lift axles.
the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem. DPF Soot Level Gauge
See chapter 12 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge details of Diesel Particulate Filter and DEF level
The transmission fluid temperature gauge measures monitoring.
the transmission lubricant operating temperature.
Temperatures vary by application, but the transmis- Application Air Pressure Gauge
sion fluid temperature gauge reading should not ex- An application air pressure gauge registers the air
ceed 250°F (121°C). pressure being used to apply the brakes. The gauge
will not register air pressure until the foot brake pedal
NOTICE is depressed or the trailer hand brake is applied.

A sudden increase in transmission fluid tempera- Suspension Air Pressure Gauge

ture that is not caused by a load increase may
indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a The suspension air pressure gauge registers the air
pressure applied to the vehicle air suspension.

3.34
Instruments

Trailer Application Air Pressure Gauge The driver display will normally show approximately
13.7 to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The
The trailer application air pressure registers the ap- voltage of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts
plied air pressure in the brake circuit. when the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0
volts is considered a low battery, and a completely
Trailer Suspension Air Pressure discharged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.
Gauge If the driver display screen shows an undercharged
or overcharged condition for an extended period,
The trailer suspension air pressure gauge registers have the charging system and batteries checked at
the air pressure applied to the trailer air suspension. an authorized Freightliner service facility.
Turbo Boost Pressure Gauge Speedometer and Tachometer
The turbo boost pressure gauge registers the pres- In the ICC5 the speedometer and tachometer are
sure in the intake manifold, in excess of atmospheric combined. On the driver display base screen the in-
pressure, being created by the turbocharger. formation is presented as a centered arch (see
Fig. 3.62). On the driver display pilot screen, it be-
Base ICC5 A-Panel Gauges

2 8
3
4

5 7
6
07/26/2019 f611703a
1. Battery Voltage 4. DEF Fluid Level Gauge 7. Primary Air Pressure Gauge
2. Speedometer 5. Odometer 8. Tachometer
3. Fuel Gauge 6. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
Fig. 3.61, Driver Display in Pilot Screen Mode - ICC5

Outside of the gauges screen, the ICC5 offers a comes a split band near the bottom of the screen
number of other digital gauges and instruments. (see Fig. 3.61).
The speedometer registers the speed of the vehicle.
Battery Voltage
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions
The ICC5 A-panel displays the vehicle charging sys- per minute (rpm) and serves as a guide for shifting
tem voltage in the upper left corner. By monitoring the transmission and keeping the engine in the ap-
this number, the driver can stay aware of potential propriate rpm range. The tachometer has an over-
battery charging problems and have them fixed be- speed zone, marked in red, from 2300 to 2500 rpms.
fore the batteries discharge enough to create starting
difficulties. The speedometer and tachometer and measure
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h),

3.35
 Instruments

Primary and Secondary Air Gauges

1
Primary and secondary air gauges are stacked in the
2 lower right corner of the A-panel display. See
Fig. 3.61. When the air pressure drops too low, both
the air pressure measurement and the air pressure
icon will change color. A complete lack of air pres-
sure will result in only the icon being either amber
(caution) or red (danger).

Floating ICC5 A-Panel Gauges

Vehicle information can also be accessed on the
driver display or A-panel screen by moving through
versions of the base layout.
01/02/2020 f546895a The gauge information available on the infotainment
or B-panel screen shows up on the left side of the
1. Speedometer 2. Tachometer
speedometer/tachometer. See Fig. 3.63.
Fig. 3.62, Speedometer and Tachometer Base Driver
Display Screen - ICC5

depending on the option selected in the system

settings.

Fuel Level Gauge

Fuel levels are indicated on a gauge in the lower left
corner of the driver display screen above the DEF
level gauge. The fuel pump icon to the right of the
gauge will illuminate amber when the diesel fuel level
registers 1/8th of capacity and stay amber until the
fuel tank is refilled.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level

Gauge
The driver display screen shows a DEF level gauge
in the lower left hand corner below the fuel gauge.
07/30/2019 f611770
When the DEF level reaches 1/8th of capacity, the
low DEF icon and the remaining measurement bar Fig. 3.63, Coolant Temperature & Engine Oil Pressure
illuminate amber. The bar will continue to remain on Driver Display - ICC5
amber as it decreases until the DEF tank is empty, at
which point only the low DEF icon will remain lit. See Safety feature graphics and pop-up screens appear
chapter 12 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for more in the center and feature related icons appear at bot-
details on the DEF level gauge. tom center of the screen.
Data such as trip information, fuel consumption, and
Odometer eco driver feedback appear to the right of the
The odometer is located below the speed indicator at speedometer/tachometer. See Fig. 3.64.
the bottom center of the screen. See Fig. 3.61. De-
pending on what values are chosen in the Settings Eco Driver Feedback
menu, the odometer will display engine miles driven Eco Driver Feedback encourages a driver to make
in mph or km. The display units can be changed at economical driving a habit with the goal of saving
any time. fuel and reducing wear. See Fig. 3.64.

3.36
Instruments

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System

• Axles
• Maintenance System
• Diagnostics
• Active Driver Alerts

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system displays tire
pressure, temperature, and sensor status. Maintain-
ing correct tire pressure increases fuel economy.
Sustained high tire temperature can cause a tire to
deteriorate, leading to tread separation and blowouts.
Tire Pressure has three submenu options: tire pres-
sure, tire temperature, and sensor status. Selecting
07/30/2019 f611771
the tire icon image will display a vehicle image on
the screen showing the tire pressure for each tire.
Fig. 3.64, Eco Driver Feedback on the Driver Display -
ICC5 Tire pressure can be displayed in psi or bar units.
The unit of measure is displayed behind the rear left
Eco Driver Feedback gauges, displayed on the right- tire on the vehicle image. See Fig. 3.65. Units of
hand side of the driver display, show a driver’s per- measure are set under Settings.
formance in three categories: gentle braking, smooth
acceleration, and cruise control usage. Performance
is newly calculated with each vehicle start. 2
1
Examples of driving behavior that increases or de-
creases the amount of green in each column are as
follows: 3

• Time in cruise control increases the Cruise 4

Control Usage value.
08/07/2019 f611760
• Failure to engage cruise control after the Use 1. Set Pressure button 4. Submenu Screen
Cruise Control popup appears decreases the 2. Tire Pressure Value Indicator
Cruise Control Usage value 3. Units of Measurement
• Pumping the accelerator pedal decreases the Fig. 3.65, TPMS: Tire Pressure - ICC5
Smooth Acceleration value.
• Keeping the speed steady with cruise control Tires on the truck image will change color if tire pres-
sure is too high or too low based on factory settings.
off increases the Smooth Acceleration value.
Red indicates a condition that may pose a threat to
• Sudden braking outside of an urban environ- the control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a condi-
ment decreases the Gentle Braking value. tion that may result in damage. See Fig. 3.66,
• No incidences of sudden breaking over time The option to Set Pressure is available on the tire
increases the Gentle Braking value. pressure screen. Selecting this option allows you to
change default settings.
ICC5 B-Panel Chassis Status Selecting the temperature icon will show an image of
Information the vehicle on the screen showing the temperature of
each tire. Tire temperature can be displayed in Fahr-
In addition to controls and gauges, the ICC5 B-panel enheit or Celsius. The unit of measure is displayed
provides access to chassis status information:

3.37
 Instruments

Standard messaging is based on the number of

miles (km) driven or time passed since the last ser-
1 vice.
Predictive maintenance information is calculated
2 based on these factors as well as engine and trans-
3 mission load and oil temperature.
Currently, predictive maintenance information is given
08/07/2019 f611761 for engine oil, transmission oil, and axle oil changes.
By taking driving conditions into account, predictive
1. Tire Temperature 3. Screen Indicator
2. Unit of Measurement maintenance provides more accurate intervals for
fluid changes.
Fig. 3.66, TPMS: Tire Temperature- ICC5
Just before the service interval ends, a message that
behind the rear left tire on the vehicle image. Units of maintenance is due will appear. See Fig. 3.68.
measure are set under Settings.
Tires on the truck image will change color if tire tem-
perature is too high. Red indicates a condition that
may pose a threat to the vehicle. Amber indicates a 1
condition that may result in damage.
Selecting the battery icon will show the battery 2
strength of each tire sensor.
If a sensor’s battery life is low, both the tire and the 08/07/2019 f611759
sensor icon on the truck image will change color to 1. Amber Wrench Indicating Maintenance is Overdue
amber. If sensor battery status is critically low they 2. Reset Button
will become red. See Fig. 3.67.
Fig. 3.68, Example ICC5 Maintenance Screen - ICC5

When the service interval is reached, a pop-up notice

1 that maintenance is due will appear with every key
cycle.
When the service interval is overdue, the color of the
wrench icon on the maintenance screen will change
2 from white to amber and the message will change to
Maintenance Overdue. This cautionary pop-up will
08/07/2019 f611762
continue to appear with every key cycle.
1. Sensor Battery Icon 2. Screen Indicator
The color of the wrench icon on the maintenance
Fig. 3.67, TPMS: Sensor Status - ICC5 screen will change from white to amber when a
maintenance service is overdue.
Axles A service interval countdown can be reset by press-
This menu provides access to the axle locks status ing the reset button which will cause a confirmation
screen showing engaged locks. pop-up message to appear. If the required mainte-
nance has been carried out, click Yes. Resetting the
For more information see chapter 17 Drive Axles. maintenance system when service is performed cre-
ates accurate future service intervals.
Maintenance System The reset button for maintenance system screens will
NOTE: the wrench icon indicates a need for not appear until the vehicle has been driven 6.2
maintenance, not something broken that needs miles and the engine has run for fifteen minutes.
to be fixed.

3.38
Instruments

Maintenance system information and service recom- Alerts are color-coded to indicate severity. Red indi-
mendations can also be viewed in the Detroit Con- cates a condition that may pose a threat to control of
nect portal. Information on the portal is updated the vehicle. Amber indicates a condition that may
every seven days. result in damage to vehicle components or derating
of engine power. Grey is used for notices.
Diagnostics
ICC5 B-Panel Controls
The Diagnostics screen communicates fault codes
and other diagnostic information about the vehicle. In addition to the features described above, the ICC5
B-panel provides a number of digital controls and
Fault codes are color-coded to indicate the severity
environmental information. Under the Cab menu this
of the fault. Red indicates a condition that may pose
includes:
a threat to control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a
condition that may result in damage to vehicle com- • Digital Switches
ponents or derating of engine power. Grey indicates
a condition that may affect fuel efficiency or vehicle • Optimized Idle
handling. • Settings

Active Driver Alerts Digital Switches

The Active Driver Alerts screen stores the current
active alerts.

Digital Switch Icons

Lane Departure Air Suspension Level

Inhibit Regeneration Active Traction Control Power Takeoff 1
Warning Up

Lane Keep Assist Regeneration Air Suspension Level

Power Takeoff 2
Active Activation Down
Table 3.6, Example of Digital Switch Icons and Layout

Digital switches can be used to turn different vehicle Optimized Idle

functions on or off. An indicator at the top of the digi-
tal button shows the status of the switch with a red Optimized Idle reduces idle time by automatically
line indicating On. stopping and restarting the engine. Besides saving
fuel, it helps keep the batteries charged while main-
the arrangement of the switches depends on the fea- taining engine and cab temperature.
tures of the vehicle. In general switches are grouped
into pairs stacked on top of each other. If a feature The following conditions must be met for the opti-
only has one switch or only one switch is available it mized idle to function:
will be displayed at the top of the two switch column.

3.39
 Instruments

• Vehicle in neutral gear NOTE: Settings options will change based on

• Parking brake set the features installed on the vehicle.
• Hood latched Settings lets you choose system defaults such as:
• Display Style
• Sleeper fan on
Optimized idle has four unique operating modes: bat- – Adaptive Cruise Display Style
tery, cold startability (engine oil temperature), interior There are currently no other display style options.
comfort mode, keyless.
• Language:
• Battery mode: starts the engine when battery
voltage is below a certain threshold. – English (American)

• Engine oil temperature mode: starts the engine – Francçais (Canadian)

when the engine oil temperature is below a – Español (Mexican)
certain threshold.
Language is selected via either/or radio buttons from
• Comfort mode: starts the engine to maintain a list.
the driver’s selected interior temperature
• Units:
• Keyless mode: maintains any of the modes
above without the key in the ignition switch. – Speed: km/h or mph

Optimized idle can be started with the engine running – Fuel consumption: 1/100km or mpg
or the engine off. – Distance: kilometers or miles
1. With the key on, go to the Cab menu and select – Temperature: Celsius or Fahrenheit
Optimized Idle. A caution notice will popup.
– Pressure: kPa or PSI
2. Read the caution and press Enable.
– Following: distance or time
3. A screen may appear to start Standby or another
mode. If this is the only option, press Enable. Unit measurements are selected via either/or radio
buttons for each category.
4. Otherwise a screen will appear with an Enable
with Comfort button as an option. If you want to NOTE: Setting a Distance unit to miles or kilo-
optimize the environment of the sleeper section, meter will auto-populate the Consumption mea-
select the Enable with Comfort button. surement to either mpg or 1/100km and Follow-
5.
ing Distance to either feet or yards.
The vehicle will go into standby mode, an under
hood alarm will briefly sound, and the engine will • Brightness:
crank and achieve 900 rpm. The screen will
change to the selected mode. A Disable button – Instrument Display
will be present. – Infotainment Display
6. The engine and fan/air conditioning will run until – Dash
it achieves the temperature requested by the
driver. The engine will then shut down. Brightness levels for each display can be adjusted
with an on-screen slider.
Optimized idle can be shut off by ICUC controls or
pressing the brake. If the sleeper fan is turned off, • Key Alert
optimized idle will not shut down but the engine will. Turns the auditory lock alert on or off.

Settings • Display Off

Selecting this turns the display off; touching any-
The settings menu is also always available by tap-
where on the display screen turns it on again.
ping on the settings (gear) icon in the lower left hand
corner of the B-panel or infotainment screen. Set- • Controls:
tings can also be accessed under the Cab menu.
– Keyboards: For selecting keyboards for
different languages and scripts.

3.40
Instruments

– Acoustic operating feedback: choices for Exterior lighting

sound levels include normal, loud, and
off. The exterior lighting screen presents an image of the
front of a New Cascadia vehicle showing lights and
– Touch Control Sensitivity: choices for digital switches for those lights. Touching a switch
touch control sensitivity are slow, me- lights up the switch, activates the lights on the image
dium, and fast. of the truck, and turns on that light on the truck itself;
• Audio: touching the switch again turns all these lights off.

– Navigation and Traffic Announcements: Touching the intelligent high-beam headlights control
Driving Volume: slider volume control. at the bottom of the screen will change its status. For
this switch the status of On is indicated by a lighted
– System Feedback: Acoustic Operating bar at the top of the icon.
Feedback: normal, loud, and off.
When intelligent high-beam headlights are on, the
– Phone: Ringtone Volume: slider volume high-beam headlights will switch to low-beam head-
control. lights when a vehicle approaches from the opposite
– Phone: Speech Volume: slider volume direction. They will switch back to high-beam head-
control. lights when no vehicles are approaching from the
opposite direction.
• Licence Activation:
The intelligent headlights can also be controlled by
List of activated software licences with sub- using the headlight switch and turn signal lever; see
menu listing activation and expiration dates. chapter 4 Driver Controls for more information.
• Reset: Touching the courtesy lighting icon will open a popup
Deletes all data from the system. showing the current lighting duration and allowing the
lighting duration to be adjusted.
Driving Assistance Settings Exterior lighting controlled by the rotary dial cannot
The Driving Assistance menu is only available if at be controlled through the exterior light screen.
least one driving assistant setting is available. The If the fog lamp is turned on via the rotary dial, the fog
Driving Assistance menu in Settings allows you to lamp on the truck graphic will be shown as on.
turn available features on or off and/or change set-
ting parameters. Interior Lighting
Possible Driving Assistance menu options include: The interior lighting menu shows an image of an inte-
• Side Guard Assist rior of a New Cascadia truck. The digital switches for
interior lighting allow for the control of overhead, foot
• Active Lane Assist well, and sleeper lights.
• Traffic Sign Display Touching any of the light icons on the screen will
• eCoast lights up the digital switch, activate the lights on the
interior image of the truck, and turn on those lights in
• Attention Assist the truck itself.
• Creep Mode All interior lights can be dimmed using the slider next
to the light icon.
Driving assistance features are described in chapter
5 Driver Assistance Features and chapter 11 Op- All available lights in the cab can be turned off and
tional Engine Systems. on by touching the Off button.
Entrance lighting can be controlled by the settings
Lighting icon. Touching the settings icon will open a popup
The lighting menu provides controls for a set of inte- window where the entrance lighting can be toggled
rior and exterior lights using the touch screen. off or on and entrance light timing controls can be
accessed. Choosing entrance light timing will be
open a slider that allows modification of the length of
time the entrance light is on.

3.41
 Instruments

All sleeper lights can be dimmed using the slider Connectivity

next to the light icon.
Connectivity settings control the on or off status of
Climate Control Information the following features:
• Bluetooth
NOTE: See chapter 6 Climate Controls for de-
tailed climate control panel operating • NFC (Near Field Communication)
instructions. • Wi-Fi
On vehicles equipped with the ICC5, climate control Active and authorized devices will have an options
information will briefly appear on the B-panel display menu (opened by selecting the three dots to the right
when physical climate controls are adjusted. The fol-
of a device name) to manage device call logs, con-
lowing controls should cause the climate bar to ap- tacts, and deauthorization.
pear: recirculation settings, fan speed, air condition-
ing status, temperature setting, and blower selection. Up to two phones can be active and connected via
Bluetooth.
If the cab is equipped with a sleeper and the sleeper
override button is pressed, the sleeper override icon
will also appear in the climate bar. In addition,
Bluetooth
changes to the climate control of the sleeper area Bluetooth is a wireless technology standard for ex-
will appear in a pop-up message. changing data over short distances, typically less
than 33 feet (10 m).
Infotainment: ICC5 A phone connected via Bluetooth will disconnect from
the system when taken far enough away from the
General ICC5 Infotainment vehicle or turned off. It will automatically reconnect
Information when in range of an active system if it has not been
deauthorized.
Information and controls available on the ICC5 info-
tainment (B-panel) display: Device Manager
• Shortcut icons, statusline, and climate bar
Under the Device Manager menu you can:
• Gauges
• Connect a new device
• Cab
• See a list of active and authorized devices
• Chassis
• Control transmission volume
• Lighting
• Control reception volume
• Navigation
• Deauthorize a device
• Phone
The last three options can be accessed by selecting
• Radio the three dots to right of the device name. Both the
reception and transmission volume consist of a slider
• Media control with a range of -2 to 2.
• Smartphone
Connecting and Disconnecting a
System Settings Phone Using Bluetooth®
Select the gear icon to open the Settings menu. Set- One can connect or authorize a mobile device such
tings is also available within the Cab menu. as a smartphone to interact with the ICC5 infotain-
System Settings lets you choose settings for driving ment system through the Phone menu.
assistance features, the system itself (language, Up to fifteen mobile phones can be authorized at a
units of measurement, etc.), and connectivity. time.
For more information see Driver Display: ICC5 in
this chapter.

3.42
Instruments

NOTE: The Smartphone menu is for connecting The Phone Menu

a device via MirrorLink®, Android Auto™ or
Once a phone is authorized and connected, a mobile
Apple CarPlay™.
phone menu for that phone is available.
Requirements:
In addition, the call list and contacts of the primary
• Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone. phone are loaded and accessible.
• The phone is visible to Bluetooth®. The phone menu provides a search function for the
primary phone’s contacts, a number pad for calling
• Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainment
people not in the contact list, and access to Blu-
system.
etooth and phone specific settings.
Activating Bluetooth® Connecting a Second Phone
NOTE: An iPhone may be connected to the info- Connecting a second phone follows the same pro-
tainment system via Apple CarPlay. cess as connecting the initial phone, however the call
1. Open Settings by selecting the gear shortcut icon list and contacts of the second phone are not loaded.
in the lefthand corner of the screen. 1. Open the Device Manager.
2. Select Connectivity. 2. Select Connect Device.
3. Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. 3. Select Connect New Device. The vehicle
4. Make sure Bluetooth is active on the phone and searches for the device.
the phone is visible via Bluetooth. 4. When a device is found, the name of that device
will appear on the screen in addition to the mes-
Connecting a Phone Using Bluetooth® sage My Device Was Not Found. Select the de-
Older phones may require that an authorization vice name.
code be manually entered on the mobile phone 5. A pop up will appear asking for verification of a
and into the infotainment system. passkey on the phone. Verify the passkey. The
device is authorized and connected.
1. Open the Device Manager.
2.
NOTE: The phone will now automatically recon-
Select Connect Device.
nect to the system when in range until deautho-
3. Select Connect New Device. The vehicle rized either in the ICC5 infotainment system or
searches for the device. on the phone itself.
4. If the connection fails, the message My Device
Was Not Found will appear. Verify the Activating Two Phone Mode
Bluetooth requirements have been met. In two phone mode, the primary mobile phone can
5. Select the My Device Was Not Found message access the phone’s contact and call list on the info-
or press the reload icon at the top right to have tainment system and make outgoing calls and re-
the vehicle rescan for devices. ceive incoming calls; the secondary mobile phone
can receive incoming calls.
6. When a device is found, the name of that device
will appear on the screen in addition to the mes- Switching Primary and Secondary
sage My Device Was Not Found. Select the de- Phones
vice name.
NOTE: When the secondary phone becomes
7. A pop-up will appear asking for verification of a
the primary phone, that phone’s contacts and
passkey on the phone. Verify the passkey. The
device is authorized and connected. call list are loaded into the system. The previous
primary phone, now the secondary phone, has
NOTE: The phone will automatically reconnect no data accessible on the system.
to the system when in range until deauthorized
1. Open the Phone menu.
either in the ICC5 infotainment system or on the
phone itself.

3.43
 Instruments

2. Select the icon showing two phones. The primary 2. Select Connect Device or, if this is not available,
and secondary phone are switched. select the Bluetooth icon. The Bluetooth Devices
menu opens.
Changing Phone Specific Settings
3. Find the phone under Authorized Devices and
NOTE: You can only change phone functions on select the phone name. The vehicle will connect
the primary mobile phone. with the phone.
1. Open the Phone menu. The primary active NOTE: if the connection fails, double check that
phone’s name should display in the upper left. Bluetooth is active on the phone and the phone
2.
is visible to Bluetooth.
Select the gear icon to access the setting for the
phone. The Options screen appears.
Replacing a Phone
3. Choose which of the following options to change:
Replacing a mobile phone is the same process as
• Synchronize Contacts Automatically connecting a phone.
• Synchronize contacts: this options is only To deauthorize the mobile phone being replaced, see
available if Synchronize Contacts Automati- Deauthorizing a Phone Through the Phone Menu
cally is turned off. in this chapter.
• Delete Contacts: deletes all contacts down-
Deauthorizing a Phone Through the
loaded from the active phone. Only avail-
able if Synchronize Contacts Automatically Phone Menu
is turned off. Deauthorizing a mobile phone, either the primary or
• Delete Call List: deletes the call list down- secondary phone, can be done in via the Phone
loaded from the active phone. menu or through system Settings.

• Name Format: names may be displayed as 1. Open the Phone menu.

Last, First; Last First; or First Last. 2. Select the Bluetooth icon at the bottom of the
• Bluetooth: Access Device Manager to con- screen. The Bluetooth Devices menu opens
nect a new phone, deauthorize a phone, showing a list of active and authorized phones.
and control a phone’s transmission and 3. If necessary, swipe down the screen to see a list
reception volume. of all authorized devices.
Disconnecting a Phone 4. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to
deauthorize. The list of options available for that
A phone may disconnect from the system for the fol- phone displays.
lowing reasons:
5. Select Deauthorize. The system asks for verifica-
• It moves out of range tion.
• It is shut off or otherwise loses power 6. Select Yes. The phone is deauthorized.
The phone should automatically reconnect when
Deauthorizing a Phone Through Settings
on and in range of an active system it is autho-
rized to connect to. To cancel this automatic Deauthorizing a mobile phone, either the primary or
pairing, the phone must be deauthorized either secondary phone, can be done in via the Phone
on the system or on the phone. menu or through Settings.
1. Open the Settings menu by selecting the short-
Reconnecting a Phone cut icon of a gear in the lower left corner. The
If a phone does not automatically reconnect to an system settings menu opens.
authorized vehicle, do the following: 2. Select Connectivity. The Wi-Fi & Bluetooth menu
1. Open the Phone menu. opens.

3.44
Instruments

3. Select Device Manager. The Bluetooth Devices Searching for a Contact and Making a
menu opens showing a list of active and autho- Call
rized phones.
NOTE: A phone must be active to access these
4. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to
settings.
deauthorize. The list of options available for that
phone opens. 1. Open the Phone menu.
5. Select Deauthorize. The system asks for verifica- 2. Select the magnifying glass icon for Search. A
tion. keyboard opens.
6. Select Yes. The phone is deauthorized. 3. Start entering the first or last name of a contact
or a partial or full phone number. As you type a
Using a Mobile Phone number will appear next to the icon for the re-
sults list showing how many phone contacts
General Phone Information have that series of characters.
Calls may disconnect in the following situations: 4. When the number is small enough, select the
• Insufficient network coverage results list icon to the right of the search box. A
results list appears.
• Lack of free voice channels when you travel
into a new transmitter/receiver area (cell) 5. Select the desired contact. The contact card ap-
pears.
• Phone SIM card is not compatible with the
available network 6. Select the desired contact phone number. A call
is placed.
• The second SIM card of a Twincard mobile
phone is already logged onto the network Starting Phone Voice Recognition
In addition, voice quality may fluctuate. The infotain- NOTE: When in two phone mode, the phone
ment system supports high quality calls in HD voice recognition is only available on the pri-
Voice®, but this depends on HD Voice® being sup-
mary phone.
ported by both the mobile phone in use and the net-
work. Press and hold the Voice button on the right-hand
OFN steering wheel pod for at least one second.
Setting Reception and Transmission Phone voice recognition is now available.
Volume
Ending Phone Voice Recognition
NOTE: A phone must be active to access these
settings. Press either the Mute Volume or End Call button on
the right-hand OFN steering wheel pod. Mobile
This setting helps ensure optimal speech reception phone voice recognition has ended.
and transmission quality.
1. Open the Phone menu. Making a Call
2. Select the Bluetooth icon. The Bluetooth Devices 1. Open the Phone menu. The primary phone menu
menu opens. appears.

3. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to 2. Select the number pad icon or select Contacts or
access that phone’s options. Call List menu.

4. Select Reception Volume and set the volume. 2.1 If using the number pad, enter a number.
Select the green phone receiver icon. The
5. Select the back arrow. call is made.
6. Select Transmission Volume and set the volume. 2.2 If using the Contact’s menu, select a con-
7. Return to the main phone screen by pressing the tact. The contacts information is shown.
back arrow or selecting the physical phone but- Select a phone number. The call is made.
ton at the bottom of the infotainment screen.

3.45
 Instruments

2.3 If using the Call List menu, select the Accepting a Waiting Call in Two Phone
phone number. The call is made. Mode
Accepting a Call If two phone mode is active and the second call is
incoming on the secondary phone, you may hear a
There are two ways to accept a call: signal in addition to getting a screen notification and
• Press the Accept Call button on the right-hand hearing a sound.
OFN steering wheel pod. NOTE: Accepting a incoming waiting call on the
• Select the accept call button on the infotain- secondary phone while in two phone mode with
ment screen. a call on hold on the primary phone, will end the
active call on the secondary phone.
Ending or Rejecting a Call
Tap on the Accept Call button on either the right-
There are two ways to end or reject a call: hand OFN steering wheel pod or the infotainment
• Press the End Call button on the right-hand screen. The waiting call is now active. The previous
OFN steering wheel pod. call has been on hold

• Press the end call button on the infotainment Switching Between Calls
screen.
If there is an active call and another call connection
Putting an Active Call on Hold and has been established, there are two ways to switch
back and forth between calls:
Taking if Off Hold
• Select the Switch Calls icon of two arrows
NOTE: The function and behavior of taking calls on
pointed in opposite directions on the infotain-
and off hold and accepting and rejecting waiting calls
ment screen.
can vary depending on the phone, phone plan, and
network provider. If functions and behavior vary from • Select the waiting call. The active call is put on
these directions, consult the manufacturer’s operating hold. The chosen call is active.
instructions and provider information.
NOTE: On some mobile phones, ending the ac-
A call on hold can be ended by selecting the tive call will automatically take the call waiting
End Call button on either the right-hand OFN off hold.
steering wheel pod or the infotainment screen.
Functions Available During a Call
1. Select the active call number. The call is put on
hold. The following functions are available during an active
call:
2. Select the active call number. The call is taken
off hold. • The microphone: selecting the microphone
turns it on or off.
Accepting a Waiting Call in Single Phone
• The number pad: can be used to send Dual
Mode Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF) tones.
If there is an incoming call while a call is being con- • The Transfer to Phone icon: transfers an active
ducted, a screen notification is shown. Depending on hands-free call over to the phone.
the mobile phone and network provider, you may
also hear a sound. Phone Contacts and Call List
Tap on the Accept Call button on either the right-
hand OFN steering wheel pod or the infotainment Importing Phone Contacts
screen. The waiting call is now active. The previous
Phone contacts of the primary phone are automati-
call has been put on hold.
cally imported when a phone is initially connected to
the system.
Deleting all contacts and turning off Synchronize
Contacts Automatically without deauthorizing the

3.46
Instruments

phone will cause the phone to reconnect to the connect and reconnect to the system without con-
system without re-importing the contacts list. tacts being reloaded.
1. Open the Phone menu.
Changing the Format of Contacts’ Names
2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the screen
This does not change the format of contacts’ for the connected phone. The Options menu
names on the phone. opens.
1. Open the Phone menu. 3. Turn off Synchronize Contacts Automatically.
2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the primary 4. Select Delete Contacts. A message asking for
phone’s screen. The Options menu opens. verification appears.
3. Select Name Format. Three name formats ap- 5. Select Yes. All contact data for the primary
pear: Last Name, First Name; Last Name First phone is deleted off the infotainment system ex-
Name; First Name Last Name. cept for contacts saved to Favorites.
4. Select the radio button for your choice of name
format. The format of the names in the phone Deleting a Phone’s Call List
contact list is changed. NOTE: A phone must be connected to the info-
tainment system to access these settings.
Turning Off Synchronizing Phone
Contacts Deleting the call list from the infotainment system
does not delete the call list off the phone.
Default system behavior is to have contacts on the
primary phone automatically synchronize. If a phone disconnects and then reconnects to the
infotainment system, the phone call list will be re-
1. Open the Phone menu. loaded.
2. If in two phone mode, make sure the phone you 1. Open the Phone menu.
want to synchronize is the primary phone.
2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the screen
3. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the phone for the connected phone. The Options menu
screen. The Options menu opens. opens.
4. Move the radio button to turn off Synchronize 3. Select Delete Call List. A message asking for
Contacts Automatically. Contacts will no longer verification appears.
be synchronized for this phone.
4. Select Yes. The call list for the primary phone is
Deleting All Contacts for the Primary deleted.
Phone
Saving a Contact as a Favorite
NOTE: A phone must be connected to the info-
NOTE: A phone must be connected to the info-
tainment system to access these settings.
tainment system to access these settings.
Deleting all contacts for the primary phone does not
1. Open the Phone menu. The screen for the pri-
delete the contacts off the phone nor does it delete
mary phone appears.
any of the contacts saved to Favorites. The contacts
saved to Favorites can still be accessed and used 2. Open the Contacts. The phone’s list of contacts
from the Favorites menu as long as the phone is appears.
connected to the infotainment system.
3. Select the contact you want to add to the Favor-
Deauthorizing the phone also does not delete any ites menu.
contacts saved to the Favorites menu. They do, how-
ever, become unavailable for use. 4. Press and hold on the phone number. The Op-
tions menu for the contact appears.
Synchronize Contacts Automatically must be turned
off to delete contacts. As long as Synchronize Con- 5. Select Create new favorite. A favorite is created.
tacts Automatically remains off, the phone can dis-

3.47
 Instruments

Saving a Call List Number as a Favorite Deleting All Phone Favorites

1. Open the Phone menu. The screen for the pri- If you delete the phone’s contact list, none of
mary phone appears. the contacts saved to the Favorites menu will be
2. Open the Call List. The phone’s call list appears. deleted. The only way to delete all phone con-
tacts saved to the Favorites menu is to delete
3. Press and hold the phone number you want to each phone contact favorite individually or reset
add to the Favorites menu. The Options menu the Favorites menu.
for the number appears.
4. Select Create new favorite. A favorite is created. Radio
Renaming a Phone Favorite Opening the Radio icon opens the radio home
screen with four options across the top: SiriusXM,
Favorites FM, AM, and WX.
1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
ites menu.
Searching for an AM/FM Radio Station
2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The Op- Searching for an AM/FM radio stations by name
tions menu for the favorite will open. is not currently available.
3. Select Rename. A keyboard will appear. 1. Select either FM or AM at the top of the Radio
menu.
4. Type in the new name for the favorite. Select
OK. The favorite has been renamed. 2. Select the magnifying glass icon. A keyboard
with a search bar opens.
Moving a Phone Favorite 3. Press the 123 to access the number pad. The
The order of the favorites menu can be changed to keyboard changes to numbers and symbols.
place frequently accessed favorites on the first 4. Enter the first two or three digits of the desired
screen. station frequency ID. The number of results
1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the Favor- shows next to the results list icon to the right.
ites menu. 5. Select the results list icon. A list of radio frequen-
2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The Op- cies displays, i.e. 89.0 MHz, 89.1 MHz, 89.2
tions menu for the favorite will open. MHz, etc.
3. Select Move. The favorites screen will change 6. Select the desired frequency. The radio is set to
appearance. A check mark will appear over the that frequency.
chosen favorite and arrows will appear on each NOTE: Selecting the arrows to the left of the
side of it. station icon identification or album artwork will
4. Press on the arrows to move the favorite to ei- page through the different stations available, in
ther the left or right until it’s in the chosen posi- any, at this frequency.
tion.
5. Select the check mark on top of the favorite. The
SiriusXM® Radio
favorite’s new position is saved. Search options include searching for a station by
name, category, or browsing the complete list of
Deleting a Phone Favorite available stations.
1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
ites menu.
Searching for a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio Stations by Name
2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The Op-
tions menu for the favorite will open. 1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu.
3. Select Delete. The favorite is deleted. 2. Select the magnifying glass icon. A keyboard
with a search bar appears.

3.48
Instruments

3. Start typing the name of a known station. The Setting a Radio Station Preset
number of stations with that word appears to the
right next the results list icon. The infotainment system can save up to 12 radio
presets.
4. Select the results list icon. The list of results ap-
pears. 1. Open the Radio icon.
5. Select a station. The station starts playing. 2. Navigate to the desired radio station.
3. Press and hold on the station icon or current
Searching for a SiriusXM® Satellite album artwork. The Options menu will open.
Radio Station by Category
4. Select Add to presets. The station is now a pre-
1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu. set.
2. Select the list icon at the bottom of the screen.
The SiriusXM menu opens.
Saving a Radio Station Preset as a
Favorite
3. Select Category. A list of station categories ap-
pears. A radio station can be saved as both a preset and a
favorite.
4. Select the desired category. The Category list of
stations in that category appears. 1. Open the Radio icon.
5. Select a station. The station starts playing. 2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen
to navigate to the desired preset.
Browsing SiriusXM® Satellite Radio 3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu
Stations opens.
1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu. 4. Select Save as Favorite. The preset is now also
2. saved under the Favorites menu.
Select with the list icon at the bottom of the
screen. The SiriusXM menu opens.
Moving a Radio Preset
3. Select SiriusXM. A current station/channel list
appears. Radio station presets can be reordered to move
those more frequently accessed to the first screen.
4. Select the desired station. The station starts
1. Open the Radio icon.
playing.
2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen
Adding a Radio Channel to Favorites to navigate to the desired preset.
Up to twenty different items can be saved to the Fa- 3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu
vorites menu. opens.
1. Open the Radio icon. 4. Select Move. A checkmark appears over the pre-
2. set with arrows to each side.
Navigate to the desired radio station.
5. Press the arrows to move the preset into the de-
3. Press and hold on the station icon or current
album artwork. The Options menu will open. sired order.
6. Select the checkmark over the preset. The pre-
4. Select Save as Favorite. The station is now a fa-
vorite. set is now saved in its new location.

Deleting a Radio Station Favorite Deleting a Radio Preset

1. Open the Radio icon.
While Global Favorites are created inside indi-
vidual applications, they are deleted, moved, or 2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen
renamed inside the Global Favorites menu. For to navigate to the desired preset.
directions, please see the Favorites section in 3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu
this chapter. opens.

3.49
 Instruments

4. Select Delete. The preset is now deleted. Muting and Unmuting Media Devices
Weather Radio (WX) To mute or unmute audio playback from media de-
vices you can increase or decrease the volume or
Weather Radio displays as WX in the top radio halt media playback.
menu.
Play of media devices can me halted via the Media
Weather radio channels WX1 through WX7, corre- menu by selecting the pause button. Restarting
sponding to frequencies 162.400 MHz though media playback may be done by selecting the play
162.550 MHz, are the standard weather radio chan- button the Media menu.
nels used by NOAA Weather Radio in the United
States, Weatheradio Canada/Radiométéo Canada in Bluetooth streaming may require restarting playback
Canada, and SARMEX in Mexico. Each system con- on the connected device.
sists of a nationwide network of radio stations broad-
casting official weather warnings, watches, adviso- Accessing Sound Settings
ries, forecasts and other non-weather related hazard Sound settings are global settings for all audio
information including news on natural disasters sources and provide access to the equalizer and bal-
(earthquakes, avalanches, floods), environmental ance controls as well as the on/off controls for auto-
hazards (oil spills, chemical releases), and public matic volume amplification.
safety messages (AMBER alerts, network outages).
All services operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. 1. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the screen
in an audio application. The Options menu for
The average range for reception from a transmitter is that application opens.
approximately 40 miles (60 km). The National
Weather Service operates more than 1000 transmit- 2. Select Sound. The Sound menu opens.
ters. 3. Select the sound setting to manipulate. The
Equalizer menu or Balance menu opens.
Displaying AM/FM/WX Emergency
Warnings 4. Select and move the control along the slider(s)
available. The sound settings have been
1. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the AM, changed.
FM, or WX radio screen. The Options menu for
that application opens. Favorites
2. Turn on or off Display Emergency Warnings. The Favorites menu offers quick access to frequently
used phone numbers and radio stations. It can be
Sound System Settings accessed by selecting the star shortcut icon at the
bottom right of the infotainment screen.
Adjusting the Volume
Favorites are created from inside different applica-
Volume can be increased or decreased by pressing tions. For directions on saving a phone contact to the
the —VOL or +VOL buttons below the infotainment Favorites menu, see Saving a Contact as a Favor-
screen or by using the VOL+ or VOL— buttons on ite in this chapter. For directions on saving a radio
the OFN steering wheel switch pod. station to the Favorites menu, see Adding a Radio
Channel to Favorites in this chapter.
Muting and Unmuting the Radio
It is possible to create up to twenty favorites.
The global Radio menu has an icon of a speaker
with a line through it. Press this icon to mute the Renaming Favorites
radio. The radio mutes. The icon image changes to a
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
speaker playing music.
ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
To unmute the radio select the icon of the speaker
2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The
playing music. The radio starts playing. The icon
Options menu appears.
image changes to a speaker with a line through it.
3. Select Rename. A keyboard appears.

3.50
Instruments

4. Enter the new name. Select OK. The favorite has Playing Audio Off a Phone or Other
been renamed. Device
Moving Favorites Selecting a different audio source than the one active
turns off the music. You may need to restart the
Favorites can be reordered to move the most popular music on the device when returning to the original
to the first screen of the Favorites menu. audio source to get the music to play.
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor- Bluetooth audio functions are not available if an
ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, or MirrorLink ses-
2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The sion is active.
Options menu appears.
1. Open the Media menu.
3. Select Move. The selected favorite now has a
checkmark over it and arrows at each side. 2. Select the audio source: Bluetooth, USB1, or
USB2.
4. Press on either the right or left arrow to move
the favorite into the desired position. 3. If necessary, select the music to play. Music
starts playing through the vehicle speakers.
5. Select the checkmark. The favorite has been
saved in its new position. Smartphone
Deleting Favorites NOTE: Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, and Mirror-
Link should be used for navigation for a truck or
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
bus as both lack the ability to take vehicle-
ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
based route restrictions into account.
2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The
Options menu appears. Apple CarPlay™
3. Select Delete. The favorite is now deleted. Apple CarPlay allows a driver to use an iPhone to
make calls, send and receive messages, listen to
Deleting All Favorites music, and get directions.
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor- Apple CarPlay can connect to the system via a
ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed. USB2 cable or Bluetooth.
2. Select the word Reset at the bottom of the Fa-
vorites screen. The Reset verification pop-up will
Android Auto™
appear. Android Auto allows the driver to use an Android
3. Select Yes. All favorites are deleted. phone to make calls, send and receive messages,
get information, listen to music, and get directions.
Media Android Auto requires that a smartphone be con-
nected to the system via a USB2 cable.
The vehicle infotainment system is capable of playing
music from a phone, USB drive, or other device. The MirrorLink®
vehicle has two USB2 ports to connect devices. De-
vices can also be connected to the system via Blu- MirrorLink allows a driver to use any MirrorLink en-
etooth. abled smart phone to get directions, listen to music,
and use smart phone applications.
If an authorized phone is connected to the system
via Bluetooth when the Media menu is opened, the MirrorLink uses huge icons that allow for the control
infotainment system should automatically start of smart phone features without getting distracted
streaming that music. from the task of driving.

3.51
 Instruments

Warnings, Indicators, and • Parking brake is set with the vehicle moving
faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Messages • System voltage falls below 11.9 volts.
Audible Alerts: ICUC • Door is unlatched and the vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
An audible alert sounds whenever one of the follow-
ing conditions exists: Optional audible alert sounds whenever one of the
following conditions exists:
• Engine oil pressure falls below the minimum
preset value. • Driver seat occupancy sensor reads someone
in the seat with the seat belt not fastened and
• Coolant temperature rises above the maximum the parking brake off.
preset value.
• Key is in the ignition and the door is unlatched.
• Air pressure falls below approximately 70 psi
(483 kPa). Warnings, Indicators, and Messages
• Parking brake is set with the vehicle moving Warning and indicator lights (telltales) with icon sym-
faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). bols are displayed on the physical dashboard and on
• System voltage falls below 11.9 volts. ICU screens. The positions of the telltales and warn-
ings vary, but most telltale symbols are standard.
• Door is unlatched with the parking brake off. See the below tables for a listing of different warn-
Optional audible alert sounds whenever one of the ings and telltales in addition to messages and popup
following conditions exists: screens.
• Driver seat occupancy sensor reads someone The colors of telltales and warnings indicate the haz-
in the seat with the seat belt not fastened and ard level: red (warning), amber (caution), green and
the parking brake off. blue (active status), grey (passive status), white (in-
formational). Blue is currently used to indicate an ac-
• Key is in the ignition and the door is unlatched. tive phone call, that a software download is available,
and that utility lamps and high beams are on.
Audible Alerts: ICC5
IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic-
An audible alert sounds whenever one of the follow- tional emissions guidelines, vehicles and/or en-
ing conditions exists: gines that are domiciled outside of the U.S. and
• Engine oil pressure falls below the minimum Canada may not be compliant with EPA10,
preset value. GHG14, or GHG17 regulations. Noncompliant
vehicles may not be equipped with all of the tell-
• Coolant temperature rises above the maximum
tales shown in the below tables.
preset value.
• Air pressure falls below approximately 70 psi
(483 kPa).

3.52
Instruments

Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Engine System
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Indicates a serious fault that requires engine
shutdown immediately. The engine protection
system will reduce the maximum engine torque
and speed, and, if the condition does not
improve, will shut down the engine within 30 to
60 seconds.
Red Stop Engine* Safely bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of Various
the road and shut down the engine as soon as
the red light is seen. If the engine shuts
down while the vehicle is in a hazardous
location, turn the key to the OFF position
for a few seconds, then restart the engine
and move the vehicle to a safer location.

Engine Oil Level

Red
Warning

Low Engine Oil Indicates the engine oil pressure is below the
Red
Pressure minimum allowable pressure.

04/22/2016 f611368
ICUC Warning
Engine Oil
Red Temperature
Warning

Red Low Coolant Level

High Coolant Indicates the coolant temperature is above the

Red
Temperature maximum allowable temperature.

04/22/2016 f611371
ICUC Warning

3.53
 Instruments

Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Engine System
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Indicates an engine condition (low oil pressure,
low coolant level, high coolant temperature,
high DPF soot level, uncontrolled DPF
regeneration, or battery voltage 11.9 volts or
Amber Check Engine* less) that requires correction. Various

Correct the condition as soon as possible.

If the condition worsens, the STOP engine
lamp will illuminate.
Engine Malfunction
A steadily illuminated amber MIL lamp
Amber Indicator Lamp
indicates an engine fault that effects emissions.
(MIL)*

Engine Malfunction Alternate Engine Malfunction Indicator lamp.

Amber Indicator Lamp A steadily illuminated amber MIL lamp
(MIL)* indicates an engine fault that effects emissions.

Engine Oil Level

Amber
Caution

Engine Oil
Amber
Pressure Caution

Low Coolant Level

Amber
Caution

High Coolant
Amber Temperature
Caution
Indicates that the system is preventing the
starter from cranking. This can occur when the
ignition switch is turned to START before the
gauge sweep has completed.
NOTE: Display of the Start Blocked screen
Amber Start Blocked does not indicate a problem with the starter.
Turn the ignition switch back to ON, wait for
the message to turn off, then turn the ignition
switch to START again. 04/22/2016 f611369
ICUC Notice

Amber Start Blocked Alternative Telltale for Start Blocked.

Green Start Engine

3.54
Instruments

Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Engine System
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Optimized Idle
Green Indicates optimized idle is active.
Active

Table 3.7, Engine Related Indicators

*See chapter 12 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for warning indicators, and actions required to avoid fur-
an explanation of the after treatment system (ATS) ther engine protection steps.

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Transmission
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Indicates low transmission fluid level.
Transmission Fluid
Red Safely bring the vehicle to a stop as
Level Warning
soon as possible.

Caution Check Indicates an undesirable transmission

Amber
Transmission condition.

Low Transmission
Amber Indicates low transmission fluid level.
Fluid Level Caution

High Transmission
Amber Indicates transmission is overheating.
Temperature

04/22/2016 f611377
ICUC Caution
Table 3.8, Transmission Related Indicators

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Brakes
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Low Brake Air Indicates air pressure in the primary or
Red Pressure (EPA10 secondary reservoir has dropped below
and Newer) approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).

3.55
 Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Brakes
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Alternate low brake air pressure telltale.

Low Brake Air
Indicates air pressure in the primary or
Red Pressure (EPA10
secondary reservoir has dropped below
and Newer)
approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).

06/30/2016 f611429

ICUC Warning
Parking Brake
Red Engaged Indicates the parking brake is engaged.
(EPA10 and Newer)
Parking Brake
Engaged Alternative icon indicating the parking brake
Red
is engaged.
(EPA10 and Newer)

Hill Holder Assist

Amber
Off

Hill Start Aid

Amber
Engaged

Winch Brake
Amber
Caution

Amber Work Brake Caution

Hill Descent Mode

Green
Engaged

Engine Brake
Green Indicates the engine brake is enabled.
Engaged

Table 3.9, Brake Related Indicators

3.56
Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Driving Safety
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Flashing indicates a stability event has been
detected, and the ESC system is active.
Electronic Stability
Amber Control (ESC) Solid illumination indicates a problem
Active with the stability system. Repair the ESC
system immediately to ensure full
stability capability.

Electronic Stability
Amber
Program Off

Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle

ABS is engaged.
Tractor Anti-Lock
Solid illumination indicates a problem with
Amber Braking System
the vehicle ABS.
(ABS)
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure
full braking capability.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer
ABS is engaged.
Trailer Anti-Lock
Solid illumination indicates a problem with
Amber Braking System
the trailer ABS.
(ABS)
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure
full braking capability.

Active Brake Assist

Amber Indicates Active Brake Assist is engaged.
Active

Active Brake Assist

Indicates the Active Brake Assist system is
Amber Unavailable
not available.
(GHG14 and newer)

04/22/2016 f611353
ICUC Caution
Indicates that lane departure warning is
disabled due to minimum speed, lack of
Lane Departure lane markings, or system not being
Amber available.
Unavailable
ICC5 NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with
Telltale Detroit Assurance radar.

3.57
 Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Driving Safety
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Indicates that lane departure warning is

disabled due to minimum speed, lack of
Lane Departure lane markings, or system not being
Amber available.
Unavailable
ICUC
NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with
Telltale
Detroit Assurance radar.
06/28/2016 f611372
ICUC Caution
Indicates that Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise is not available
Amber Control Not NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with a
Available radar-based collision warning and mitigation
ICC5
Telltale system (CWS/CMS).

Indicates that Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Adaptive Cruise is not available
Amber Control Not NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with a
ICUC Available radar-based collision warning and mitigation
Telltale system (CWS/CMS). 04/22/2016 f611354
ICUC Caution
If ACC is not available,
Active Lane Assist (ALA)
will not be available.

Amber IPPC Error

Adaptive Cruise
Green
Control Active

Adaptive Power An error with APS

Red Steering (APS) deactivates Active Lane
Error Assist (ALA).
LKA is a component of Active Lane Assist
(ALA) along with Lane Departure Protection
Lane Keep Assist (LDP). This is also the Switch
Blue
(LKA) Active icon
If Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not
available, ALA will not be available.

Lane Keep Assist When LKA is OFF there is

Grey
(LKA) on Standby no steering wheel icon

3.58
Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Driving Safety
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Gear Teach Mode in

Amber
Progress

Indicates that aerodynamic height control

Green AERO active
(AERO) is active.

Table 3.10, Driving Safety Related Icons

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Suspension
Telltale Color Description Related Message

Suspension Higher
Indicates the current rear suspension height
Amber than Normal Ride
is above the normal ride height.
Height / Axle Lifted

11/09/2016 f611471
ICUC Caution

Suspension Lower
Than Normal Ride Indicates the current rear suspension height
Amber
Height / Axle is below the normal ride height.
Dropped

06/29/2016 f611434

ICUC Caution

Amber Suspension Height

Electronically
Controlled Air Indicates Electronically Controlled Air
Amber
Suspension (ECAS) Suspension (ECAS) active fault.
Error

04/22/2016 f611367
ICUC Caution

3.59
 Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Suspension
Telltale Color Description Related Message

Indicates the ECAS system is applying the

maximum available vehicle load on the drive
Amber Load Transfer
axle up to the maximum gross axle weight
rating (GAWR).

11/09/2016 f611472
ICUC Caution

Amber 5th Wheel Adjust

Table 3.11, Suspension Related Indicators

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Battery
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Red Battery Critical

Red Battery Failure

Amber Battery Failure

Table 3.12, Battery Related Indicators

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Tire Related Indicators
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
If a tire monitoring system
Low Tire Pressure Indicates a notable loss of tire pressure in at is available, the tire(s)
Red
Warning least one tire. with low pressure will be
highlighted red.
If a tire monitoring system
Low Tire Pressure is available, the tire(s)
Amber Indicates low tire pressure in at least one tire.
Warning with low pressure will be
highlighted amber.
Automatic Traction
Flashing indicates a wheel spin event has
Amber Control (ATC)
been detected, and the ATC system is active.
Active

3.60
Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Tire Related Indicators
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Automatic Traction
Indicates the ATC SPIN button has been
Amber Control (ATC)
pressed to allow wheel slip.
Deactivated

ICUC Caution
Table 3.13, Tire Related Indicators

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Fuel
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Indicates low fuel level.

Amber Low Fuel
Refill the main fuel tank.

Indicates the fuel may contain water.

Water in Fuel
Amber Drain any water collected in the fuel/water
Warning
separators.
Table 3.14, Fuel Related Indicators

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Diesel Particulate Indicates a parked regen is required

Red
Filter Critical immediately.

06/10/2016 f611403

ICUC Warning

3.61
 Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Solid illumination indicates a regen is

required. Change to a more challenging duty
cycle (such as highway driving) to raise
Diesel Particulate exhaust temperatures for at least twenty
Amber minutes, or perform a parked regen.
Filter (DPF) Status
Blinking indicates that a parked regen is
required immediately. An engine derate and
shutdown will occur.
06/10/2016 f611401

ICUC Caution

Diesel Particulate
Amber
Filter Inhibited

Diesel Particulate
Green Filter Regeneration Indicates a regen is in progress.
in Progress
Slow (10-second) flashing indicates a
regeneration (regen) is in progress.
IMPORTANT: When the HEST lamp is
High Exhaust illuminated, do not park the vehicle near
System objects that can be harmed by high
Amber temperatures or flammable materials.
Temperature
(HEST)* Solid illumination indicates high exhaust
temperatures at the outlet of the tail pipe
when speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).

See chapter 12
Emissions and Fuel
Efficiency for an
Low Diesel Exhaust Indicates low diesel exhaust fluid. explanation of the after
Amber
Fluid Fill the DEF tank. treatment system (ATS)
warnings, and actions
required to avoid further
engine protection steps.
See chapter 12
Emissions and Fuel
Alternative icon to indicate Low Diesel Efficiency for an
Low Diesel Exhaust Exhaust Fluid. explanation of the after
Amber
Fluid treatment system (ATS)
Fill the DEF tank. warnings, and actions
required to avoid further
engine protection steps.
Table 3.15, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Related Icons

3.62
Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Lamps
Telltale Color Description Related Information

Right-Turn Flashing indicates the outside right-turn signal

Green
Indicator On lamps are activated.

Left-Turn Indicator Flashing indicates the outside left-turn signal

Green
On lamps are activated.

Blue High-Beams On Indicates the high-beam headlights are on.

Green Low-Beams On Indicates the low-beam headlights are on.

Automatic High- Indicates the high-beam headlights have been

Blue
Beams On set to automatic and are on.

Automatic High- Indicates the high-beam headlights have been

Grey
Beams Off set to automatic and are off.

Automatic Low- Indicates the low-beam headlights have been

Green
Beams On set to automatic and are on.

Automatic Low- Indicates the low-beam headlights have been

Grey
Beams Off set to automatic and are off.

Daytime Running
Green Indicates the daytime running lamps are on.
Lamps On

Auxiliary Drive
Blue Indicates the auxiliary drive lamps are on.
Lamps On

Blue Utility Lamps On Indicates the utility lamps are on.

Taillights / Marker Indicates the taillights, aka marker lamps, are

Green
Lamps On on.

Table 3.16, Lamp Indicators

3.63
 Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Passenger Safety
Telltale Color Description Related Message
On some vehicles, activates with an audible
alert when the system detects that the
parking brake is off and the driver seat belt
is not fastened.
On vehicles with a seat occupancy sensor,
Unfastened Seat
Red the seat being occupied, seat belt not
Belt
fastened, and parking brake off will cause
this warning to activate.
On other vehicles, this lamp illuminates for
15 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on.
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the
restraint system and restraint system
Supplemental components may be triggered
Amber Restraint System unintentionally or may not deploy as
(SRS) Error intended during an accident.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately.
Table 3.17, Passenger Safety Indicators

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Weather
Related Pop-Up
Telltale Color Description
Message

Indicates ambient air temperature has

dropped below 34°F (1°C).
White Snowflake
Pay attention to road conditions and watch
for ice.

05/29/2019 f611753a

ICUC Caution
Table 3.18, Weather Related Indicator

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

ICU Application Icons
Telltale Color Description Related Information
The phone screen in the
infotainment section of
Indicates a phone is connected to the ICU and the ICU will also show an
Blue Active Phone Call
a call is active. active call, including the
number being called and
call length.

3.64
Instruments

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

ICU Application Icons
Telltale Color Description Related Information
Indicates a software download is available.
Software Download For reasons of security and optimal vehicle A pop-up message will
Blue
Available functioning, software updates should be also appear.
quickly installed.
Table 3.19, ICU Application Icons

Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Air Gauge Indicators
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Primary Air
Red
Warning

Secondary Air
Red
Warning

Application Air
Red
Warning

Amber Primary Air Caution

Table 3.20, Air Gauge Indicators

Engine Protection System slower vehicle speed. Drive the vehicle to a safe lo-
cation or to a service facility.
WARNING IMPORTANT: Safely bring the vehicle to a stop
on the side of the road and shut down the en-
When the red STOP engine lamp illuminates, gine as soon as the red light is seen. If the en-
most engines are programmed to shut down au- gine shuts down while the vehicle is in a haz-
tomatically within 30 seconds. The driver must ardous location, turn the key to the OFF position
immediately move the vehicle to a safe location for a few seconds, then restart the engine and
at the side of the road to prevent causing a haz-
move the vehicle to a safer location.
ardous situation that could cause bodily injury,
property damage, or severe damage to the en- On other engines, the engine protection system will
gine. shut down the engine. It will first derate the engine,
then shut it down completely 30 to 60 seconds after
See chapter 12 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for
the indicator illuminates (depending on the critical
an explanation of the aftertreatment system (ATS)
fault type) if the condition does not improve. Bring
warning indicators, and actions required to avoid fur-
the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road before
ther engine protection steps.
the engine shuts down.
The STOP engine lamp illuminates when the engine
Some vehicles may have a shutdown-override
protection system is activated in one of two ways. On
switch, which may be used to momentarily override
some engines, the engine protection system will der-
the shutdown sequence. See chapter 10 Engine
ate the engine, allowing it to run at lower rpm and

3.65
 Instruments

Starting, Operation, and Shutdown for detailed in-

formation regarding the shutdown process.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to restart the en-
gine while the vehicle is moving. Bring the ve-
hicle to a safe stop, then restart the engine.
To restart the engine, turn the ignition to OFF, leave
it there a few seconds, then turn the ignition to
START. The engine will run for a short period and
shut down again if the condition does not improve.

3.66
 4
Driver Controls
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Windshield Wiper and Washer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Fifth Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Adjustable Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Driver Controls

Ignition Switch • power receptacle

• fuel heater
The ignition switch is located on the left-hand dash,
below the headlight switch. • electric oil pan heater
The ignition switch has four positions: OFF, ACC (ac- • electric or diesel-fired engine coolant pre-
cessory), ON, and START. See Fig. 4.1. heater
Turn the key counterclockwise to reach the ACC po-
sition. In addition to all the functions that are oper-
able in the OFF position, the following functions are
operable when the switch is in the ACC position:
• radio/stereo system
• heater and A/C fan
• mirror defog
• windshield fan
• ether start system
• air dryer
02/03/2017 f610805
• backup lights
Fig. 4.1, Ignition Switch
Turn the key clockwise past the OFF position to
In the OFF position, the ignition switch is vertical. reach the ON position. With the switch in the ON po-
The key can be inserted and removed only in the sition, all electrical systems become operable and
OFF position. the warning and indicator lamps illuminate. Wait for
three seconds before starting the engine.
The following functions are operable when the igni-
tion switch is in the OFF position (regardless of IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
whether the key is inserted): ICU self-check is complete.
• low-beam headlights Turn the key clockwise past the ON position to reach
the START position to start the engine. Release the
• taillights key the moment the engine starts. Do not operate
• brake lights the starter longer than thirty seconds, then allow the
starter to cool between attempts. If the starter over-
• road lights heats, the starter protection system will prevent op-
• dome lights eration of the starter until it has cooled.

• clearance lights The ignition key also locks and unlocks the cab
doors.
• hazard warning lights
• utility lights Lighting Controls
• baggage compartment lights Unless otherwise noted below, press the upper half
• spotlights of the switch to turn the desired light(s) on or off.

• electric horn Exterior Lighting Controls

• clock Exterior light controls are listed here in alphabetical
• refrigerator order. The ICC5 also provides some exterior light
controls.
• CB radio
• power mirrors

4.1
 Driver Controls

Automatic Headlights nition is switched on and the parking brake is re-

leased. The DRL turn off when the engine falls below
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain-light sensor and 400 rpm, the parking brake is applied, or the head-
the headlight switch is in the ’A’ position, the low lights are turned on.
beam headlights and all exterior lights activate when
the outside light decreases to a pre-set level. See Daytime running lights are mandatory for vehicles
Fig. 4.2. domiciled in Canada. Vehicles domiciled in any other
location may have an optional override switch
3 (Fig. 4.3, ref. 3). This is a momentary switch that en-
2 4 ables the driver to deactivate the DRL.

5
Fog Lights
Fog lights are designed to reduce glare in foggy con-
ditions. The marker lights or headlights must be on in
order to turn the fog lights on. Pull the headlight
switch outward to activate the fog lights.

Hazard Warning Lights

The hazard warning light switch is located on the
dash switch panel. See Fig. 4.4. The hazard lights
1 can be activated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
To activate the hazard lights, press the center of the
08/28/2018 f611525
switch once. The switch will blink at the same rate
that the hazard lights flash. Press the switch again to
1. Fog Lights (optional)—Activate by pulling the switch turn them off. All the turn signals on the vehicle and
out when the marker lights or headlights are on.
2. Automatic Headlights
trailer, as well as the turn signal indicators in the
3. Off ICU, flash simultaneously when the hazard lights are
4. Marker Lights activated.
5. Headlights
Headlights & Follow Me Home Feature
Fig. 4.2, Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is a rotary switch located to the
Auxiliary High Beam Lights left of the steering column, above the ignition switch.
See Fig. 4.2.
If present, auxiliary high-beam lights are located in
the front bumper. To activate the auxiliary high beam If the Follow Me Home feature is activated, the low-
lights, press the upper part of the dash switch. The beam headlights will remain on for nine seconds
auxiliary high beam lights will illuminate only when after the vehicle is parked, if the headlights were on
the high-beam headlights are on. They will switch off prior to engine shutdown. This feature provides tem-
temporarily when the low-beam headlights are on, porary lighting in the path of the headlights while
until the high beams are on again. Press the upper walking to a building or other destination. If a vehicle
half of the switch to deactivate the auxiliary high door is opened or closed while this feature is active,
beam lights. See Fig. 4.3. the timer will add an additional 10 seconds of light-
ing. This feature can be temporarily disabled by turn-
Backup Lights ing the ignition switch on, or by cycling the headlight
switch from the off position to one of the other two
Backup lights activate only when the vehicle is in re- positions.
verse, and are designed to be used while backing up
at night. Some vehicles may have a feature that automatically
turns on the headlights if the windshield wipers are
Daytime Running Lights on and the vehicle is moving faster than 10 mph (16
km/h). At speeds between 10 and 40 mph (16 to 64
If the vehicle is equipped with daytime running lights km/h), cycling the headlight switch will turn the head-
(DRL), they are automatically activated when the ig- lights off.

4.2
Driver Controls

1 2 3 4 5 6

UTLY DASH DRL SLPR AUX DOME

LIGHT LIGHT OFF DOME HIGH LIGHT

AMBT ALL TRLR WORK FOOT

LIGHT DOME LIGHT LIGHT WELL

04/18/2016 7 8 9 10 11 f611404
1. Utility Light Switch 5. Auxiliary High Beam Light Switch 9. Trailer Utility Light Switch
2. Dash Light Switch (optional) 6. Cab Dome Light Switch 10. Utility Light Switch
3. DRL Override Switch 7. Sleeper Ambient Light Switch 11. Foot Well Light Switch
4. Sleeper Dome Light Switch 8. All Dome Lights Switch

Fig. 4.3, Dash-Mounted and Sleeper-Control Light Switches

With the low-beam headlights on, pull the lever to-

wards you to flash the high-beam headlights momen-
tarily.
When the high-beam headlights are on, a blue tell-
tale illuminates on the instrument cluster.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be on for the
high beams to work.
Intelligent High-Beam Headlights
The intelligent high-beam headlight feature activates
when the headlight switch is in the ’A’ position and
the turn signal lever is pushed away from the driver
in the high-beam position. See Fig. 4.2 and Fig. 4.5.
03/09/2016 f611340
When a vehicle approaches from the opposite direc-
Fig. 4.4, Hazard Warning Switch tion, the high-beam headlights deactivate and the
low-beam headlights activate. The high-beam head-
High-Beam Headlights lights activate again when there are no vehicles ap-
proaching from the opposite direction.
With the low-beam headlights on, push the turn-
signal lever away from you to turn on the high-beam Marker Lights
headlights. See Fig. 4.5. To turn off the high-beam
headlights, pull the lever to the middle position. To turn the marker lights on, turn the headlight switch
clockwise past the off position. See Fig. 4.2.

4.3
 Driver Controls

8
4 7
1 6
1
5

4
2
3

08/14/2019 f611352e
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
3 2. Quick Access System Settings
2 3. Cruise Decelerate/Set
4. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
5. Marker Interrupt**
02/17/2017 f611264 6. Phone Pick-Up
7. Headlamp Interrupt**
1. Headlight Control 3. Windshield Washer
8. Cancel Cruise Control
Symbols Switch ** Not available in all markets
2. Windshield Wiper 4. Turn Signal Symbol
Switch Fig. 4.6, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Switch
Pod - ICUC
Fig. 4.5, Steering Column-Mounted Turn Signal Lever

Marker Interrupt 3
2
NOTE: This switch may not be available in all
export markets. 1
The marker interrupt switch is located in the right-
hand switch pod of the steering wheel for the ICUC
system (see Fig. 4.6), and the left-hand button pod
of the steering wheel for the ICC5 button (see
Fig. 4.7). Pressing it temporarily flashes the marker
lights.

Pretrip Light Test Switch

When the driver presses the pretrip light test switch,
shown in Fig. 4.8, all exterior lights are activated so
the driver can exit the vehicle and verify they are 6 5 A 4
working properly. For additional information see
chapter 23 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and 10/25/2018 f611531a
Maintenance. A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument panel menus. When the button is
Spotlight pressed, information appears on the driver display
screen.
The spotlight switch is located on the pivoting handle 1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
of the spotlight. There may be a single spotlight as- 2. Back Button
sembly mounted above the driver’s door, or one 3. Quick Access System Settings
above each door. 4. Marker Interrupt
5. Cancel Cruise Control
Turn Signals 6. Cruise Decelerate/Set
The turn-signal lever is mounted on the left-hand Fig. 4.7, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Left-Hand Pod - ICC5
side of the steering column. Pulling the turn-signal

4.4
Driver Controls

The ICC5 provides some digital interior light controls.

See chapter 3 Instruments for more information.

Baggage Compartment Lights

Baggage compartment lights are located on the un-
derside of the lower bunk, on both sides. Both lights
LIGHT turn on when either baggage compartment door is
TEST opened to illuminate the baggage compartment. The
lights also come on when the lower bunk is raised.
08/04/2016 f611436
Foot Well Lights
Fig. 4.8, Pretrip Light Test Switch
When the driver or passenger doors are opened,
lever up activates the right-turn signal; pushing it amber lights illuminate both foot wells. These lights
down activates the left-turn signal. The lever is typi- can also be activated with the foot well light switch.
cally a non-canceling combination turn-signal, wind- See Fig. 4.3. Press the upper half of the switch to
shield wiper/washer switch, and high beam headlight turn the foot well lights on or off.
control unit. See Fig. 4.5.
Overhead Console Lights
When a turn signal is activated, a green telltale light
flashes on the instrument panel. The overhead console lights consist of two dome
lights, two reading lights, and an amber lamp that
On a self-canceling turn signal lever, the lever auto- provides ambient light for the center dash panel and
matically returns to the neutral position when the the cup holders. The dome lights illuminate when a
steering wheel returns to the straight-ahead position door opens, then stay on for a short time after both
after a turn. doors are closed. Press the lens of the reading light
or dome light to activate each one independently of
Utility Lights the others.
Utility lights can be swivel-mounted on upper half of
the cab, mounted on the exhaust support, or flush- Dash Lights
mounted on the back of the cab or sleeper. Press the The dash lighting illuminates independently of the
upper half of the switch to turn the utility lights on or headlights. The brightness can be set to adjust auto-
off. matically based on ambient lighting.
When activated, a red indicator light in the switch is The brightness can also be adjusted in either the
illuminated. ICUC or ICC5 under the Settings menu or through
the use of an optional dash switch.
Interior Lighting Controls
When using the dash switch, the panel lights
Interior light controls are listed here in alphabetical brighten and dim in 10% increments, depending on
order. whether the upper half or the lower half of the switch
The interior lights include panel lights, dome lights, is pressed. When the panel lights are turned on with
reading lights, and courtesy lights. the switch, they will default to the intensity that was
last set.
Vehicles come pre-set from the factory with theater
lighting, which ramps up lights from low power to full Cab Dome Light
power when activated. See Fig. 4.9.
A rear cab dome light is located on the headliner,
Sleepers have rear dome lights, ambient lights, read- between the bunk and the cab on sleeper vehicles.
ing lights, task lights, foot well lights, and baggage The rear cab dome light will activate with the dome
compartment lights. lights when a door is opened, then stay on for a
Many interior lights have a dimming function. By short time after both doors are closed. The length of
holding down the switch, the lights can be cycled be- time this courtesy lighting stays on can be controlled
tween bright and dim. via the settings menu in any ICU system as can the
time the entrance light stays on.

4.5
 Driver Controls

9
7

10
5

1
3
04/18/2016 f602577

1. Foot Well Lights 6. Sleeper Reading Lamp (lower 8. Sleeper Dome Light
2. Door Entry Courtesy Lights bunk) 9. Cab Dome Light
3. Sleeper Floor Lights 7. Sleeper Reading Lamp (upper 10. Overhead Console Lights
4. Baggage Compartment Lights bunk)
5. Sleeper Work Light
Fig. 4.9, Cab and Sleeper Interior Lighting

Use the dash-mounted switch or the switch in the Sleeper Foot Well Lights
sleeper panel to activate the rear cab dome light.
See Fig. 4.3. The sleeper foot well switch activates two lights that
illuminate the sleeper floor.
Sleeper Dome Light
Sleeper Reading Lights
The sleeper dome light has both direct and ambient
lights, controlled by separate switches. Reading lights are mounted above bunks in the
sleeper. To turn a reading light on or off, press the
switch on the lamp.

4.6
Driver Controls

Horn Controls IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic-

tional emissions guidelines, vehicles that are
Air Horn domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may
Air horn(s) may be mounted on the roof of day cabs,
not have engines and/or emissions aftertreat-
or under the driver-side floor for sleeper cabs. The ment systems that are compliant with EPA07,
air horn is controlled by a wire lanyard that hangs EPA10, GHG14, or GHG17 regulations.
down inboard by the driver’s door. See Fig. 4.10. Regen may be started manually with the optional
Pull downward on the lanyard to sound the air horn. digital switch in the ICU. See Fig. 4.11.

10/28/2016 f611467

06/13/2007 f602322 Fig. 4.11, Regen Start Digital Switch - ICUC

1. Lanyard Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen inhibit
Fig. 4.10, Air Horn Control switch. See Fig. 4.12. To stop a regen in progress or
prevent the start of a regen, press the upper half of
Electric Horn the switch. Regen will be delayed until the switch is
no longer active.
The electric horn is activated by pressing down on
the top of the steering wheel center pad.
The horn will sound for the duration that the button is
pressed, up to 60 seconds. The electric horn will op-
erate regardless of the position of the ignition key.

Powertrain Controls REGEN

OFF
Aftertreatment System Regen
Switches
04/18/2016 f611395
NOTE: See chapter 12 Emissions and Fuel
Efficiency for detailed information about the Fig. 4.12, Regen Inhibit Switch
operation of the regeneration (regen) switches
and the aftertreatment system (ATS).

4.7
 Driver Controls

Axle Switches tions, the brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
high) increases with each step down. See Fig. 4.14
Some vehicles are equipped with an interaxle differ-
ential lock switch and/or a switch for each driver- NOTE: Cruise control and safety systems may
controlled differential lock (DCDL). See Fig. 4.13. activate the engine brake regardless of the lever
position.
For more information about differential locks and
using them for traction control, see chapter 17 Drive
Axles.
0
1 2 3
LOCK LOCK LOCK

2
INTR FWD REAR
AXLE DIFF DIFF

UNLOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK 3

LOCK LOCK LOWER
02/17/2017 f270164a
0. Off 2. Medium
1. Low 3. High
Fig. 4.14, Engine Brake Positions
DIFF DIFF LIFT
LOCK LOCK AXLE Engine Fan Switch
UNLOCK UNLOCK RAISE
The engine cooling fan can be turned on by the en-
gine fan switch.
4 5 6
09/15/2016 f611344 To turn the engine fan on, press the upper half of the
1. Interaxle Lock Switch switch. The fan will continue to operate for a set
2. Forward Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch amount of time and then turn off unless the coolant
3. Rear Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch temperature is high enough to continue fan opera-
4. Differential Lock Switch, 6X4 tion. To turn the fan off before the set time period
5. Differential Lock Switch, 4X2 ends, press the lower half of the switch. See
6. Lift Axle Switch Fig. 4.15.
Fig. 4.13, Axle Switches

Engine Brake Switches

NOTE: See chapter 13 Brake Systems for de-
tailed information about engine brake operation.
Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road
conditions, the engine brake may be used in con- ENG
FAN
junction with the service brakes. There is no time
limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an
engine brake does not provide the precise control of, 04/18/2016 f611405
and is not a substitute for, service brakes.
Fig. 4.15, Engine Fan Switch
The engine brake control is located on the right-hand
steering-column-mounted lever. At the top position,
the engine brake is off, and at the three lower posi-

4.8
Driver Controls

Hill Start Aid Override Switch

Some vehicles are equipped with a Hill Start Aid
(HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle from rolling
while on steep grades and to allow for a controlled
launch. HSA delays the release of the service brakes
until enough torque is available to begin moving the
vehicle forward, for a maximum of 3 seconds. HSA is PTO
"on" by default. It can be turned off by pressing and
releasing the HSA override switch on the dash (see
Fig. 4.16). 04/18/2016 f611407

Fig. 4.17, PTO Switch

shift mode, set engine brake levels, and control spe-

cialty engine brake functions.

Manual Transmissions
HSA NOTE: See chapter 16 Manual Transmissions
OFF and Clutch for manual transmission operating
instructions.
04/18/2016 f611406
If so equipped, the transmission range control and
Fig. 4.16, Hill Start Aid Override Switch
splitter valves are attached to the gear shift knob.
The range-preselection lever allows the selection of
Power Take-Off (PTO) Switch the low or high range for each transmission ratio. It is
used once during an upshift sequence and once dur-
To activate the PTO function, press the upper half of ing a downshift sequence.
the switch. Press the lower half of the switch to de-
activate the PTO function. See Fig. 4.17. Dependent on the transmission model, some ratios
can be split using the splitter-control button.
Power Take-Off may also be activated using the digi-
tal switch in the ICU.
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls
WARNING NOTE: See chapter 13 Brake Systems for de-
tailed information about brake systems.
To avoid injury, do not install a PTO that is not
Detroit Diesel approved onto a Detroit™ Trans- Parking Brake Control Valve
mission. Use of a non-Detroit Diesel approved
PTO with a Detroit Transmission could result in The yellow diamond-shaped knob operates the park-
unintended operation which could lead to severe ing brake valve. See Fig. 4.19. Pull the knob out to
personal injury. apply both the tractor and the trailer spring parking
brakes. Push both the parking brake and the trailer
Transmission Controls air supply knobs in to release the tractor and trailer
spring parking brakes. Before the spring parking
Detroit™ Automated Transmissions brakes can be released, the air pressure in either air
NOTE: See chapter 15 Automated and Auto- brake system must be at least 65 psi (447 kPa).
matic Transmissions for automated transmis- If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
sion operating instructions. brakes, pull the parking brake valve out to apply the
tractor parking brakes and the trailer service brakes.
Vehicles with automated and automatic transmissions
use the multifunction control shown in Fig. 4.18. This
control moves in two directions and has two
switches. It is used to request manual shifts, change

4.9
 Driver Controls

4 1
2

02/02/2017 f610291

A 1 2 1. Trailer Air Supply Valve (red knob)

2. Parking Brake Control Valve (yellow knob)
Fig. 4.19, Brake Valve Control Knobs

Trailer Air Supply Valve

The red octagonal-shaped knob operates the trailer
air supply valve, which charges the trailer air supply
system and releases the trailer spring parking
(−) brakes. See Fig. 4.19.
After the vehicle and its air hoses are connected to a
(+) trailer and the pressure in the air system is at least
B
65 psi (447 kPa), push the trailer air supply valve
knob in (and leave it in) to charge the trailer air sup-
ply system and release the trailer spring parking
brakes. Pull the trailer air supply valve out before
disconnecting a trailer or when operating a vehicle
without a trailer.

Trailer Brake Lever

The trailer brake lever is used to apply the trailer ser-
vice brakes without applying the truck or tractor ser-
vice brakes. It is usually mounted on the right-hand
control panel. Move the lever down to apply the
trailer brakes; move the lever up to release the trailer
brakes. The lever will automatically return to the up
position when it is released. See Fig. 4.20. The lever
can be partially or fully applied, but in any partially on
C position it will be overridden by a full application of
05/30/2012 f270163a the service brake pedal.
A. Front View
B. Shift Up/Down Requests Antilock Braking System
C. Four positions for engine brake settings
The Meritor™ WABCO® Antilock Braking System
1. Engine Brake Symbol
2. Drive/Neutral/Reverse Switch (ABS) passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at all
3. Shift Mode Switch (Economy/Performance/Manual) times, and controls wheel speed during emergency
4. Gear Shift Symbol stops or wheel lock situations.

Fig. 4.18, Automated/Automatic Transmission During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully

Multifunction Control depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance.

4.10
Driver Controls

Windshield Wiper and Washer

Controls
NOTICE
Do not attempt to manually move the windshield
wiper arms. Wiper motor damage will occur if the
arms are forcibly moved.
The windshield wipers and washer controls are on
the multi-function turn signal lever on the left-hand
side of the steering column. See Fig. 4.22.
02/03/2017 f610591

Fig. 4.20, Trailer Brake Lever

4
The ABS is designed to communicate with a trailer
ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility will result 1
in the illumination of the trailer ABS lamp during ve-
hicle start-up and fault detection. The trailer ABS
lamp will not illuminate unless a compatible trailer is
connected to the tractor.
Vehicles with ABS may have Automatic Traction Con-
trol (ATC). On these vehicles, the ATC system auto-
matically limits wheel spin during reduced-traction
situations. In normal braking applications, the stan-
dard air brake system is in effect.
3 2
Pressing the ATC SPIN switch (Fig. 4.21) shuts ATC
off and allows drive wheel spin. Pressing the switch
again, or cycling the ignition key, will cycle the sys-
02/17/2017 f611264
tem back to normal operation.
1. Headlight Control 3. Windshield Washer
Symbols Switch
NOTICE 2. Windshield Wiper 4. Turn Signal Symbol
Switch
The ATC spin feature is intended to be used
under specific slippery conditions that require Fig. 4.22, Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
momentary increased wheel spin. Using this op-
tion for an extended period of time may damage The wipers are operated by a rotary switch on the
the vehicle brake system. turn signal lever. There are five settings, marked on
the dial by symbols for off, two intermittent settings,
and two continuous speeds.
Turn the wipers on by rotating the rotary switch up.
Rotate the switch further to increase the speed of the
wipers through the two intermittent settings, then to
low and high speeds. Rotate the switch down to slow
the wipers down. Rotate the switch as far down as it
ATC will go to turn the wipers off.
SPIN
For wiper intermittent operation, there are two set-
tings. The first intermittent setting has a default inter-
03/02/2016 f611333 val of 6 seconds, but the interval is programmable
from 1 to 25 seconds. To program the interval, rotate
Fig. 4.21, ATC SPIN Switch the switch from the first intermittent position to the

4.11
 Driver Controls

OFF position, wait for the desired interval between of the vehicle. In the NORMAL position, the air
wipes to lapse (between 1 and 25 seconds), and springs inflate to raise the rear of the vehicle to nor-
then move the switch back to the first intermittent mal ride height.
position. If the switch is kept in the OFF position for
more than 50 seconds, the interval changes back to LOWER
the default of 6 seconds.
The second intermittent setting has an interval of 1
second, and is not programmable.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain-light sensor and
SUSP
the wiper switch is in either of the intermittent set- HGT
tings, the wipers automatically come on when it
rains. If the vehicle is moving faster than 40 mph (64 NORMAL
km/h) the wiper speed automatically increases or de- 09/15/2016 f611342
creases as needed depending on weather conditions.
Fig. 4.23, Air Suspension Height Control Switch
NOTE: Some vehicles may have a feature that
automatically turns on the headlights if the wind-
shield wipers are on and the vehicle is moving NOTICE
faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). At speeds be-
tween 10 and 40 mph (16 to 64 km/h), cycling Never exhaust air from the suspension while
driving. When the air is exhausted, the suspen-
the headlight switch will turn the headlights off.
sion will not absorb road shocks, and compo-
The windshield washer button is located at the end nents may be damaged.
of the turn signal lever. Momentarily press the wind- A red LED in the switch is illuminated when the sus-
shield washer button to initiate a single wipe without pension is deflated.
activating the washer pump. The wipers will swipe
one full cycle and return to the inactive position. Aerodynamic Height Control
To operate the windshield washers, press and hold
the button in. After a short delay, the washer will NOTICE
pump windshield washer fluid onto the windshield for
as long as the washer button is pressed. The wind- The aerodynamic height control (AHC) switch
shield wipers will turn on at low speed while the should not be used to raise the vehicle in an at-
washer button is pressed. After the button is re- tempt to drive over objects in the road, as doing
leased, the wipers will continue to operate for one to so will result in vehicle damage.
several wipe cycles, depending on how long the
wash button was pressed initially. AHC reduces ground clearance by approximately 1
inch (2.5 cm) at highway speed. If this reduction of
ground clearance is determined to be problematic,
Suspension Controls such as a construction zone or poor road conditions,
Air Suspension Height Control Switch AHC may be disabled. Pressing the AHC switch,
shown in Fig. 4.24, disables aerodynamic lowering of
the vehicle. The switch should be activated well in
NOTICE advance in order to avoid potential vehicle damage
in these types of road conditions.
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with ECAS Dash Switches
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the Vehicles with Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
suspension air springs from re-inflating. (ECAS) may be equipped with either dash switches
or a remote control unit, not both. See Figure 4.25
The air suspension height control switch is used to and Table 4.1.
adjust the vehicle height to aid in coupling or uncou-
pling from a trailer. See Fig. 4.23. Setting the switch
to LOWER deflates the air springs to lower the rear

4.12
Driver Controls

11/09/2016 f611472
AERO
Fig. 4.26, Load Transfer Notification - ICUC
OFF
09/11/2018 f611527
Suspension Height
If the suspension is at normal height:
Fig. 4.24, Aerodynamic Height Control Switch
• each up press increases the suspension height
an increment, unless the suspension is at
maximum height
• a down press lowers the suspension to its low-
est set-point (usually axle stops)
2 If the suspension is below normal height:
1
• an up press increases the suspension height to
normal ride height
LOAD
• a down press does nothing; the suspension is
XFER
already at its lowest point
11/16/2016 f611473 If the suspension is above normal height:
1. Load Transfer 2. Suspension Height
• each up press increases the suspension height
Fig. 4.25, ECAS Dash Switches an increment, unless the suspension is at
maximum height
LOAD XFER (Load Transfer)
• a down press lowers the suspension to normal
This switch controls the ECAS manual load transfer ride height
function by adjusting suspension air pressure. Use
On vehicles equipped with the ICU, messages about
this function to minimize wheel slippage in road con-
the ride height status will display in the driver display.
ditions where traction may be a concern.
See Figure 4.27.
The ECAS load transfer feature applies the maxi-
If the suspension is outside normal ride height
mum available vehicle load on the drive axle, up to
(amber lamp on), the ECAS system will automatically
the maximum allowable limit, determined by the
return the suspension to normal ride height when
gross axle weight rating (GAWR). In bobtail or with a
vehicle speed reaches or exceeds a set speed (usu-
loaded trailer less than the GAWR, the tag axle sup-
ally set to 5 mph).
ports a negligible load while the drive axle supports
nearly the full weight. Above the GAWR, the drive ECAS Standby Mode, Dash Switch
axle is loaded with approximately the maximum al-
lowable load and the tag supports the remainder. Once the key is turned off, the ECAS will enter
standby mode, remaining powered and adjusting to
Load transfer mode can be deactivated by holding up
level and load changes for 1 hour. To cancel standby
on the dash switch for 4 seconds. Load transfer
mode on vehicles with ECAS dash switches, turn the
mode will automatically deactivate when the vehicle
key from OFF to ON to OFF in less than 1.5 sec-
reaches 45 mph (72 km/h).
onds. Confirm the deactivation of standby mode by
For vehicles equipped with the ICU, when load trans- pressing the suspension height switch, which should
fer mode is active, "Load Transfer" will display in the not adjust the suspension.
message field of the driver display. See Figure 4.26.

4.13
 Driver Controls

ECAS Remote Control Keys and Functions

06/29/2016 f611434

Fig. 4.27, Example of Ride Height Message - ICUC

ECAS Remote Control Unit

Some vehicles equipped with Electronically Con-
trolled Air Suspension (ECAS) have a remote control
unit to lower and raise the rear suspension. See
Table 4.1 for keys and functions.
02/03/2017 f611211
If the suspension is outside normal ride height
(amber lamp on), the ECAS system will automatically
return the suspension to normal ride height when Key Function
vehicle speed reaches or exceeds a set speed (usu- Remote Control On/Off. The middle
ally set to 5 mph). light will remain lit while the remote is
active.
Messages about the ride height status will display in
the ICU driver display. Memory keys. Pressing the STOP
key and a memory key
ECAS Standby Mode, Remote Control simultaneously will store the current
height. Once stored, pressing the key
Once the key is turned off, the ECAS will enter will adjust the vehicle to the stored
standby mode, remaining powered and adjusting to height.
level and load changes for 1 hour. To cancel standby Normal height key. This key will
mode on vehicles with a remote control, turn on the return the vehicle to normal ride
remote control then hold the STOP key on the re- height.
mote for 2 seconds. Confirm the deactivation of
Lift and lower keys. These keys will
standby mode by attempting to turn the remote on raise or lower the rear suspension
and adjust the suspension, which should not be pos- height.
sible.
The STOP key. Pressing the STOP
key will interrupt and stop all
adjustments being made by the
remote control. When the key is off,
holding the Stop key for 2 seconds
will cancel the 1 hour Standby mode.
Table 4.1, ECAS Remote Control Keys and Functions

Fifth Wheel Controls

Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch
NOTICE
Do not activate the fifth wheel slide control valve
while the vehicle is in motion. To do so could

4.14
Driver Controls

cause damage to the fifth wheel member, the

kingpin, the cab or trailer, and ultimately to the
Adjustable Steering Column
drivetrain. Controls
The fifth wheel air slide switch permits repositioning To unlock the steering column to adjust it, pull the
of the sliding fifth wheel from inside the cab. See steering column locking lever out and away from the
Fig. 4.28. Moving the air slide control valve switch to column. See Fig. 4.30. With the column unlocked,
the lock position deactivates the control valve and the steering wheel can be adjusted up-and-down and
locks the fifth wheel to the baseplate. Moving the tilted fore-and-aft. Once the wheel is in the desired
switch to the SLIDE position activates the control position, lock the position by pushing the lever in to-
valve and unlocks the fifth wheel slide mechanism, ward the column until it goes no further and is paral-
allowing changes to the total length of the tractor- lel to the column itself.
trailer and changes to axle loads to comply with vary-
ing jurisdictional laws. For detailed operating instruc-
tions for fifth wheel slide, coupling, and uncoupling
WARNING
procedures, refer to Chapter 18.
Make sure that the steering column is locked be-
fore driving the vehicle. Never attempt to adjust
SLIDE
the column while driving the vehicle. Doing so
could cause loss of vehicle control, personal in-
jury, and property damage.

AIR
SLIDE

LOCK
09/28/2016 f611343

Fig. 4.28, Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch

Trailer Auxiliary Switch

The trailer auxiliary switch energizes an optional cir-
cuit that allows the trailer electrical system to draw
power for functions such as internal lights and bat-
tery charging for lift gates.
Press the top of the switch to activate the trailer aux- A
iliary function. Press the bottom of the switch to turn
trailer auxiliary function off. See Fig. 4.29.

09/14/2016 f462301
A. Pull the steering column locking lever out and away
from the column.
TRLR Fig. 4.30, Unlocking the Steering Column
AUX

Radio Controls
04/18/2016 f611408
Vehicle radio controls are a mix of both physical and
Fig. 4.29, Trailer Auxiliary Switch electronic.
Physical radio volume controls are located on the
steering wheel. ICUC volume up and down switches

4.15
 Driver Controls

are on the left-hand switch pod. ICC5 volume up and The climate control panel allows you to control the
down buttons are on the right-hand switch pod. See heating, ventilating, defrosting, and air conditioning
Fig. 4.31. (A/C) functions. The cab climate control panel has
three switches to control the functions of the cab
Other radio controls--muting the volume, choosing an
temperature system; see Fig. 4.32:
audio source or radio station, or saving a station as a
favorite can be done via the vehicle ICU. • fan switch with recirculation button
For additional radio operating instructions, see the • temperature control switch with A/C button
infotainment section in chapter 3 Instruments.
• mode control switch (with bunk-override button
on sleeper cab only)
1
2
1 2 3
3

09/09/2016 f611324
1. Fan Switch
2. Temperature Control Switch
3. Mode Control Switch
Fig. 4.32, Cab Climate Controls

6 5 A 4 The fan switch controls the fan speed, and forces

10/25/2018 f611531b fresh or recirculated air through the air outlets. To
increase airflow, turn the switch clockwise to a higher
A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument panel menus. When the button is number. To decrease airflow, turn the switch counter-
pressed, information appears on the 10-inch head clockwise to a lower number.
unit screen. Recirculation mode limits the amount of outside air
1. Phone Pick-Up that enters the cab. Press the recirculation button to
2. Back Button prevent dusty or smoky air from entering the cab.
3. Volume Increment Up
4. Volume Increment Down NOTE: To prevent the buildup of odors and/or
5. Mute Button oxygen depletion inside the cab, the system
6. Phone Hang-Up/Reject switches from full recirculation mode to partial
Fig. 4.31, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Pod - recirculation mode after 20 minutes.
ICC5
The temperature control switch is used to select the
desired temperature. Turn the switch clockwise to the
Climate Controls red area for warm air. Turn the switch counterclock-
NOTE: See chapter 6 Climate Controls for de- wise to the blue area for cool air.
tailed climate control panel operating instruc- The A/C cools and dehumidifies the air inside the
tions. cab. Press the A/C button, located in the center of
the temperature control switch, to turn the A/C on
Cab Climate Control and off.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the ICC5, the The mode control switch allows the control of air flow
through the face outlets, the floor outlets, the defrost
fan speed, set temperature, and ventilation
(windshield) outlets, or a combination of these out-
mode temporarily appear on infotainment screen lets. See Fig. 4.33.
when these items are adjusted.

4.16
Driver Controls

3 Sleeper Climate Control

The sleeper temperature can be controlled from the
sleeper climate control panel or from the cab climate
4 control panel if the bunk-override button is activated.
2
The fan switch controls the sleeper temperature fan
speed. To increase airflow, turn the switch clockwise
to a higher number. To decrease the airflow, turn the
switch counterclockwise to a lower number. See
Fig. 4.34.
1 5
1 2

7 6
01/15/2016 f611327
NOTE: There are intermediate modes between each
switch position.
1. Face Mode
2. Bi-Level Mode
3. Floor Mode 3
4. Floor/Defrost Mode 09/09/2016 f611328
5. Defrost Mode 1. Fan Switch
6. All Mode 2. Temperature Control Switch
7. Bunk Override Button (on sleeper-cabs only) 3. Air Conditioning Button
Fig. 4.33, Mode Control Switch With Bunk Override Fig. 4.34, Sleeper Climate Control Panel
Button
The temperature control switch is used to select the
Bunk-Override Button desired temperature in the sleeper. Turn the switch
clockwise to the red area for warm air. Turn the
The bunk-override button is located in the center of
switch counterclockwise to the blue area for cool air.
the cab air-selection switch (sleeper-cabs only). See
Fig. 4.33. The bunk override button allows the driver Press the button in the center of the temperature
to control the sleeper temperature and fan settings control switch to activate the A/C.
from the cab. Cancel bunk-override mode, if activated, by changing
Press the bunk override button to copy the current the sleeper fan speed or temperature setting. The
cab HVAC temperature and fan settings to the system will then operate from the sleeper controls.
sleeper HVAC. An amber indicator will illuminate
when bunk override mode is activated. When in over- Seat Controls
ride mode, the sleeper climate control panel auto-
matically conforms to the fan speed and temperature NOTE: See Chapter 7 for detailed information
settings on the cab climate panel at the time the about seat controls and adjustments.
override mode is activated. Further changes of the
cab climate control settings will not alter the settings WARNING
of the sleeper climate control panel.
The override mode is disabled when the fan switch Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from
or temperature control switch on the sleeper climate the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do
control panel is manually set to a different setting. so could cause personal injury.
The override mode is also disabled when the bunk The following is a description of adjustments that can
override button is pressed to the off position. be made to various Freightliner seats. Not all seats
have all of the adjustments listed below. See
Fig. 4.35.

4.17
 Driver Controls

1
3 4
2
8

6 7
5

02/03/2017 f910149a
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-and- 7. Seat Tilt
2. Lumbar Support aft cushion height) 8. Headrest Adjustment
3. Isolator Feature 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide (seat
4. Height Adjustment track adjustment)
Fig. 4.35, General Seat Adjustments

1. Backrest Tilt: This adjustment enables the back- 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide, or Seat Track Adjust-
rest to pivot forward or backward. ment: This adjustment moves the entire seat for-
ward or backward on its track.
2. Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the
shape of the seat back to give more or less sup- 7. Seat Tilt: This adjustment allows the seat assem-
port to the occupant’s lumbar (lower back) area. bly (back and bottom cushions) to tilt forward or
This adjustment is either mechanical or air con- backward.
trolled, depending on make and model of the
8. Headrest Adjustment: This adjustment changes
seat.
the angle of the upper part of the backrest to
3. Isolator: This feature reduces the amount of road provide head and upper back support.
shock by isolating the occupant from the motion
of the vehicle, and allowing the upper seat to
move in a simple pendulum motion. A lockout
feature is used whenever the isolator is not de-
sired.
4. Height Adjustment: This adjustment moves the
entire seat up or down. The adjustment is either
manually- or air-controlled, depending on the
make of the seat.
5. Bottom Cushion Angle, or Fore-and-Aft Bottom
Cushion Height: This adjustment enables the oc-
cupant to raise or lower the front or back of the
bottom cushion. This adjustment is easier to per-
form when all weight is removed from the seat.

4.18
 5
Driver Assistance Features
Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Detroit Assurance Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Detroit Assurance Active Lane Assist (ALA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Detroit Assurance Side Guard Assist (SGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Detroit Assurance Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Detroit Assurance Traffic Sign Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Detroit Assurance Vehicle Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision Mitigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
Zonar® 2020 Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
Touch Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Driver Assistance Features

Detroit Assurance Collision Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
erly could result in personal injury and/or death
Mitigation System and severe property damage.
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation System is Adaptive Cruise Control Safety
a driver safety system that uses a radar mounted on
the front frame crossmember and a windshield-
Information
mounted camera to communicate information to the Adaptive cruise control (ACC) may not detect narrow
vehicles’s brakes, engine, and transmission. The sys- vehicles, like motorcycles, driving in front or vehicles
tem can track vehicles up to 825 feet (250 meters) driving in a different lane.
ahead, and, if necessary, will sound a warning and
apply the brakes. In particular, be aware in the following situations:
• when cornering, entering, and exiting bends;
IMPORTANT: Do not mount any attachments in
front of the radar distance sensor. Do not paint • when driving winding stretches of road;
or affix items over the distance sensor cover. If • when overtaking;
attachments are mounted in front of the dis-
tance sensor, such as a crash guard, they can • when there are vehicles driving in a different
impair the operation of the distance sensor. lane;
• when vehicles are changing lanes;
Driver Display
• when vehicles are exiting the road;
The driver display presents warnings and the status
of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active Brake As- • when there are obstacles and stationary ve-
sist (ABA), Tailgate Warning, and/or Lane Departure hicles.
Warning (LDW). Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not compensate
(ACC), Active Brake Assist (ABA), Tailgate Warning, for inattentive driving, weather, or traffic conditions.
and Lane Departure Warning (LDW) in this chapter The adaptive cruise control is only an aid. The driver
for more information. is responsible for maintaining a safe distance from
To show distance, speed, and lane markings, navi- the vehicle in front, maintaining a safe vehicle speed,
gate to the Driver Assistance screen in the ICUC braking, and remaining in a lane.
using the Quick Access System Settings switch on If adaptive cruise control does not detect a vehicle
the right-hand steering wheel switch pod. See driving in front, the system will accelerate to the set
Fig. 5.1. Distance, speed, and lane markings auto- speed.
matically show on the ICC5 driver display screen.
Refer to chapter 3 Instruments for more information Overview
on driver display controls.
See Table 5.1 and Fig. 5.1 and Fig. 5.2 for a de-
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) scription of cruise control steering wheel switches.

Steering Wheel Controls

WARNING Description Function
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Sys- Sets the cruise speed while the vehicle
is traveling at the desired speed.
tem is intended solely as an aid for an alert and –/SET
Pressing and holding decreases the set
conscientious professional driver. It is not in- cruise speed.
tended to be relied upon to operate a vehicle. Resumes the set speed. Pressing and
Use the system in conjunction with rearview mir- +/RES
holding increases the set cruise speed.
rors and other instruments to safely operate the Deactivates cruise control, but retains
vehicle. CNCL
the set speed in memory.
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Sys- Table 5.1, Steering Wheel Controls
tem is not a substitute for safe, normal driving
procedures, nor will it compensate for any driver
impairment such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.

5.1
 Driver Assistance Features

8
When a vehicle in front is detected, the driver display
7 shows the speed of the detected vehicle and the dis-
6 tance and time to the detected vehicle. See Fig. 5.3.
1
5

4
2
3

08/14/2019 f611352e
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
2. Quick Access System Settings
3. Cruise Decelerate/Set
4. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
5. Marker Interrupt**
6. Phone Pick-Up
7. Headlamp Interrupt**
8. Cancel Cruise Control
** Not available in all markets
Fig. 5.1, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Switch
Pod - ICUC

3
2

1 09/14/2016 f611392

Fig. 5.3, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Screen - ICUC

Functions and Activation Conditions

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) controls speed and
the distance from a vehicle detected in front.
If there is no vehicle in front, ACC operates in the
same way as cruise control when the vehicle is trav-
eling above 10 mph (15 km/h).
If ACC detects a vehicle in front driving at a slower
6 5 A 4 speed, the engine is defueled, the engine brakes are
activated, and the service brakes are applied, slow-
10/25/2018 f611531a
ing the vehicle to maintain the set following distance.
A. Menu Button—Press the button to access The standard factory set following distance is 3.6
instrument panel menus. When the button is seconds; this can be adjusted under the Cruise Con-
pressed, information appears on the driver display trol menu under Vehicle Settings.
screen.
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume ACC allows the vehicle to operate in cruise all the
2. Back Button way down to 0 mph (0km/h); as traffic in front of the
3. Quick Access System Settings vehicle slows and eventually stops, the vehicle will
4. Marker Interrupt adjust with the traffic all the way to 0 mph (0km/h).
5. Cruise Cancel
6. Cruise Decelerate/Set If the vehicle ahead is stopped for two seconds or
less, ACC will resume when the vehicle ahead
Fig. 5.2, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Left-Hand Switch Pod moves. If the vehicle ahead is stopped for more than
- ICC5

5.2
Driver Assistance Features

two seconds, the driver—after carefully checking sur- If Adaptive Cruise Control becomes unavailable in
rounding traffic—will need to press the resume but- vehicles equipped with Detroit Assurance 5.0, a
ton or tap the accelerator pedal to resume moving pop-up message will inform the driver. If the vehicle
forward. is programmed to allow for standard cruise control, a
message will be displayed that allows the driver to
The ACC will also slow the vehicle if it exceeds the choose to use Standard Cruise Control. See Fig. 5.4.
set speed (on a downhill grade, for example).
When a slower vehicle in front is no longer detected,
the ACC will accelerate the vehicle to the set speed.
IMPORTANT: Nothing should be put between
the driver and the seat, such as a heating pad,
massage pad, or similar items. Doing so may
keep the seat occupancy sensor from function-
ing correctly.
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot be activated, or is
automatically deactivated, if:
• the driver is not in their seat to activate the
seat occupancy sensor;
09/15/2016 f611455
• the vehicle is traveling slower than 10 mph (15
km/h); Fig. 5.4, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable -
ICUC
• the transmission is in neutral for more than 5
seconds; Increasing or Reducing Adaptive Cruise
• reverse gear is selected; Control Speed
• the Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) is deacti- The Adaptive Cruise Control speed setting can only
be set when driving.
vated;
• there is a malfunction in the brake system or Press the –/SET switch on the steering wheel to set
the cruise speed when the vehicle is traveling at the
the electronic management system; or
desired speed. To decrease the set cruise speed,
• the distance sensor initialization is not yet com- press and hold the –/SET.
plete.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control and Distance to the Vehicle in Front
Setting the Speed The Adaptive Cruise Control settings menu under
Activate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) by setting the Vehicle Settings can be used to set the distance to
cruise speed, using the controls on the steering the vehicle in front. Adjust the specified minimum dis-
wheel. See Table 5.1. tance to the vehicle in front if necessary.
When driving at the desired speed, press the –/SET IMPORTANT: Make sure that the minimum dis-
switch on the steering wheel. ACC will be activated tance required by law is maintained.
and the set speed stored.
If cruise control is deactivated, the stored speed can
Overtaking When Using Adaptive Cruise
be activated again by pressing the +/RES switch on Control
the steering wheel. The driver display will show the NOTE: It is possible to exceed the set speed
adaptive cruise control symbol and the set speed.
when overtaking.
ACC will automatically brake or accelerate the ve-
hicle to maintain the set speed. The set speed of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) can
be exceeded using the accelerator pedal. When the
If the brake pedal is pressed, ACC is deactivated au-
accelerator pedal is released, the ACC set speed will
tomatically.
be resumed.

5.3
 Driver Assistance Features

Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control ABA is not a substitute for safe driving proce-
dures.
To deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), press
the CNCL switch on the steering wheel or press the Operate a vehicle equipped with the Detroit As-
brake pedal. Either will deactivate ACC. surance Collision Mitigation System as if the ve-
hicle were not equipped with a collision mitiga-
NOTE: The set speed remains stored when tion system.
ACC is deactivated.
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Sys-
Tailgate Warning tem will not warn of hazards such as animals,
oncoming vehicles, or cross traffic.
Tailgate Warning is a feature that alerts the driver
when he is following the vehicle in front too closely. Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
The system gives warning when: erly could result in personal injury and/or death
and severe property damage.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not active;
and If your vehicle is equipped with Active Brake Assist
(ABA), it can (within system limitations):
• the vehicle is moving faster than 20 mph (32
km/h); and • react more quickly than a driver to an object in
the vehicle’s path of travel;
• the driver follows a vehicle for longer than 10
seconds at a distance that will be traversed in • perform emergency braking; and
less than 2.6 seconds. • with Detroit Assurance 5.0 and newer, react to
The system will not give warning when: moving people with a warning and full braking.
• the vehicle is moving slower than 20 mph (32 The Detroit Assurance 5.0 version of ABA can mini-
km/h); mize the risk of a front-end collision with a moving or
stationary vehicle and pedestrians. If ABA detects the
• another vehicle cuts in front; risk of a front-end collision, it issues an audible and
• the vehicle in front is moving away; or visual warning. If the risk persists, ABA automatically
initiates partial braking of the vehicle. If the driver
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated. does not react to the warnings and partial brake ap-
The system will continue to give warning every 20 plication, ABA automatically initiates a full brake ap-
seconds if the gap between the vehicles does not plication.
increase. ABA may also detect people who are moving along
the edge of the lane.
Active Brake Assist (ABA)
ABA may not detect narrow vehicles, like motor-
Safety Information cycles, driving in front of the vehicle or vehicles driv-
ing in a different lane.
WARNING ABA does not automatically adapt to road and traffic
conditions. Brake the vehicle using the service brake
Active Brake Assist (ABA) is intended only as an if:
aid for a conscientious and alert driver. The
driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance • an event window with the Warning symbol ap-
from the vehicle in front, for the vehicle speed, pears on the driver display screen;
braking in good time, and remaining in lane. Op- • an intermittent warning tone sounds; or
erate a vehicle equipped with the Detroit Assur-
ance system as if the vehicle were not equipped • an intermittent warning tone sounds and auto-
with a collision warning system. matic partial braking was initiated.
ABA does not take road and weather conditions If no visual and/or acoustic warning is issued in a
into account, nor the prevailing traffic situation. critical situation:
The driver should always adapt driving style to • ABA has not recognized the danger of the situ-
suit prevailing road and weather conditions. ation;

5.4
Driver Assistance Features

• ABA is suppressed; or Active Brake Assist (ABA) Collision

• ABA has failed. Warning and Emergency Braking
ABA-triggered emergency braking can be deactivated If there is a risk of collision, Active Brake Assist
if the driver presses the accelerator pedal beyond the (ABA) issues alerts on the driver display, illuminates
pressure point (kickdown). the ABA indicator lamp, and sounds an audible warn-
ing. In addition, the radio and/or hands-free systems
Activating/Deactivating Active Brake like Detroit Connect are automatically muted.
Assist (ABA) The ABA warning cascade is as follows:
The Active Brake Assist (ABA) system cannot be • Warning (ABA): An alert appears on the driver
turned off. However, ABA is suppressed when the display, the radio is muted, and an intermittent
driver: warning tone sounds.
• uses the turn signal during an audible warning; • Partial Braking (ABA): An alert appears on
• rapidly presses the accelerator; or the driver display, the radio is muted, and an
intermittent warning tone sounds. In addition,
• presses the accelerator pedal beyond the pres- ABA slows the vehicle with automatic partial
sure point (kickdown). braking. ABA brakes the vehicle with around
If there is a system error, the indicator lamp will illu- 50% of the vehicle’s maximum braking power.
minate and an alert will be shown on the driver dis- • Emergency Braking (ABA): If the driver does
play. See Fig. 5.5 and Fig. 5.6. not react to the collision warnings or partial
brake application, ABA automatically initiates
emergency braking (full brake application).
Warning messages appears on the driver dis-
play, the radio is muted, a continuous warning
tone sounds, and ABA brakes the vehicle with

A 100% of the vehicle’s maximum braking power.

CAUTION
After emergency braking, the "Emergency Brak-
09/14/2016 f611453
ing Complete Brakes Releasing Soon" message
Fig. 5.5, Active Brake Assist (ABA) Indicator Lamp
appears in the event window on the driver dis-
play.
If an emergency braking maneuver has been per-
formed, remove the vehicle from the area of dan-
ger as soon as possible while paying attention to
the traffic situation. Stop the engine and apply
the parking brake.
Every time a driver exits the vehicle or shuts off
the engine, the parking brake should be applied.
Make sure that the vehicle is in proper operating
order and that the load is secured properly be-
fore resuming driving.
The driver can interrupt emergency braking by press-
09/15/2016 f611454
ing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resis-
Fig. 5.6, Active Brake Assist (ABA) Alert - ICUC tance (kickdown).

5.5
 Driver Assistance Features

ACC & ABA Driving Condition Limitations

See Table 5.2 for a description of Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) and Active Brake Assist (ABA) limita-
tions in specific driving conditions.

Active Brake Assist Limitations

Condition Visual Description

The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles on bends is

Cornering, entering limited. ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or
and exiting bends brake the vehicle. ACC may also accelerate the vehicle
unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040840a

The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles driving in a

Driving in a different
different lane, or stationary vehicles is limited. ABA and
lane, and stationary
ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake the vehicle.
vehicles
ACC may accelerate unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040835a

The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles pulling into

your lane is limited. The distance to the vehicle in front
entering your lane may then be too short. ABA and ACC
may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake the vehicle. ACC
may also accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040836a
Other vehicles
changing lane
The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles pulling into
your lane without maintaining a safe distance is limited.
They do not detect vehicles until they are within the
system’s detection range. ACC may accelerate
unexpectedly. Brake the vehicle. This will increase the
12/18/2014 f040841a
distance to the vehicle in front.

The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles turning off is

Vehicles turning off limited. ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or
brake your vehicle.
12/18/2014 f040843a

When passing, ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue

Overtaking warnings or brake your vehicle if the vehicle is too close to
the vehicle in front, and is in the same lane.

12/18/2014 f040838a

5.6
Driver Assistance Features

Active Brake Assist Limitations

Condition Visual Description

On winding stretches of road, ABA and ACC cannot detect

Winding stretches of which lane the vehicle in front is driving in. ABA and ACC
road may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake your vehicle.
ACC may also accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040844a

ABA and ACC cannot detect obstacles or stationary

Obstacles and vehicles in front of the detected vehicle. ABA and ACC may
stationary vehicles unexpectedly issue warnings or brake your vehicle. ACC
may also accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040837a

ABA can also unexpectedly issue warnings and brake the

vehicle if it detects stationary objects like:
Stationary objects • vehicles which have broken down
• signs
12/18/2014 f040842a • bridges
ABA can react incorrectly to the following conditions:
• stationary people
• people or objects that quickly enter the field of
Stationary people detection of the sensor
• people in a tunnel
09/14/2016 f040847 ABA can also react unexpectedly to people who are
standing on the roadside in a curve.
Table 5.2, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Active Brake Assist (ABA) Limitations

Detroit Assurance Lane The system does not warn of all possible haz-
ards. The system cannot prevent an accident if
Departure Warning (LDW) the driver is impaired or not driving safely.
The Lane Departure Warning system is not a sub-
WARNING stitute for safe driving procedures.

The optional Lane Departure Warning system is Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
intended only as an aid for a conscientious and erly could result in personal injury and/or death
alert driver. Do not rely solely on the system to and severe property damage.
safely operate the vehicle. Lane Departure Warning monitors the area in front of
The system may not indicate lane departures the vehicle with a camera on the top of the wind-
under certain conditions. Read the information in shield. When lane departure warning is active and
this manual to understand the circumstances detecting lane markings on the road surface, it audi-
under which this system may not provide ad- bly warns the driver if it thinks they may be leaving
equate lane departure warnings. the lane unintentionally.

5.7
 Driver Assistance Features

Safety Notes on Lane Departure LDW only issues warnings if the speed is above ap-
proximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
Warning (LDW)
When driving over lane markings unintentionally, the
The system may be impaired or may not operate in volume of audio equipment like the radio and/or
the following situations: hands-free systems is reduced, and a direction-
• when there is low visibility due to insufficient related "rumble-strip noise" sounds from the left or
road illumination, or due to snow, rain, fog or right door speaker.
heavy spray Lane Departure Warning does not issue a warning if:
• when there is glare due to oncoming traffic, • the turn signals are switched on;
direct sunlight, or reflections from wet road sur-
faces • there is braking or acceleration; or

• when the windshield in the area of the camera • a driving safety system such as Active Brake
is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered by a Assist (ABA), Stability Control, or Adaptive
sticker Cruise Control (ACC) intervenes.

• when no lane markings or several varied lane Activating or Deactivating Lane

markings are present, such as in a construc-
tion zone
Departure Warning (LDW)
• when the lane markings are worn, dark, or cov- When the engine is turned on, Lane Departure Warn-
ered, such as by sand, dirt, or snow ing (LDW) is automatically activated.

• when the distance from the vehicle in front is NOTE: There is no audible self-test of the
too small and this prevents the lane markings "rumble-strip noise" of the LDW when the key is
from being detected turned on.
• when the lane markings change rapidly, when Pressing the LDW OFF switch will deactivate LDW
lanes branch off, or when they cross or merge temporarily. See Fig. 5.7. When the LDW is deacti-
vated, the switch will illuminate.
• when lanes are very narrow or winding
• when shade conditions on the road surface
change greatly
The driver must adapt their driving style to current
conditions. LDW cannot take the road and weather
conditions into account, nor the prevailing traffic situ-
ation. The driver is responsible for the distance to the
LDW
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good OFF
time and remaining in the lane.
05/12/2016 f611413
Functions and Activation Conditions
for Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Fig. 5.7, Lane Departure Warning Alert Switch

The Detroit Assurance LDW system is designed to LDW is not active if:
warn the driver as the vehicle crosses the outer
• the driver presses the LDW OFF switch; or
boundary of the lane marking. This may differ from
other LDW systems which issue a warning as the • the system is searching for a lane.
driver approaches the inside of the lane marking. If
the system warns at, or just beyond the outer edge If there is a system error, the LDW telltale will illumi-
of the lane marking, the system is performing as de- nate in the driver display. See Fig. 5.8 and Fig. 5.9.
signed. If the warning does not occur, or occurs after
an excessive lane departure, the system may not be
operating properly.

5.8
Driver Assistance Features

this manual to understand the circumstances

under which this system may not provide ad-
equate lane departure warnings.
The system does not warn of all possible haz-
ards.
Active Lane Assist cannot substitute for safe
driving procedures.
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
erly could result in personal injury and/or death
04/18/2016 f611394
and severe property damage.

Fig. 5.8, LDW Telltale - ICUC General Information

Detroit Assurance Active Lane Assist (ALA) keeps
the vehicle within the lane. ALA accomplishes this by
monitoring the driver’s steering as well as monitoring
the area in front of the vehicle with a camera. ALA
Fig. 5.9, LDW Telltale - ICC5 issues warnings when it detects a driver has taken
their hands off the wheel. ALA also detects lane
Cleaning the Distance Sensor and the markings, warns the driver when they have gone
Camera over these lane markings, and actively steers the
vehicle back into the center of the lane.
To avoid malfunctions, clean the cover of the dis-
tance sensor regularly.
IMPORTANT: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
must be active for Active Lane Assist (ALA) to
Regularly clean the area of the windshield used by be active. Deactivation of ACC also deactivates
the camera to avoid incorrect lane detection. ALA.
If the area of the windshield is damaged, Lane De- ALA consists of Lane Keep Assist (LKA) and Lane
parture Warning may not work as intended. If this Departure Protection (LDP).
happens, the windshield must be replaced.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) works with the driver to keep
Make sure that the windshield is always kept clean the vehicle in the lane in the driver’s preferred lane
and unobstructed in the area of the camera. The position. Lane positions can be set under the Drive
driver should switch on the windshield wiper to clean Time Systems menu, under Driving Systems, under
the windshield and remove snow and ice from the Settings. Options include: offset to the right, offset to
windshield. the left, or center.
LKA also monitors the driver to make sure they keep
Detroit Assurance Active Lane their hands on the wheel and are engaged in steer-
Assist (ALA) ing the vehicle. LKA will go into a passive state when
the driver actively steers the vehicle.
WARNING Lane Departure Protection (LDP) builds on Lane De-
parture Warning (LDW). LDW warns the driver when
The optional Active Lane Assist system is in- the vehicle moves outside the lane markings by col-
tended only as an aid for a conscientious and oring the driver display lane markings red and sound-
alert driver. Do not rely solely on the system to ing a rumble strip tone. If the driver does not act—
safely operate the vehicle. such as by switching on the turn signals or actively
steering—and the vehicle continues to move out of
The driver is responsible for keeping their hands the lane, LDP steers the vehicle back into the center
on the wheel 100% of the time when ALA is ac- of the lane.
tive. ALA is intended only as an aid.
In addition to acting as a warning, lane markings on
The system may not indicate lane departures the driver display screen show the status of LDW. No
under certain conditions. Read the information in lane markings or outlined lane markings indicate the

5.9
 Driver Assistance Features

LDW is off. Solid white or red lane markings indicate ALA may go into passive mode under the following
LDW is active. When LDW is on, LDP is on. conditions:
The status of LKA—shown with the steering wheel • there is low visibility, due to insufficient road
indicator—is shown by the color of indicator as fol- illumination or due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy
lows: spray;
• Blue steering wheel: LKA is active. • there is glare from oncoming traffic, the sun, or
• Grey steering wheel: LKA is in passive mode. reflection from other vehicles when the road
surface is wet;
• Red steering wheel: there is an error with the
• the windshield is dirty, misted up, damaged, or
adaptive power steering (APS) which deacti-
covered in the vicinity of the camera;
vates Active Lane Assist.
• there are unclear lane markings present, such
• When the LKA is off, no steering wheel icon
as a construction area;
shows on the driver display screen.
See Fig. 5.11 and Fig. 5.10 for examples of the LKA • the lane markings are worn away, dark, or cov-
status in the driver display. ered by dirt, sand, water, or snow;
• the distance to the vehicle in front is too small
and the lane markings cannot be detected;
• the lane markings change quickly—for example
lanes branch off, cross one another or merge;
• the road is narrow and winding;
• there are variable shade conditions on the road
surface;
• an attachment (such as a snow plow) restricts
1 the camera’s view of the lane markings;
• there has been a significant change in load
2 with the ignition switched on. Start the engine
again after a significant change in load to have
ALA be available without restrictions.
ALA cannot take the road and weather conditions
into account, nor the current traffic situation. The
driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and
remaining in the lane.
Keep the windshield clean and unobstructed in the
08/15/2019 f611798 area of the camera.
1. Active LKA Indicator 2. Active ACC Indicator
Active Lane Assist (ALA) Activation
Fig. 5.10, Active Lane Assist - ICUC Conditions and Functions
Active Lane Assist Safety Information There are two physical OFF switches related to Ac-
tive Lane Assist (ALA): the Lane Departure Warning
Active Lane Assist (ALA) cannot always clearly iden- (LDW) switch (see 5.12) and the Lane Keep Assist
tify lane markings. In such cases, ALA may go into (LKA) switch. There is also a digital Active Lane As-
passive mode. sist (ALA) switch available in the ICU (see Fig. 5.13).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) only needs one
identifiable lane line to function; Lane Departure Pro- Pressing the LDW OFF switch will turn off LDW and
tection (LDP) requires both to be identifiable to func- Lane Departure Protection (LDP) for fifteen minutes.
tion. When the LDW is off, the light on the lane departure

5.10
Driver Assistance Features

2
1

10/16/2018 f611544
The LKA status indicator can appear as blue (active), grey (in passive mode; not shown), or red (an error with the adap-
tive power steering (APS) which deactivates ALA; not shown). The green ACC indicator appears when the ALA feature is
on.
1. Active Lane Keep Assist Indicator 2. Active Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator
Fig. 5.11, Active Lane Assist - ICC5

LKA is off. Restarting the vehicle will turn LKA on

again.
Selecting the ALA OFF switch turns off the LKA func-
tionality of ALA. The switch "light" will illuminated on
the screen to show ALA is off.
When ALA is off there will be no steering wheel icon
LDW
OFF on the screen and the lane markings on the driver
display screen will be outlined or not exist. To turn
ALA on again, select the ALA OFF switch or restart
05/12/2016 f611413
the vehicle.
Fig. 5.12, Lane Departure Warning Alert Switch ALA is turned on each time the engine is turned on;
the system becomes active when all the activation
conditions are met.
When ALA is on, it monitors the area in front of the
vehicle with a camera mounted at the top of the
windshield. The LDW/LDP function of ALA detects
lane markings on the road surface, warns the driver
10/16/2018 f611543 they may be leaving their lane unintentionally, and
moves the vehicle back to the center of the lane. The
Fig. 5.13, Active Lane Assist Button LKA function of ALA monitor’s the vehicle’s position
within the lane and the driver’s steering behavior.
warning alert switch will come on. A driver might
want to turn off LDW on winding roads or when driv- If the driver’s hands are taken off the steering wheel
ing through construction zones. for fifteen seconds with Lane Keep Assist (LKA) ac-
tive, an amber caution pop-up screen will appear tell-
Pressing the LKA OFF switch turns off LKA for the ing the driver to return their hands to the steering
key cycle—unless the switch is pressed again to turn wheel. Doing so will cause the pop-up to disappear.
LKA on. The switch light will come on to show that

5.11
 Driver Assistance Features

If the driver does not return their hands to the steer- When driving over the lane marking unintentionally:
ing wheel within the next fifteen seconds, a red warn-
• the relevant lane marking is shown in red on
ing pop-up screen will appear along with an acousti-
the driver display screen;
cal warning that will sound every five seconds. The
warning pop-up will disappear when the driver re- • the volume of the audio equipment and/or
turns their hands to the wheel. hands-free system is reduced and a warning
If the driver does not return their hands to the steer- tone sounds from the loudspeaker on the cor-
ing wheel, the warning pop-up remains. Starting at responding side of the vehicle.
fifty-five seconds the acoustical warning will start to ALA does not issue a warning about going over lane
sound every second. At sixty-seconds this become a markings if:
continuous audible warning and LKA will drop into
passive mode. The warning pop-up will remain on • the turn signals are switched on;
the driver display screen. • the driver clearly and actively steers, brakes or
Exiting this mode and dismissing the pop-up can be accelerates;
accomplished by the driver placing and keeping their • a driving safety system, such as Active Brake
hands on the steering wheel. The now visible LKA Assist intervenes.
icon will be grey, showing that it is in passive mode.
ALA will warn the driver when changing lanes if the
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) can have multiple turn signal is not used.
statuses. All are shown through the representation of
the lane markings on the driver display screen:
Detroit Assurance Side Guard
• Off: represented by no lane markings or out-
lined lane markings. Assist (SGA)
• Ready Left: represented by solid white left-side General Information
lane markings. IMPORTANT: Side guard assist (SGA) is not
• Ready Right: represented by solid white right- designed for use with more than one trailer at-
side lane markings. tached to the tractor. If used with more than one
• Warning Left: represented by solid red left-side trailer, SGA only considers objects or stationary
lane markings. obstacles in the range of the tractor and the first
trailer, and false-positive indications and warn-
• Warning Right: represented by solid red right- ings may occur. SGA detects if a trailer is at-
side lane markings. tached to the tractor, but it cannot detect
As soon as the vehicle reaches 37 mph (60 km/h), whether or not multiple trailers are attached.
both LDW and Lane Departure Protection (LDP) are
on. IMPORTANT: Side Guard Assist is not currently
designed to work with non-ABS trailers.
If the vehicle moves over either the right or left lane
markings, these markings will turn red on the driver In a left-hand drive vehicle, SGA monitors the area to
display and a rumble strip sound will be given as au- the right of the vehicle and trailer using short range
ditory feedback. If the driver takes no action and the radar sensors. The radar sensors are mounted close
vehicle continues to move out of the lane, LDP will to the rear of the right-hand footsteps. SGA provides
steer the vehicle back into the center of the lane. assistance when turning right and moving into the
right-hand lane. A warning lamp activates to inform
After LDP has steered the vehicle back into the cen- the driver that an object has been detected in the
ter lane position three times in a key cycle, LDP will monitored area. A warning tone also sounds if there
turn off and requires a key cycle to reactivate it. is a risk of collision. SGA is not active while revers-
ALA is ready to issue warnings: ing.
• when the vehicle is moving above approxi- For a right-hand drive vehicle, SGA monitors the
mately 37 mph (60 km/h); and area to the left of the vehicle and trailer. The location
of sensors and warning lamps on the ICU all shift to
• when the blue steering wheel indicator appears the left in this case. All other features remain the
in the instrument panel. same.

5.12
Driver Assistance Features

The trailer monitoring of SGA is not active shortly

after reversing or shortly after coupling up. It is not
possible to switch SGA trailer monitoring on or off
shortly after reversing or shortly after coupling up.

Safety Information
WARNING
When detection is restricted, SGA may issue a
warning too late or not at all. The detection of 10/11/2018 f611532
obstacles can be impaired by the following situa-
tions: Fig. 5.14, Sensor Monitoring Range
• dirty, icy or obscured sensors; If SGA malfunctions, a message appears in the in-
• very wide lanes; strument panel display screen. See the last icon in
Table 5.3. Objects in the monitoring range are not
• vehicles not driving in the middle of their indicated when this occurs.
lane;
Have the function of the radar sensors checked at an
• barriers or other road boundaries. authorized Freightliner dealer if the vehicle is in-
volved in a severe accident or there is damage to the
There is a risk of an accident in these situations. right-hand footsteps. Otherwise, SGA may not oper-
The driver must pay attention to the traffic situa- ate properly.
tion and maintain a safe distance at the side of
the vehicle.
SGA Indicator Lamps
SGA is only an aid. It may fail to detect some objects
and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always NOTE: The indicator lamps described below as
ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for grey may be white, depending on the type of
other vehicles, pedestrians, and obstacles. instrument panel installed in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT: If the sensors are dirty, SGA Name Icon Color
flashes a message in the instrument panel. See
the last icon in Table 5.3. Pull off in a safe loca-
Side Guard Assist
tion to clean the SGA sensors. Grey
Initializing

Monitoring Range of the Sensors

There is an angle of approximately 6 degrees be-
Side Guard Assist Active Grey
tween the vehicle and the sensor monitoring range.
See Fig. 5.14. Objects within this range are not
detected.
Due to the nature of the system, warnings may be Side Guard Assist
Grey
issued in error when driving close to barriers or other Deactivated
solid boundaries, and warnings may be interrupted
when driving alongside particularly long vehicles for a
prolonged time. Side Guard Assist Trailer
Grey
Depending on the situation and on the trailer, SGA Monitoring Active
may issue a warning prematurely or not issue a
warning at all.
Ensure that the radar sensor cover is free from dirt, Side Guard Assist Trailer
Grey
ice, or slush. The radar sensors must not be painted Monitoring Deactivated
or covered by items such as stickers.

5.13
 Driver Assistance Features

Name Icon Color Assist Trailer lights up amber in the instrument panel
display screen.

Caution, Side Guard Assist Amber

Caution, Side Guard Assist

Amber
Trailer

Caution, Side Guard Assist

Trailer Monitoring Amber
Deactivated
10/11/2018 f611533

Fig. 5.15, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring

Warning, Side Guard Assist Red Range

SGA recognizes when the driver signals or steers to

the right and there is a risk of collision. See
Warning, Side Guard Assist Fig. 5.16. The red warning lamp in the A-pillar
Red
Trailer flashes for approximately two seconds and a warning
tone also sounds. The red warning lamp in the
A-pillar then lights up continuously while there is a
Warning, Side Guard Assist risk of collision. In addition, the Warning, Side Guard
Trailer Monitoring Red Assist Trailer lights up red in the instrument panel
Deactivated display screen.
In addition, if the vehicle is equipped with an ICC5
driver display screen, the side of the screen behind
Alert, Side Guard Assist Grey the Warning, Side Guard Assist Trailer lamp lights up
red. SEE FIG ICC5 screen

Table 5.3, Side Guard Assist (SGA) Lamps

SGA is active when the ignition is turned on. If a

trailer is attached to the vehicle, a grey or white indi-
cator lamp (a triangle and trailer) activates in the in-
strument panel display screen. See Table 5.3.
If a trailer is not attached to the vehicle, a grey or
white indicator lamp (triangle) activates in the instru-
ment panel display screen. See the second icon in
Table 5.3.
10/11/2018 f611534
If the SGA trailer monitoring is turned off and a trailer
is attached to the vehicle, a grey or white indicator Fig. 5.16, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring
lamp (a triangle and trailer with a line through it) acti- Range When Turning Right
vates in the instrument panel display screen. See the
fifth icon in Table 5.3. Warning When Changing Lanes
Warning When Turning Right When changing lanes and there is a moving object in
the SGA monitoring range, as shown in Fig. 5.17, a
If there is a moving object in the SGA monitoring yellow warning lamp lights up in the A-pillar, and the
range, as shown in Fig. 5.15, a yellow warning lamp Caution, Side Guard Assist Trailer lamp lights up
lights up in the A-pillar, and the Caution, Side Guard amber in the instrument panel display screen.

5.14
Driver Assistance Features

SGA warns the driver about stationary obstacles in

the vehicle’s range of movement up to a maximum
speed of 22 mph (35 km/h).
If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle
when turning right, the red warning lamp in the
A-pillar flashes for approximately two seconds and a
warning tone also sounds. The red warning lamp in
the A-pillar then lights up continuously while there is
a risk of collision. In addition, the Warning, Side
Guard Assist Trailer lamp shown in Table 5.3, lights
10/11/2018 f611535 up red in the instrument panel display screen.
In addition, if the vehicle is equipped with an ICC5
Fig. 5.17, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring
Range When Changing Lanes driver display screen, the side of the screen behind
the Warning, Side Guard Assist Trailer lamp lights up
When changing lanes and a moving object is located red.
in the danger zone, as shown in Fig. 5.18, there is a
risk of collision. If the driver signals or steers to the Activating or Deactivating
right, a red warning lamp in the A-pillar flashes for
SGA is automatically activated when the engine is
approximately two seconds and a warning tone also
turned on. The driver can deactivate/activate SGA in
sounds. The red warning lamp in the A-pillar then
the instrument panel Drive Time Systems menu.
lights up continuously while there is a risk of colli-
sion. The Warning, Side Guard Assist Trailer lamp
also lights up red in the instrument panel display Detroit Assurance Attention
screen. Assist
In addition, if the vehicle is equipped with an ICC5
driver display screen, the side of the screen behind General Information
the Warning, Side Guard Assist Trailer lamp lights up Attention Assist helps a driver by detecting typical
red. indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-
tration and suggesting taking a break.
Attention Assist is active at speeds above approxi-
mately 37 mph (60 km/h). When it detects indicators
of fatigue, Attention Assist sounds a warning tone
and displays a warning lamp on the instrument
panel.
The Attention Assist warning is shown regardless of
legally prescribed driving and rest periods.
Keep the windshield clean and unobstructed in the
area of the camera to help ensure Attention Assist is
10/11/2018 f611536
working properly.
Fig. 5.18, A Moving Object in the Danger Zone When
Changing Lanes Safety Information
IMPORTANT: Attention Assist is only an aid. It
Right-Turn Warning for Stationary cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in con-
Obstacles centration reliably or in time. Attention Assist is
IMPORTANT: SGA is only an aid. It may fail to not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive
detect some objects and is not a substitute for driver.
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is Attention Assist may not operate as designed under
sufficient distance to the side for other vehicles, the following conditions:
pedestrians, and obstacles.

5.15
 Driver Assistance Features

• low visibility due to insufficient road illumination If Attention Assist detects typical indicators of fatigue
or due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray; or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of
the driver:
• if the windshield is dirty in the area of the cam-
era, misted up, damaged, or covered by some- • a warning tone sounds;
thing such as a sticker;
• the instrument panel display screen shows an
• no lane markings or several ambiguous lane attention assist caution warning, see Fig. 5.19
markings are present for a lane (near construc- and Fig. 5.20;
tion sites for example);
• Active Lane Assist (ALA) is automatically
• the lane markings are worn, dark, or covered reactivated.
by dirt or snow;
• there is glare due to oncoming traffic, direct
sunlight or reflections (from wet road surfaces
for example);
• on winding roads;
• when the distance to the vehicle in front is too
small for the lane markings to be detected;
• when attachments, such as a snow plough, 08/08/2019 f611542

restrict the camera’s view of the road lane Fig. 5.19, Attention Assist Warning Lamp - ICUC
markings;
• after a significant change in load with the igni-
tion turned on. Therefore, start the engine
again after a significant change in load for At-
tention Assist to be available without any re-
strictions.
Attention Assist is restricted and a warning does not
occur or is delayed:
08/08/2019 f611542a
• if the driver is predominantly driving slower
than 37 mph (60 km/h); Fig. 5.20, Attention Assist Warning Lamp - ICUC

• if the markings on the road are missing or diffi- Take regular breaks during long journeys. If the
cult to distinguish; driver doesn’t take a break when prompted, the
soonest Attention Assist can issue another warning is
• on winding roads. 15 minutes.
Function and Activation Conditions When the engine is turned off or the vehicle is sta-
tionary for some time, Attention Assist will reset its
Attention Assist assesses the driver’s level of fatigue detection sequence.
or lapses in concentration by taking the following cri-
teria into account: Activating or Deactivating
• Driving characteristics, such as remaining in After starting the engine, Attention Assist is al-
the lane and active steering. ways activated.
• Trip related details such as the length of the To deactivate Attention Assist in the ICUC instrument
drive. panel, press the center button in either of the steer-
• Use of turn signals. ing wheel pods and go to Safety System Settings,
then Attention Assist and select Off select On to acti-
• Use of the engine brake switch. vate Attention Assist.
• Uncharacteristic changes in the accelerator
pedal position.

5.16
Driver Assistance Features

To deactivate Attention Assist in the ICC5 instrument • the traffic signs are posted on the far side of
panel, press the center button in either of the steer- the road or very high above the road;
ing wheel pods and go to the Settings menu, then
• the road is very wide, winding, or has sharp
Driving Assistance, then Attention Assist and select
turns;
Off; select On to activate Attention Assist.
• there are variable shade conditions on the road
Detroit Assurance Traffic Sign surface;
Display • GPS satellite reception is limited due to geo-
graphical location or development along the
General Information road;
NOTE: the ICU will display up to two traffic • onboard map data is outdated due to recent
signs at a time. If more than two signs are rec- changes in local traffic regulations or new road
ognized by the system, the most safety critical layout.
signs will be displayed. The traffic sign recognition system cannot take the
The traffic sign recognition and display system in- road and weather conditions into account, nor the
creases road safety by making the driver aware of current traffic situation. The driver is responsible for
posted traffic signs. Traffic sign display uses video the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
data from the multipurpose camera in combination braking in good time and remaining in the lane.
with GPS map data to recognize USA and Canadian
traffic signs and display them in the instrument panel. Traffic Sign Display Functionality
GPS information dictates the language and style of NOTE: Only three types of USA and Canadian
the ICU sign display.
traffic signs are currently detected:
Safety Information • Speed Limit signs (from speeds 5 to 140)
Traffic sign recognition and display is only intended • Passing signs
as an aid for a conscientious and alert driver. The • Exclusion signs
system may not operate as designed under the fol-
lowing conditions: See Fig. 5.21 for currently recognized USA signs
and Fig. 5.22. for Canadian signs.
• there is low visibility, due to insufficient road
illumination or due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy When a traffic sign is recognized by the system, an
spray; image representing it appears in the instrument
panel. See Fig. 5.23 and Fig. 5.24. In order to oper-
• there is glare from oncoming traffic, the sun, or ate, the traffic sign display feature must be activated
reflection from other vehicles when the road in the instrument panel menu.
surface is wet;
• the windshield is dirty, misted up, damaged, or Activating or Deactivating
covered, for instance by a sticker in the vicinity
NOTE: When the ignition is turned on, traffic
of the camera;
sign display restores the state of the system
• the traffic signs are partly or fully covered by (either activated or deactivated) from the last
other vehicles, bushes, or trees; ignition cycle.
• the traffic signs are designed in a non- Activating traffic sign display in the ICUC instru-
standardized form, with additional text, or as ment panel:
LED panels;
1. Navigate to "Drive Time Systems."
• the traffic signs are damaged, bent, twisted,
stained, or scratched; 2. Go to "Safety System Settings."
• the distance from the vehicle in front is too 3. Go to "Sign Recognition."
small and prevents the traffic signs from being 4. Select "On."
detected in time;
Select ’Off’ to deactivate traffic sign display.

5.17
 Driver Assistance Features

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
04/15/2019 f001220
1. General Speed Limit 4. School Speed Limit 6. Pass With Care
2. Truck Speed Limit 5. Do Not Pass 7. No Trucks
3. Night Speed Limit (only at night)
Fig. 5.21, Recognized Traffic Signs, USA

1 2 3 4 5
04/15/2019 f001221
1. General Speed Limit 3. No Overtaking 5. No Trucks
2. Speed Limit Ends 4. Overtaking Permitted

Fig. 5.22, Recognized Traffic Signs, Canada

Activating traffic sign recognition in the ICC5: Some vehicles may be equipped with a combination
driver facing camera (DFC), multipurpose camera 2
1. Press the center button in either of the steering
(MPC2), and rain light sensor (RLS) in the cab.
wheel OFN control buttons
These components are in a unit, mounted against
2. Select the "Settings" (gear) icon. the windshield. See Fig. 5.25 .
3. Select "Driving Assistance." Driver Facing Camera
4. Go to "Traffic Sign Recognition."
The DFC is in a self-contained housing of the main
5. Move the selector switch icon to the "On" posi- camera unit and records the interior view with a
tion (a blue line will appear to the left). video capture feature in the case of a safety critical
Move the selector switch icon to the ’Off’ position to event.
deactivate traffic sign recognition and display
Multipurpose Camera 2
Detroit Assurance Vehicle The MPC2 works with other features such as traffic
sign display and lane keep assist. It is important for
Cameras the driver to keep the windshield clean and unob-
IMPORTANT: The windshield must be clean, structed in order for the MPC2 to operate properly.
unobstructed, and without damage for proper
operation of the multipurpose camera.

5.18
Driver Assistance Features

1 3
A
2
10/09/2018 f546894
Location of the camera components is approximate.
1. Driver Facing Camera
2. Multipurpose Camera 2
3. Rain Light Sensor
Fig. 5.25, Vehicle Camera Components

wipers when the system detects rain, as well as the

headlights when the ambient light decreases to a
preset level. For additional windshield wiper and
10/30/2018 f611558 headlight information, see Chapter 4.
A. Detected Speed Limit and Do Not Pass signs
displayed.
Fig. 5.23, Traffic Sign Display - ICUC

10/30/2018 f546895
A. Detected Speed Limit and Do Not Pass signs displayed.

Fig. 5.24, Traffic Sign Display - ICC5

Rain Light Sensor

This sensor is used to detect rain on the windshield
and determine day or night by the amount of ambient
light. The rain light sensor activates the windshield

5.19
 Driver Assistance Features

Electronic Stability Control throttle position, and brake application. A central mi-
crocomputer analyzes the collected data and triggers
(ESC) a response to keep the vehicle on course when an
unstable condition is detected.
WARNING When the system detects that the vehicle is at risk of
oversteering or understeering, it applies individual
Electronic Stability Control is intended only as an tractor wheel end brakes and trailer brakes, activates
aid for a conscientious and alert driver. Carefully the engine retarder (if equipped), and/or decreases
read the information in this manual to understand engine power, depending on the severity. As a result,
this system and its limitations. ESC is not a sub- the driver has full control over the vehicle until the
stitute for safe driving procedures. Failure to system detects a potential risk and intervenes ac-
drive safely, and use the system properly, could cordingly. ESC operates automatically; the driver
result in personal injury and/or death and prop- does not monitor or activate the system.
erty damage.
The dash indicator light illuminates whenever the
An amber-colored dash indicator light, shown in electronic stability control system intervenes.
Fig. 5.26, indicates that the vehicle is equipped with
electronic stability system components.
OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision
Mitigation System
WABCO OnGuardACTIVE CMS is a forward-looking
radar-based safety system. The system includes for-
ward collision warning, adaptive cruise control (ACC),
and collision mitigation.
OnGuard equipped vehicles have antilock brakes
(ABS) and automatic traction control (ATC), and ei-
06/16/2016 f611337a
ther roll stability control (RSC) or electronic stability
control (ESC). These systems work together to en-
Fig. 5.26, ATC/Stability Indicator Lamp hance control of the vehicle. Depending on the situa-
tion, any of these features may apply throttle control,
The roll stability system uses a lateral-acceleration engine brakes, and/or service brakes, as needed.
sensor that monitors rollover risk. Shortly after a
The front-looking antenna assembly transmits radar
curve, lane change, or other driving maneuver that
signals to, and receives them back from, objects
results in a rollover-risk detection, a dash warning
ahead of the vehicle. To be detected, vehicles must
light illuminates. The purpose is to advise the driver
be within the radar field of view and provide a sur-
that the previous maneuver produced a rollover risk.
face area that can reflect the radar. The distance,
The roll stability control system, within ESC, auto- speed, and angle of the vehicle ahead is calculated,
matically reduces engine power, applies the engine and the driver is warned of potentially dangerous
brake, and/or applies the tractor and trailer brakes situations. The system also warns of stationary ob-
when the acceleration sensor detects that the vehicle jects to alert the driver of potential obstructions
is at risk of rolling over. ahead in their lane.
ESC also has the capability of complete directional
stability (yaw control) in oversteer and understeer WARNING
conditions to reduce the likelihood of drift-out or jack-
knife. The system determines where the driver is at- The WABCO OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision Mitiga-
tempting to steer the vehicle and how much brake tion System is intended solely as an aid for an
demand is required in order to more precisely control alert and conscientious professional driver. It is
the vehicle in an emergency situation. not intended to be relied upon to operate a ve-
hicle. Use the system in conjunction with rear-
ESC works by constantly comparing the driver’s in- view mirrors and other instruments to safely op-
tention with the vehicle’s actual behavior. The system erate the vehicle. Operate a vehicle equipped
does this by monitoring systems such as wheel
speed, steering angle, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,

5.20
Driver Assistance Features

with OnGuardACTIVE in the same safe manner as 2

if the CMS were not present. 1
The OnGuardACTIVE Collision Safety System is
not a substitute for safe, normal driving proce-
dures, nor will it compensate for any driver im-
pairment such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop- 3
erly could result in personal injury and/or death
and severe property damage.

System Limitations
4
The OnGuardACTIVE Collision Mitigation System 02/17/2017 f611277
may provide little or no warning of hazards such as 1. Mode 3. Up
pedestrians, animals, oncoming vehicles, or cross 2. Day/Night Mode 4. Down
traffic.
Fig. 5.27, OnGuard Display Unit
The OnGuardACTIVE CMS only brakes for lead ve-
hicles located directly in front of your vehicle, and
does not operate when vehicle speed is less than 15
Collision Warning System (CWS)
mph (25 km/h). The CWS generates audible, visual, and vibrational
Due to these limitations, the system: alerts when the following distance may result in a
collision. The OnGuard display unit shows a graphic
• will not react and alert the operator to objects of the condition, enhanced by a screen color relevant
crossing in front of the vehicle or oncoming to the intensity of the situation. See Table 5.4.
traffic;
• should not be relied on to track lead vehicles OnGuard Display Screen Background Colors
when traveling through a severe curve in the Screen Color Description
road. Because of this, ACC is not recom- General operation; no lead vehicles
Blue
mended for use on winding roads; detected.
Green Lead vehicle detected.
• should not be relied upon to track narrow ob-
Following distance alert, accompanied
jects like motorcycles, mopeds, bicycles, or Yellow
by an audible alert.
pedestrians;
Collision warning, stationary object
• should not be relied on to alert drivers to ve- Red warning. Accompanied with audible
hicles in an adjacent lane. alert.
Amber Data Error
OnGuard Display Unit Table 5.4, OnGuard Display Screen Background
Colors
The OnGuardACTIVE CMS controls are located in
the display unit. The display provides visual and au-
dible warnings and messages, as well as verification If a potential collision is developing and the driver
of correct system operation and faults. Menu selec- does not take action to slow the vehicle, OnGuar-
tions are made by pressing the up and down arrows, dACTIVE’s active braking feature issues a short
and the MODE button. See Fig. 5.27. brake pulse and de-throttles the engine.
The display unit includes: If the driver does not take the appropriate action and
a potential collision still exists, OnGuardACTIVE re-
• an internal speaker duces the engine torque and applies the engine and
• a graphic display service brakes to slow the vehicle.

• buttons to scroll and select options The active braking application is intended only to
provide early braking; the driver is still required to
• day/night display mode (second-generation recognize and react to all driving situations.
only)

5.21
 Driver Assistance Features

If OnGuardACTIVE detects a stationary object (such

as a disabled car), it will provide an audible alert fol-
lowed by a vibrational alert and then brake to reduce 230FT
the vehicle’s speed.
Again, the active braking application is intended only
to provide early braking; the driver is still required to
recognize and react to all driving situations.
IMPORTANT: the collision mitigation system CMS 55 MPH
(CMS) and active braking are not operational at
vehicle speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h). 12/18/2014 f611143b

The collision warning system (CWS) cannot be dis- Fig. 5.29, CMS Lead Vehicle Detected (green)
engaged or turned off, and is always active at vehicle
speeds above 15 mph (25 km/h).

Standby 15 FT
When no lead vehicle is detected, the display shows
that the CMS is on and the radar is searching. See
Fig. 5.28.

CMS 15 MPH
12/18/2014 f611144a

Fig. 5.30, CMS Collision Warning (red)

CMS
12/18/2014 f611143c
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Fig. 5.28, CMS Standby (blue)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) works in conjunction
A Vehicle is Detected with conventional cruise control to maintain a mini-
mum following distance when a lead vehicle is being
When a lead vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, tracked. The minimum following distance is main-
the display shows that the CMS is on and the radar tained by automatically decelerating the vehicle using
is tracking a lead vehicle at the speed shown. See accelerator pedal, engine, and service brakes without
Fig. 5.29. driver intervention.
If the following distance between the vehicle and the When the lead vehicle is no longer being tracked, the
lead vehicle is too close, the CMS will emit an au- set cruise control speed resumes automatically.
dible alert and the display background will turn yel- Vehicles equipped with the WABCO OnGuard CMS
low. The alert will end when the vehicle speed drops and Cummins engines come standard with Adaptive
below the lead vehicle speed and the following dis- Cruise Control (ACC) and Adaptive Cruise Control
tance is increased. Recovery enabled.
Collision Warning If ACC is not available, the cancel button must be
used to engage standard cruise control.
When a lead vehicle is detected traveling slower than
your vehicle, or the gap between them becomes too To obtain cruise control when the adaptive cruise
close, the CMS warns of an impending collision by control function has been interrupted, press the
emitting an urgent audible alert and displaying the pause button 2 times (ON-OFF-ON-OFF) and then
collision warning symbol with a red background. See press the set button once.
Fig. 5.30. A Set or Resume command on the Set, Resume but-
tons will now engage the standard cruise control fea-
tures.

5.22
Driver Assistance Features

Standby
15 FT
When no lead vehicle is detected, OnGuard ACC
operates similarly to conventional cruise control. The
cruise control set speed is shown on the OnGuard
display unit. See Fig. 5.31.
15 MPH
Set: 60 MPH
02/17/2017 f611147

Fig. 5.33, ACC Collision Warning (red)

brake pulse to warn of an imminent collision. The

Set: 60 MPH driver must also initiate braking.
02/17/2017 f611145 If OnGuardACTIVE detects a stationary object (such
as a disabled car), it will sound an urgent audible
Fig. 5.31, ACC Standby (blue) alert, then a brake pulse, then apply the vehicle’s
brakes to reduce the vehicle’s speed. The driver
Lead Vehicle Detected must also initiate braking.
When a lead vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,
the display shows that ACC is on and the radar is Error Screens
tracking it. See Fig. 5.32.
IMPORTANT: The OnGuard collision mitigation
system is not operational when an error screen
230 FT is displayed. If a fault occurs or OnGuard fails to
properly track a vehicle, take the vehicle in for
service as soon as possible. Standard cruise
control will not function with an active OnGuard
system fault.
Set: 60 MPH 55 MPH If a system fault is detected, the OnGuard display
02/17/2017 f611146
unit will immediately display an error screen as
Fig. 5.32, ACC Lead Vehicle Detected (green) shown in Fig. 5.34. The first error code transmitted
will be displayed first; additional faults (if any) can be
If the driver uses the accelerator pedal to override viewed using the up or down buttons. The display
the cruise control and approach a vehicle too closely, does not show stored fault codes.
the ACC will emit an audible alert and the display
background will turn yellow. The alert will end when
vehicle speed drops below the lead vehicle’s speed DATA ERROR
and the following distance is increased.
NOTE: The following distance alert does not
ACC1 Link Error
operate at speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h) or
above 77 mph (124 km/h).
Collision Warning 02/17/2017 f611148

If the lead vehicle is traveling slower than the driver’s Fig. 5.34, OnGuard Error Screen (amber)
vehicle, the CMS warns of an impending collision by
emitting an urgent audible alert and displaying the Refer to the OnGuard™ and OnGuardActive™ Colli-
collision warning symbol with a red background. See sion Mitigation Systems Maintenance Manual for a
Fig. 5.33. full list of error screens and messages. (www.meri-
torwabco.com).
If the system determines a rear end collision is immi-
nent, it will automatically apply the brakes to reduce
the vehicle’s speed. The driver may also feel a short

5.23
 Driver Assistance Features

Additional Features • accelerator pedal position

Press the MODE button to access the OnGuard dis- • driveline engaged
play unit additional features from the CMS or ACC • cruise control enable
main operating screen. Press the up and down ar-
rows to scroll through each menu, then press the • cruise control set speed switch
MODE button to select the value to be changed. In • cruise control coast switch
edit mode, press the up or down arrows to change a
value setting, then press the MODE button to save • cruise control resume switch
the setting. Pressing MODE in each feature screen • cruise control accelerate switch
advances the display to the next feature.
• cruise control pause switch
The Display Control menu allows adjustment of the
alarm volume, LCD brightness, LCD contrast, and
U.S./metric unit conversion. See Fig. 5.35. Zonar® 2020 Tablet
The Zonar 2020 on-board tablet is an optional fea-
DISPLAY CONTROL ture that tracks hours of service, posts driver alerts,
documents pre- and post-trip vehicle inspections, and
Alarm Volume 10 provides advanced navigation. See Fig. 5.37.

Alarm Tone 4
LCD Intensity 9
02/17/2017 f611149

Fig. 5.35, Display Control Menu

The component test menu provides verification of

system component operation and acts as a valuable
OnGuard system diagnostic tool. The header will dis-
play either COMPONENT TEST or ACC FUNCTION,
depending on the software release version of the On-
Guard system. The component test screen shown in
Fig. 5.36 provides access to the following compo-
nents (press the up or down arrows to scroll through 11/19/2014 f546116
the menu):
• brake pedal position Fig. 5.37, Detroit Connect Tablet

The tablet operates in conjunction with the connectiv-

COMPONENT TEST ity onboard platform to provide communication be-
tween drivers and fleet managers.
Brake Pedal Position 37% Refer to Zonar user documentation for more informa-
tion.
EBS Brake Switch ON
CCVS Brake Switch ON Touch Screen Operation
02/17/2017 f611151
Tapping
Fig. 5.36, Component Test Menu IMPORTANT: All keyboard entries are locked
• EBS brake switch
when the parking brake is disengaged. Other
touch screen options still function.
• CCVS brake switch
Tap the touch screen to:
• clutch switch
• Select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol
• park brake switch or an entry.

5.24
Driver Assistance Features

• Increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation
one finger. permits. Otherwise, stop the vehicle while paying at-
tention to road and traffic conditions and operate the
• Reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.
equipment while the vehicle is stationary.
• Enter characters with the keyboard: tap on a The driver must observe the legal requirements of
button. the country when operating the system.
Single-Finger Swipe The navigation system calculates the route to the
destination without taking some of the below condi-
Use a single-finger swipe to: tions into account:
• Navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or • Traffic lights
right.
• Stop signs and right-of-way signs
• Move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
• Parking lot and stopping restrictions
Two-Finger Swipe • Road narrowing
Use a two-finger swipe to: • Other road, traffic controls, and regulations
• Zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers The navigation system may provide incorrect naviga-
together or apart. tion announcements if the surroundings do not corre-
spond to the data on the digital map, for example: a
• Turn the map: turn counterclockwise or clock- route may have been diverted or the direction of a
wise using two fingers. one-way street may have changed.
Touching, Holding and Moving General information
Touch, hold, and move the finger to: The navigation system calculates the route to the
• Move the map: touch the touchscreen and destination and provides navigation announcements.
move the finger in any direction.
• Set the volume on a scale: touch the touch-
Global Positioning System (GPS)
screen and move the finger to the left or right. Reception
Position finding and route guidance take place using
Touching and Holding the Global Positioning System (GPS). Correct func-
Touch and hold to: tioning of the navigation system depends, among
other things, on GPS reception. In certain situations,
• Call up a global menu in the applications: GPS reception may be impaired due to interference
touch the touchscreen and hold until the OP- or there may be no reception at all, for example in
TIONS menu appears. some places like tunnels or multistory parking lots.

Navigation Navigation Menu and Settings

Safety Information Open Navigation and Select ····Menu. See Fig. 5.38
for a map and see Fig. 5.39 for the navigation menu.
WARNING NOTE: The route view appears on the screen
as soon as the vehicle is moving.
There is a risk of distraction from operating inte- The basic navigation map shows the current vehi-
grated communication equipment while the ve- cle’s location, presents a navigation address entry
hicle is in motion. bar, and a ····Menu button. A known destination ad-
The driver can be distracted from the traffic situation dress may be entered here or the ····Menu button
if operating communication equipment integrated in selected.
the vehicle when driving, possibly causing loss of
control of the vehicle.

5.25
 Driver Assistance Features

Creating a Vehicle Profile

2 3

08/02/2019 f611559 07/30/2019 f611772

1. ····Menu 3. Current Location
2. Address Input Line Fig. 5.40, My Vehicle Profile Screen - ICC5

Fig. 5.38, Pre-Trip Planning Navigation Map - ICC5 Whenever possible, the vehicle profile will be taken
into account during route calculation. When a chosen
destination is not reachable via a route that takes
7
3 4 5 your vehicle profile into account, the system will in-
1 2 6 form you that the route is calculated based on differ-
8
ent vehicle profile.
Depending on local conditions, the navigation system
may not always be able to include all selected set-
9 tings for route calculation, avoiding toll roads for ex-
14 13 12 11 10
16 ample.
15 1. Select ····Menu.
08/14/2019 f611560a
2. Select Settings.
1. Search for Address or
POI 3. Select My Vehicle.
2. Drive Home
4. Select Vehicle type. A list of possible types of
3. Drive to Work
vehicle appears.
4. Drive to Recent Destination
5. Change Current Route • Select a vehicle type from the list then
6. Display Saved Locations press the back arrow in the upper left cor-
7. Live Traffic On** ner of the screen. The current settings of
the type of vehicle appears.
8. Display Saved Routes
9. Edit ····Menu • If needed, select the values and adjust
10. System Information them to match the actual vehicle.
11. Settings • If you are transporting hazardous materi-
12. Record Current Route als, add these to your vehicle profile.
13. Display Gas Stations
14. Display Parking Lots Adding Hazardous Dangerous Goods to
15. Voice On/Off
16. Night Mode On/Off the Vehicle Profile
** An X appears on the bottom right of this icon when
Hazardous materials includes, in part, explosives,
the vehicle can’t connect to the traffic system.
gases, flammable liquids, flammable solids, oxidizers
Fig. 5.39, Navigation Menu Icons - ICC5 and organic peroxides, toxic and infectious sub-
stances, radioactive substances, and corrosive sub-
The ····Menu button will bring up the first of three stances.
screen of Navigation Menu Icons. Access the Set-
tings menu to create a vehicle profile. NOTE: The value 0 equals No Hazardous Mate-
rials and causes the system not to check for
route restrictions.

5.26
Driver Assistance Features

1. Select My Vehicle Adjusting Route Information on the Route

2. Select HAZMAT. A list of possible dangerous Bar
goods settings appears. The driver can set the route information to display on
3. Select a class or classes of hazardous material the route bar, such as gas stations, parking lots, rest
by sliding the radio button to the right. The active areas, toll zones, and ferries.
radio button(s) will be highlighted in color. 1. Select ····Menu.
4. Press the back arrow next to the Setup Hazard- 2. Select Settings.
ous Materials title on the screen. Check that the
appropriate hazardous material icons have ap- 3. Select Appearance.
peared on the My Vehicle screen. 4. Select Route bar.
Adjusting the Display 5. Select Route information.
Turning On Automatic Switching to Night 6. Select desired setting(s); active settings are high-
View lighted in color.

NOTE: Night View can be turned on or off by Displaying the Time

pressing the Night View icon located at the bot- When this function is active, the current time appears
tom right of the ····Menu screens. at the bottom of the route bar.
When the setting is active, the display automatically 1. Select ····Menu.
switches to night view when dark.
2. Select Settings.
1. Select ····Menu.
3. Select Appearance.
2. Select Settings.
4. Select Route bar.
3. Select Appearance.
5. Select or Deselect Show Current Time. If Show
4. Select Display. Current Time is on, the option is highlighted in
5. Select Switch To Night Colors When Dark. The color.
radio button is highlighted in color when the set-
ting is active. Displaying a Wider Route Bar
NOTE: Both map and route bar views can be
Adjusting Arrival Information on the Route enlarged to show more detail or zoomed out on
Bar to show less by using a two-finger swipe.
The driver can set the type of arrival information to
When Show Wide Route Bar If Possible is on, a
display on the route bar and whether the information
wider route bar appears. The wider route bar con-
is displayed for the final destination or for the next
tains additional route information, e.g. journey time
intermediate destination.
and distance from a traffic jam.
1. Select ····Menu.
1. Select ····Menu.
2. Select Settings.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Appearance.
3. Select Appearance.
4. Select Route bar.
4. Select Route Bar.
5. Select Arrival information.
5. Select Show Wide Route Bar If Possible. If Show
6. Select a setting; the active setting is indicated by Wide Route Bar If Possible is on, the option is
a dot highlighted in color. highlighted in color.

Adjusting the Route View

The following settings are available for adjusting the
route view:

5.27
 Driver Assistance Features

• Display current street names: when this setting The default short voice list includes the following
is active, the name of the road the driver is English and Spanish variations: New Zealand Eng-
currently driving on appears on the route bar. lish, Irish English, Australian English, United States
English, British English, Spanish, and Mexican Span-
• Route display style: set whether the route view
ish.
is displayed in 2D (in direction of travel) or 3D.
The system also includes voices speaking the
1. Select ····Menu.
world’s major languages outside of English and
2. Select Settings. Spanish. They can be accessed by selected the All
Voices button in the bottom right of the Choose a
3. Select Appearance. Voice screen.
4. Select Guidance view. 1. Select ····Menu.
5. Select if the current street name should be dis- 2. Select Settings.
played. If this setting is on, the radio button will
be highlighted in color. 3. Select Voices.
6. Select your guidance view style: 3D or 2D (in 4. Select Choose a voice.
direction of travel). The selected mode will be 5. Select a voice with the desired language and
highlighted in color. accent; the active setting is indicated by a col-
ored dot.
Adjusting the Automatic Zoom
The following settings are available for Automatic Voice Instruction Settings
Zoom:
Two instruction settings are available under the
• Zoom In To Next Turn. When this setting is ac- Voices menu: Read Arrival Time Out Loud and Read
tive, all turns and intersections on the route will Early Instructions Out Loud.
be zoomed in on along the route.
When Read Arrival Time Out Loud is active, the pro-
• Based On Road Type. When this setting is ac- jected arrival time is read by the selected voice.
tive, all turns and intersections on the route When Read Early Instructions Out Loud is active,
may or may not be zoomed in on, depending instructions to exit or turn are given in advance such
on the type of street. as "Ahead, turn left," and "After one mile take the
• None. When this setting is active, turns and right exit."
intersections are not zoomed in on. 1. Select Settings.
1. Select ····Menu. 2. Select Voices.
2. Select Settings. 3. Select Choose a voice.
3. Select Appearance. 4. Select if you would like either or both of the
4. Select Automatic Zoom. vocal instruction settings turned on; an active
setting is indicated by a radio switch highlighted
5. Select a zoom option. The active setting will be in color.
highlighted in color.
Setting the Route Planning Type and
Selecting a Voice for Spoken Messages Method
NOTE: If you choose a voice incompatible with The following settings are available under route plan-
the units of measurement selected, the system ning type:
will ask you to verify your choice. In addition, • Fastest Route. The navigation calculates a
certain voices may be unable to read warnings route with the shortest possible journey time.
out loud, in which case the option to turn on that
• Shortest Route. The navigation calculates a
feature will be disabled until you select a com-
route with the shortest possible distance.
patible voice.
The following settings are available for choosing a
faster route when travel is underway:

5.28
Driver Assistance Features

• Always Take the Fastest Route. When a faster • Sounds. When this setting is active, only warn-
route is available, navigation automatically re- ing sounds are issued during the journey.
calculates the route.
• Visual Only. When this setting is active, no
• Ask Me So That I Can Choose. When a faster spoken warnings or warning sounds are issued
route is available, navigation asks whether the during the journey.
faster route should be used.
1. Select ····Menu.
• Don’t Ask Me. The navigation system does not
2. Select Settings.
look for faster routes.
3. Select Sounds & Warnings.
1. Select ····Menu.
4. Select Warning Type.
2. Select Settings.
5. Select the desired warning type; the active set-
3. Select Route Planning.
ting is indicated by a colored dot.
4. Select a route planning method; the active set-
ting is indicated by a colored dot. Settings for Spoken Warnings
5. Select a route planning type (fastest or shortest). The navigation system can issue vocal warnings
The active choice is highlighted in color. about traffic jams and other traffic issues as well as
say when the vehicle has exceeded the speed limit.
Route Options, Avoiding Areas 1. Select ····Menu.
Avoiding Ferries, Toll Roads, Carpool 2. Select Settings.
Lanes, Unpaved Roads, and Tunnels
3. Select Sounds & Warnings.
1. Select ····Menu.
4. Swipe down to the bottom of the page. The fol-
2. Select Settings. lowing options are listed: Traffic Jam Ahead,
3. Select Route Planning. When Speeding, and Read Traffic Warnings Out
Loud. Move the radio button to the right for those
4. Swipe down to select the Avoid On Every Route warnings you want read aloud. An active choice
option. will have the radio button highlighted in color.
5. Select what features to avoid. The radio button is
highlighted in color when a feature is selected. Setting the Units
Unit settings include: Kilometers (km), miles & yards
NOTE: These route options are not available in (mi/yd), miles & feet (mi/ft), and automatic.
every country. Also, the selected route options
cannot always be taken into account. Therefore, 1. Select ····Menu.
a route may include a ferry, for instance, even 2. Select Settings.
though the avoid ferries option is active.
3. swipe Select Units.
Sounds and Warnings 4. Select the desired units; the active setting is indi-
Some voices are not compatible with reading cated by a dot highlighted in color.
warnings out loud. If this if the case with the Reordering Menu Options
selected voice, notification will appear on the
screen and the option to have warnings read The top level menu options—My Places, My Routes,
out loud will not be available until you choose a Parking Lot, Gas Station, Report Safety Camera,
different compatible voice. Start Recording, and Settings—can be reordered to
move the most used options to the first screen.
The following settings are available to choose warn-
ing types: Reordering the Menu
• Read Out Loud. When this setting is active, 1. Swipe right until you reach the end of the icon
spoken warnings and warning sounds are is- list.
sued during the journey.

5.29
 Driver Assistance Features

2. Select the pencil icon. Each menu item with its

1 2 3 4 5 6
corresponding icon will now outlined as if they
have been turned into illustrations on a playing
card.
3. Select the menu item and icon you want to
move. It will be highlighted in color and two ar-
rows will appear at the bottom.
4. Press either the right or left arrow to move the
card over to the left or right until it’s in the de-
sired position.
5. If desired, select and move other cards.
6. Press the Done button when finished. 8 7
08/05/2019 f611562
Navigation Menu 1. Address Input Line
FIGURE: results of entering name on address bar: 4 2. Address Results List
callouts: POI category list, entry bar, address list, 3. POI Results List
POI list 4. Scroll Bar
5. Selected Search Area
Destination Entry 6. Switch to Map or Route View (Cancel Search)
7. Keyboard
NOTE: All the keyboard entries are locked when the
parking brake is disengaged. 8. Switch Between List (Lines) and Map (Circles) View

Enter a destination into the navigation system using Fig. 5.41, Entering a Destination - ICC5
the following options:
5. Select Drive.
• Enter a named location.
6. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
• Enter a street address on the search line at the appears; verify the information by selecting the
top of the map. arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
the information and then select the arrow at the
• Enter the longitude and latitude.
bottom right to verify it.
• Enter map codes.
7. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.
• Zoom in on the map to find the desired loca-
tion and press and hold to select. Selecting a Destination From Points of
Interest (POI)
Results matching the characters entered using
the keyboard will appear on the address results 1. Select ····Menu.
list and the Point of Interest (POI) categories or 2. Select Search option for input menu.
POI results list.
3. Enter a saved POI such as Home or a type of
Selecting a Destination From the POI such as Gas Station or Zoo.
Address 4. Select POI or a POI type from the results list; the
NOTE: The farther away the destination is from destination appears.
the current vehicle position, the longer it will 5. Select Drive.
take for the route to be calculated. 6. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
1. Open the navigation system. appears; verify the information by selecting the
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
2. Tap next to the magnifying glass Search icon. the information and then select the arrow at the
3. Enter the desired address, see Fig. 5.41. bottom right to verify it.
4. Select the desired location from the results lists. 7. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.

5.30
Driver Assistance Features

4 5
Selecting a Destination from Geo-
Coordinates
3
1. Open the navigation system.
2
2. Either select the search bar at the top of the map
or select the Search option under ····Menu.
1 3. Select the button to the right of the search input
line to define the search area.
4. Select Latitude Longitude. An input menu ap-
08/05/2019 f611775
pears.
1. Map View 4. POI Category List
2. Address Results 5. POI List 5. Enter the geo-coordinates. The results appear in
3. Address Input Line the results list.

Fig. 5.42, POI Results Lists - ICC5 6. Select a destination from the results list; a menu
appears.
Selecting a Destination From the Recent 7. Select Drive.
Destinations
8. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
1. Select ····Menu. appears; verify the information by selecting the
2. Select Recent Destinations to display a list of arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
previous destinations. the information and then select the arrow at the
bottom right to verify it.
3. Select a destination from the list.
9. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.
4. Select Drive.
Selecting a Destination from a Map Code
5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
appears; verify the information by selecting the 1. Open the navigation system.
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
2. Select the search bar at the top of the map.
the information and then select the arrow at the
Make sure the correct search area is defined for
bottom right to verify it.
your map code.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.
3. Enter a map code; the results are displayed in
Selecting a Destination on the Map the results list.
4. Select a destination from the results list; a menu
1. Open the navigation system.
appears.
2. Search for a destination on the map by swiping
5. Select Drive.
and zooming.
6. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
3. Select the destination on the map by pressing
and holding. The address nearest to the selected appears; verify the information by selecting the
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
point appears.
the information and then select the arrow at the
4. Select Drive. bottom right to verify it.
5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen 7. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.
appears; verify the information by selecting the
The following are the examples of map code entries:
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
the information and then select the arrow at the • Edinburgh Castle, international map code -
bottom right to verify it. WH6SL. TR10
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance. • Edinburgh Castle, country specific map code -
GBR 8MH.51

5.31
 Driver Assistance Features

• The Field Museum of Natural History, country

specific map code - T821.1BFF
• The Field Museum of Natural History, state
specific map code - WM.GO (Must have Illinois
selected as search area for this code to re-
solve correctly.)
• The Field Museum of Natural History, alterna-
tives - SY.FRQ or 9Q9.VOP
08/01/2019 f611773
Selecting a Destination from Saved
Destinations Fig. 5.43, Parking Lots Displayed - ICC5

1. Select ····Menu. 2. Select Parking Lot.

2. Select My Places a list of saved destinations ap- 2.1 If a route is active, the map appears with
pears. parking lots near the destination.
3. Select a destination from the list; the destination 2.2 If a route is not active, the map appears
appears on the map. with parking lots near the current vehicle
location.
4. Select Drive.
3. Select a parking lot area; the name of the park-
5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen ing lot area appears on the map.
appears; verify the information by selecting the
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update 4. Select Drive to recalculate the route to end at the
the information and then select the arrow at the chosen parking lot; the route to the destination
bottom right to verify it. appears.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start route guidance. 5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
appears; verify the information by selecting the
Selecting a Destination from Saved arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
Routes the information and then select the arrow at the
bottom right to verify it.
1. Select ····Menu.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start the navigation guid-
2. Select My Routes. If you have saved routes, a ance.
list of saved routes appears.
3. Select a route from the list. Searching for Gas Stations
4. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
appears; verify the information by selecting the
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
the information and then select the arrow at the
bottom right to verify it.
5. The route appears on the map. Select Drive to
calculate the route.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.

Searching for a Parking Lot Area 08/01/2019 f611774

NOTE: Navigation shows gas stations, parking Fig. 5.44, Gas Stations Displayed - ICC5
lots, and other locations that may not be suit-
able for your vehicle’s size and weight. Use NOTE: Navigation shows gas stations, parking
caution when selecting locations and routes. lots, and other locations that may not be suit-
able for your vehicle’s size and weight. Use
1. Select ····Menu. caution when selecting locations and routes.

5.32
Driver Assistance Features

1. Select ····Menu. Saving an Address as Home

2. Select Gas station. Saving a second location and calling it Home
2.1 When the route is active, the map appears will replace the original Home location with the
with gas stations along the route. second location address.
2.2 When the route is not active, gas stations 1. Select ····Menu.
appear on the map near the current ve- 2. Select My Places.
hicle location.
3. Select Add Home if no home address has been
3. Select a gas station; the name of the gas station
saved; if a home address has been saved, follow
appears on the map.
the directions above for Saving a Destination
4. Select Drive. Under My Places to add a second home ad-
dress. In either case, the map with the search
5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen bar appears.
appears; verify the information by selecting the
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update 4. Select home on the map or select Search and
the information and then select the arrow at the enter an address.
bottom right to verify it. 5. Select Set if choosing a point on the map; select
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start the navigation guid- from the results list if an address was entered
ance. then select Set Home Location.
NOTE: Home is marked with a house symbol on
Saving a Destination the list and on the map.
My Places 6. The home appears on the map and is saved as
In addition to saved destinations, My Places contains Home.
the following information:
Saving an Address as a Workplace
• Home
Saving a second location and calling it Work will
• Recent destinations
replace the original work location with the sec-
• Work ond location address.
• Marked locations 1. Select ····Menu.

Saving a Destination Under My Places 2. Select My Places.

1. Select ····Menu. 3. Select Add Work. The map appears.

2. Select My Places. 4. Select the workplace on the map or select

Search and enter an address.
3. Select Add.
5. Select Set if choosing a point on the map; select
4. Select a destination on the map or select Search from the results list if an address was entered,
and put in an address. then select Set Work Location.
5. Select from the results list; the destination ap- 6. The workplace appears on the map and is saved
pears on the map. as Work.
6. Select Add to My Places to save the destination.
Deleting a Destination
7. Give the destination a unique name or keep it as
an address. Select the blue check mark to save Deleting a Destination from the List of
the destination. Recent Destinations
8. The destination is saved under My Places and 1. Select ····Menu.
marked with a star on the map. 2. Select My Places.
3. Select Recent Destinations.

5.33
 Driver Assistance Features

4. Select Edit List. 4. Select Use as a Starting Point. The location ap-
pears on the map.
5. Select a destination; a minus sign appears next
to the destination. Specifying a Destination
6. Select Delete. The destination is deleted from 1. Open the navigation system.
the list of recent destinations.
2. Press and hold a fingertip on an area of the
NOTE: You can delete multiple destinations at map, or enter an address and select from the
the same time. results lists.
Planning a Route 3. Select Drive.

Specifying a Starting Point 4. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen

appears; verify the information by selecting the
NOTE: For accurate results when selecting an arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
address from the map, zoom in. the information and then select the arrow at the
bottom right to verify it.
5. The route is calculated and appears on the map.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start the navigation guid-
ance.

Select the Current Position as the

Starting Point in the Middle of a Route
1 1. Select the starting point of the route.
2. Select the circle with the three vertical dots next
08/05/2019 f611561
to the address name to access the submenu.
1. Navigation Submenu Icon 3. Select Remove Starting Point. The route is recal-
culated with the current vehicle position as the
Fig. 5.45, Navigation Submenu - ICC5 starting point.
1. Open the navigation system.
Specify an Intermediate Destination
2. Press and hold a fingertip on an area of the Using the Route Map
map, or enter an address and select from the
results lists. Add to Current Route adds an address to the
route. Search Near Here accesses the point of
3. Select the circle with the three vertical dots next interest (POI) menu.
to the address name to access the submenu.
1. Create a route map to the final destination.
2. Zoom in on that part of the route that contains
the intermediate destination.
3. Press and hold a fingertip on the intermediate
destination on the map.
4. An address will appear. Select the circle with
three vertical dots to access the submenu.
Choose Add to Currrent Route or continue
searching by choosing Search Near Here.
08/05/2019 f611776 4.1 Choose the icon for a POI (a meal, a gas
station) and select from the list of options.
Fig. 5.46, Navigation Submenu Displayed - ICC5

5.34
Driver Assistance Features

4.2 The address appears. Select the circle 4. Select a route; a minus sign appears next to the
with the three vertical dots next to the ad- route.
dress name to access the submenu and
5. Select Delete the route is deleted.
add the location to the route
5. When all intermediate destinations are added to NOTE: you can delete more than one saved
the route, select Drive. The route is calculated. route at a time.
6. Select Let’s Go··· Current Route
Saving a Route Cancelling the Active Route
Saving the Current Route NOTE: To exit the active route screen, select
the arrow with the line through it.
1. Select ····. or ····Menu.
1. Select ····. or ····Menu.
2. Select Current Route.
2. Select Current Route.
3. Select Add to My Routes. An input menu ap-
pears. 3. Select Clear Route. The active route is deleted
and the map view appears.
4. Change the name of the route if desired.
5. Select the blue checkmark to save the route; the Changing the Route Options
route is saved under My Routes. Changing the Order of Intermediate
Destinations
Saving Changes to a Route
1. Open the saved route with intermediate destina-
Options under Current Route include Skip Next Stop,
tions.
Find Alternative, Avoid Blocked Road, Avoid Toll
Roads and More, Show Instructions, Add Stop to 2. Select ····. or ····Menu.
Route, Add to My Routes and Change Route Type.
3. Select Current Route.
1. Create a route.
4. Select Reorder Stops; the starting point, destina-
2. Select ····. or ····Menu. tion and all intermediate destinations appear on
the map.
3. Select Current Route.
5. Select the starting point.
4. Select the desired type of change to the route.
6. Select the intermediate destinations one by one
Deleting Intermediate Destinations in the desired order; flags appear at the interme-
diate destinations.
1. Select the route map view. Zoom in on the inter-
mediate destination to be deleted. 7. Select the destination last; the new route is cal-
culated.
2. Select the intermediate destination to be deleted.
3. Select the circle with the three vertical dots next Displaying Alternative Routes
to the address name to access the submenu. 1. Create a route.
4. Select Delete This Stop. The route is recalcu- 2. Select ····. or ····Menu.
lated without the intermediate destination.
3. Select Current Route.
Deleting a Saved Route
4. Select Find Alternative. A maximum of three al-
1. Select ····. or ····Menu. ternative routes appear on the map. The differ-
ence between the driving time or distance com-
2. Select My Routes. The list of saved routes ap-
pared to the original route is displayed for each
pears.
route.
3. Select Edit List.

5.35
 Driver Assistance Features

5. Select an alternative route by selecting the route • The name of the road you are currently driving
shown on the map or selecting the icon display- on is displayed.
ing the difference in driving time or distance.
• The road number of the road you are currently
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance. driving on is displayed.
The route view appears.
Driving to the Starting Point of a Route
Avoiding Closed Roads
The driver can use this function to drive from the cur-
1. Create a route. rent vehicle position to the starting point of a saved
route. The starting point is changed to an intermedi-
2. Select ····. for ····Menu.
ate destination.
3. Select Current Route. 1. Select ····. for ····Menu.
4. Select Avoid Blocked Road. If an alternative 2. Select Current Route.
route excluding the closed road is available, the
alternative route appears on the map. The differ- 3. Select Drive to Route.
ence between the driving time or distance com-
4. Select Let’s Go··· Route navigation begins.
pared to the original route is displayed for the
route.
Current Route
5. To select the alternative route select the route Changing the Route Planning Type.
shown on the map or select the icon displaying
the difference in driving time or distance. Route types consist of Fastest and Shortest.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start route guidance. The 1. Create or open a route.
route view appears. 2. Select ····. for ····Menu.
Displaying Navigation Instructions 3. Select Current Route.
1. Create a route. 4. Select Change Route Type.
2. Select ····. or ····Menu. 5. Select a route type: fastest route or shortest
route. The route is recalculated with the selected
3. Select Current Route. route type.
4. Select Show Instructions. A list of directions is
shown starting with the current location. Avoiding Toll Roads and More Along the
Current Route
NOTE: If there are no toll roads or other fea-
tures (unpaved roads, carpool lanes) along the
calculated route, these options will not be avail-
able to be selected.
1. Create or open a route.
2. Select ····. for ····Menu.
3. Select Current Route.
08/05/2019 f611777 4. Select Avoid Toll Roads and More. The menu of
features to avoid opens.
Fig. 5.47, Navigation Instructions - ICC5
5. Select an option or options to avoid. Then select
The current vehicle position is shown OK. The main navigation screen willl load.
with the following information:
• The symbol for the current vehicle position is
displayed.

5.36
Driver Assistance Features

During Route Guidance Overview of the Complete Route and

Route Bar
Route Restrictions
When the vehicle type is set to Bus or Truck in the
vehicle profile, route restrictions will be displayed in
the route view during the journey. Streets with re-
1 4
stricted access are marked in color on the route 3
2
view. Streets with restricted access on the route ap-
pear as a dotted line on the map.
5
NOTE: Observe all the traffic signs at all times. 6
Pay particular attention to signs with restrictions
that refer to the dimensions and weight of the
vehicle. 08/06/2019 f611564
1. 2D to 3D View Switch
Route Overview 2. Distance to Change of Direction
When a route has been calculated, the complete 3. Next Road Name
route appears on the map. 4. Route Overview
5. Current Vehicle Position
1 2 3 4 6. ....Menu
Fig. 5.49, Overview of 3D Display- ICC5

When the vehicle is moving, the 3D display will show

the vehicle’s speed and the name of the road the
12 vehicle is currently on at the bottom of the screen.
11 Touching the vehicle icon will bring up a menu that
allows for reporting of a blocked road or a safety
camera.
The wide progress bar shows a simplified view of the
vehicle’s current location on the route.
10 9 8 7 6 5 The progress bar can also show intermediate desti-
08/05/2019 f611778
nations and traffic messages on the route. Only the
next 31 miles (50 km) will be displayed. For stretches
1. Vehicle longer than 31 miles (50 km), the progress bar can
2. Planned Route be moved by swiping up or down.
3. Saved Location
4. Route Bar The progress bar can be zoomed in on by selecting
5. Cancel Route
any of the route features, e.g. gas stations, traffic
delays.
6. Slow Traffic
7. Destination Overview of Lane Recommendations
8. Work
9. Home If the digital map contains the corresponding data,
10. ....Menu lane recommendations for upcoming changes of di-
11. Map Zoom rection can be displayed before freeway exits and in-
12. 2D to 3D Switch tersections.
Fig. 5.48, Route Overview - ICC5 Quick-Access
With quick access, you can mark the location, avoid
closed roads or display the current vehicle position

5.37
 Driver Assistance Features

1 2 3 Live Traffic Information is not available in all coun-

tries or regions. Further information can be found at
TomTom Traffic North America.

Activating Live Traffic Information

When first starting the navigation system, a popup
4 window will appear asking if Live Traffic Information
should be turned on. As soon as it is turned on the
5 traffic situation will be shown on the Navigation Map
and will be taken into account when the navigation
6 7 system is asked to calculate a route.
08/07/2019 f611565
Showing Traffic Information on the Map
1. Distance to
Destination
2. Arrival Time
3. Journey Time
4. Traffic Disruption
5. Gas Station
6. Route Bar
7. Distance to Next Destination/POI
Fig. 5.50, Example of a Wide Route Bar - ICC5

12/05/2018 f611566
08/07/2019 f611567
1. Recommended lane (marked with colored arrows)
2. Lane not recommended (grey) Fig. 5.52, Traffic Information Key - ICC5

Fig. 5.51, Lane Recommendation NOTE: The traffic disruption symbols display the
type of traffic disruption, length, and delay in
and the longitude and latitude. To open the quick ac-
minutes. The colors display the speed of the
cess menu, select the symbol for the current vehicle
position or the speed display. traffic in relation to the speed limit. Red indi-
cates stopped traffic, a mix of red and orange
Traffic indicates backed-up traffic, and mix of yellow
and orange indicates slow traffic. Red and white
Live Traffic Information indicates a closed road.
Live Traffic Information is a subscription service
which shows real-time traffic information. This service To Display Information About the Traffic
is available free of charge for three years upon acti- Disruption;
vation of Live Traffic Information. Subsequently, the Select the traffic disruption on the map or route bar.
service may be extended for a fee.

5.38
Driver Assistance Features

The following information about the traffic disruption

is displayed:
• Type of traffic disruption, e.g. accident
• Severity of the traffic disruption: slow, heavily
congested or stopped traffic
• Length of the traffic disruption
• Duration of delay
The system will also give the option of Avoid to recal-
culate the route to avoid the delay.
1. Select Avoid. An alternative route is calculated.
2. Select the new route on the map on by selecting
the button showing the change in distance or
time.
3. The route on the map and the bar update. Let’s
Go··· appears.

5.39
 6
Climate Controls
Cab Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Sleeper Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Accessory Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Battery-Powered HVAC System (BPHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Climate Controls

Cab Climate Controls take an additional four seconds for the blower to
reach high speed. The blower motor performs a self-
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the ICC5 instru- test immediately after the engine is started, which
ment panel, the fan speed, temperature, and mode causes the delay. If the vehicle has Optimized Idle,
temporarily appear on the 10-inch head unit screen the fan will not operate with the key in accessory
when these items are adjusted. mode. Optimized Idle may also turn the fan off to
reduce stress on the batteries. Refer to Chapter 11
The standard cab climate controls include a fan for more information.
switch with a recirculation button, temperature control
switch with an A/C button, and a mode control Recirculation
switch. See Fig. 6.1. Sleeper cabs are also equipped
with a bunk override button. Recirculation mode limits the amount of outside air
entering the cab. Press the recirculation button to
1 2 3 prevent dusty or smoky air from entering the cab.
See Fig. 6.2. Recirculation mode can also decrease
the time required to cool or heat the cab interior dur-
ing extreme outside temperature conditions. An
amber indicator on the recirculation button will illumi-
nate when the recirculation mode is activated.
The recirculation button will not work when the mode
09/09/2016 f611324
control switch is in either defog or defrost modes.
1. Fan Switch NOTE: To prevent the buildup of odors or oxy-
2. Temperature Control Switch gen depletion inside the cab, the system
3. Mode Control Switch switches from full recirculation mode to partial
Fig. 6.1, Cab Climate Controls recirculation mode after 20 minutes. In ex-
tremely dusty or smoky conditions, the partial
Fan Switch recirculation mode can be overridden by press-
ing the recirculation button twice to obtain full
The fan switch activates the fan, which forces out- recirculation mode. This resets the 20-minute
side air or recirculated air through the air outlets. The
fan switch has ten fan speed settings and an OFF
timer.
position. See Fig. 6.2.
Temperature Control Switch
The temperature control switch is used to select the
desired temperature in the cab. Turn the switch
counterclockwise for cool air, or clockwise for hot air.
See Fig. 6.3.

09/09/2016 f611325
1
1. Recirculation Button
Fig. 6.2, Fan Switch

To operate the fan, turn the fan switch clockwise to

01/15/2016 f611326
increase airflow; turn the fan switch counterclockwise
to decrease airflow. 1. Air Conditioning Button
There is a two-second delay between the time the Fig. 6.3, Temperature Control Switch
engine is started and the blower is operational. It can

6.1
 Climate Controls

Air Conditioning Button 3

The air conditioner (A/C) cools and dehumidifies the
air inside the cab. Press the A/C button, located in
the center of the temperature control switch, to turn 4
2
the air conditioner on and off. See Fig. 6.3. The A/C
has three modes:
• Off
• Economy (ECO); green LED
• Full A/C (maximum cooling); blue LED 1 5
The ECO mode does not cool the air temperature as
low as the full A/C mode, and can provide fuel sav-
ings. 7 6
01/15/2016 f611327
When using the climate control in full A/C mode (blue NOTE: There are intermediate modes between each
LED illuminated), after 45 minutes the system will switch position.
automatically switch to ECO mode (green LED illumi- 1. Face Mode
nated) to improve fuel economy. Full A/C can be 2. Bi-Level Mode
reset by pushing the A/C button again. 3. Floor Mode
4. Floor/Defrost Mode
Mode Control Switch 5. Defrost Mode
6. All Mode
The mode control switch allows the driver to control 7. Bunk Override Button (on sleeper-cabs only)
the flow of air through the face outlets, the floor out-
Fig. 6.4, Mode Control Switch With Bunk Override
lets, the defrost (windshield) outlets, or a combination Button
of these outlets. See Fig. 6.4.
• Face Mode: Directs all airflow through the face when bunk override mode is activated. When in over-
or instrument panel outlets. ride mode, the sleeper climate control panel auto-
matically conforms to the fan speed and temperature
• Bi-Level Mode: Directs the airflow equally to settings on the cab climate panel at the time the
the face outlets and the floor outlets. override mode is activated. Further changes of the
• Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor cab climate control settings will not alter the settings
of the sleeper climate control panel.
outlets.
• Floor/Defrost Mode: Directs the airflow equally The override mode is disabled when the fan switch
or temperature control switch on the sleeper climate
to the floor outlets and the defrost outlets.
control panel is manually set to a different setting.
• Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the The override mode is also disabled when the bunk
defrost outlets. override button is pressed to the off position.
• All Mode: Directs the airflow equally to the
face, floor, and defrost outlets. Sleeper Climate Control Panel
NOTE: There are intermediate modes between The standard sleeper climate control panel has a fan
each switch position. switch and a temperature control switch with an A/C
button.
Bunk Override Button If the bunk override button has been activated, the
The bunk override button, equipped on sleeper cabs override mode can be canceled by changing the
only, allows the driver to control the sleeper tempera- sleeper fan speed or temperature setting. The cli-
ture and fan settings from the cab. See Fig. 6.4. mate control system will then operate from the
sleeper controls.
Press the bunk override button to copy the current
cab HVAC temperature and fan settings to the
sleeper HVAC. An amber indicator will illuminate

6.2
Climate Controls

Fan Switch true, if the rear unit is off and the front unit is set
such that AC is requested, in order to prevent the
The fan switch activates the fan, which forces air bunk evaporator from freezing up.
through the air outlets. The fan switch has ten fan
speeds and an OFF position. See Fig. 6.5. Temperature Control Switch
To operate the fan switch, turn the switch clockwise The temperature control switch is used to select the
to increase airflow; turn the fan switch counterclock- desired temperature in the sleeper. Turn the switch
wise to decrease airflow. If the vehicle has Optimized counterclockwise for cool air, or clockwise for hot air.
Idle, the fan will not operate with the key in acces-
sory mode. Optimized Idle may also turn the fan off Air Conditioning Button
to reduce stress on the batteries. Refer to Chap-
ter 11 for more information. The A/C cools and dehumidifies the air inside the
sleeper. Press the air conditioning button, located in
1 2 the center of the temperature control switch, to turn
the A/C on and off.

Smartway Certified Parked Heater

Operation
All vehicles equipped with diesel operated coolant
heaters are "Smartway Certified". The coolant heater
3 will keep the engine coolant between approximately
09/09/2016 f611328 150 and 180°F (65 and 82°C). Heated coolant is
1. Fan Switch routed through the auxiliary HVAC heater core to
2. Temperature Control Switch allow heater-only function of the auxiliary HVAC sys-
3. Air Conditioning Button tem.
Fig. 6.5, Sleeper Climate Control Panel
System Operation
When the cab air conditioner (A/C) is on, it is normal 1. Turn the block heater on.
for the sleeper fan to operate at low speed even if
the sleeper fan switch is in the off position. This is 2. Set the temperature dial to the desired heat set-
necessary to protect the evaporator in the sleeper ting.
heater and air conditioner system from freezing. At 3. Turn the HVAC blower on.
lower fan speed settings, a slight increase in airflow
levels may appear at times, as the control acts to
regulate the evaporator temperature. Accessory Heaters
When the park brake is set, any temperature or Optional accessary heaters are available from the
blower speed setting changes on the bunk HVAC factory in several configurations. Familiarize yourself
unit control panel will be mimicked by the front HVAC with the equipment on your specific vehicle, and fol-
unit. For example, if you set bunk blower speed to HI low the manufacturer’s operating and maintenance
and the temperature to COLD, the front unit will also instructions.
operate on HI/COLD.
When the park brake is not set, the front and rear WARNING
HVAC settings function independently, unless the
bunk override button is pressed, or "minimum AC Do not operate fuel-operated heaters in an area
support" is required. where flammable vapors, including gasoline or
diesel fumes, are present, such as at filling sta-
Minimum AC support is when the front unit is off and tions and oil depots. Turn off a fuel-operated
the bunk unit is set such that AC is requested (needs heater and allow it shut down completely before
the AC compressor to run). In this case, the front unit entering an area where flammable gases or liq-
will go into minimum AC support mode by operating uids are present. Heaters continue to operate for
the front blower at minimum speed to prevent the up to three minutes after being turned off.
front unit evaporator from freezing up. This is also

6.3
 Climate Controls

Failure to observe these precautions could cause 2

an explosion or fire, resulting in serious property
damage, and personal injury or death. 1 3

NOTICE
Always ensure that air inlet and outlet grilles are
not restricted. Restriction of any air inlet or outlet
ports could result in damage to the auxiliary
heater.
IMPORTANT: To maintain reliable performance,
run the accessory heater for at least 15 minutes
every month to prevent fuel from degrading.
On vehicles without Optimized Idle, accessory heat- 6 5 4
ers function when the ignition switch is in the OFF 10/17/2016 f611463
position and the cab load disconnect switch (if 1. Heater Enabled LED (green)
equipped) is in the ON position. 2. LCD Display
3. Maintenance Required LED (red)
On vehicles with Optimized Idle, accessory heaters 4. Temperature UP Button (right arrow)
function when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC 5. Power Button
position, the cab load disconnect switch (if equipped) 6. Temperature DOWN Button (left arrow)
is in the ON position, and the parking brake is en-
gaged. The heater may run briefly after the ignition Fig. 6.6, Eberspaecher Digi-Max D1000 Controller
key has been turned to the OFF position.
IMPORTANT: Wait eight minutes after shutting 1 2
down an accessory heater before turning the
cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) to OFF. 10/17/2016 f611462
1. Remaining Runtime
NOTE: The low voltage disconnect (LVD) control 2. Set Temperature
prevents a heater from draining the batteries
below starting voltage. Fig. 6.7, Controller LCD

To turn the heater off, press the POWER button

Eberspaecher (Espar) Heater again. The heater will initiate a 5- to 8-minute cooling
Refer to the Eberspaecher website, cycle.
www.eberspaecher-na.com, for additional informa- The controller has a real-time diagnostic feature, and
tion. will automatically display fault codes as they happen
(e.g. 48—Check Fuel Pump). The red LED will illumi-
Eberspaecher Digi-Max D1000 Controller nate, indicating that maintenance is required.
To turn the heater on, press the POWER button. See The controller has a programmable run timer that will
Fig. 6.6. The display will indicate that heater is en- display a maintenance message on the LCD after the
abled and show the remaining runtime and the set set time limit when the heater is off. See Fig. 6.8.
temperature. See Fig. 6.7. The green LED indicates The fault codes and maintenance messages will not
that the heater is on. prevent the heater from operating, but they reflect
To adjust the desired temperature, press the left or conditions that should be addressed promptly.
right arrow buttons. The left arrow button lowers the
desired temperature, and the right arrow button
raises it. The adjustment range is from 48 to 93°F (8
to 34°C).
10/17/2016 f611464

Fig. 6.8, Maintenance Required Message

6.4
Climate Controls

Webasto Heater Setting the Temperature and Heater

Runtime
Webasto heaters have a heat mode and a vent
mode. The fan speed is adjustable in the vent mode. 1. Press the selection button.
The control also has a timer function, allowing a start
2. Using the rotary knob, select Options > Duration
time and/or duration to be set.
> Timed > Adjust Runtime to xx Hours. Confirm
To turn the heater on, push the ON/OFF button. See the adjustment by pressing the selection button.
Fig. 6.9. The LCD screen displays the mode, ambi-
ent temperature, set temperature, timer, and fan 3. Using the rotary knob, adjust the control to the
speed. See Fig. 6.10. desired temperature. Confirm the adjustment by
pressing the selection button.
Refer to the Webasto website, techwebasto.com,
for additional information. NOTE: The temperature can be adjusted while
the heater is running.
1 2
Setting the Timer
1. Press the selection button.
2. Using the rotary knob, select Timer.
3
3 3. Press the selection button. Select Edit from the
sub-menu.
4. Using the rotary knob, select the day. To confirm,
press the selection button.
5. Using the rotary knob, select the start time. To
confirm, press the selection button.
6. Using the rotary knob, select the run time. To
4 confirm, press the selection button.
10/21/2016 f611465
1. Rotary Knob 3. Indicator Light Battery-Powered HVAC System
2. ON/OFF Button 4. Selection Button
(BPHS)
Fig. 6.9, Webasto Temperature Control
The BPHS replaces the standard sleeper HVAC
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 7 when optioned. Vehicles with BPHS have a larger
alternator, additional batteries, and premium insula-
tion. The BPHS operates both when the engine is
running and when the engine is off.
The BPHS controls temperature differently than the
standard sleeper HVAC system. The standard
sleeper HVAC (without Optimized Idle) attempts to
maintain vent discharge temperature at the sleeper
A B C vents, much like the main HVAC in the dash. The
10/21/2016 f611466 BPHS is a zone control system which attempts to
A. Standby Mode C. Vent Mode
hold the bunk at a constant temperature.
B. Heat Mode The BPHS has two evaporators for cooling, one sup-
1. Set Temperature 5. Heat ON Indicator ported by the engine-driven A/C system, and the
2. Ambient Temperature 6. Fan Speed Indicator other on a separate battery-powered A/C loop with a
3. Mode 7. Vent ON Indicator backwall-mounted condenser. When the engine is
4. Timed Duration running, the BPHS uses the traditional engine-
Fig. 6.10, Webasto Temperature Control Display supported systems for heating and cooling. When the
Screens engine is turned off, the vehicle batteries power the

6.5
 Climate Controls

separate electric air conditioner loop or support a

fuel-operated heater.
Operation of the BPHS is regulated by the cab Pro-
gressive Low Voltage Disconnect (PLVD). The PLVD
must be enabled for the BPHS to be started. The
PLVD will stop operation of the BPHS when the volt-
age gets below a pre-determined threshold. Before
operating the BPHS, bring the sleeper interior tem-
perature to the desired temperature with the engine
running and the bunk curtain open. The BPHS is de-
signed to maintain an established comfortable bunk 1. Fan Switch 3. PARK Button
temperature in parked mode for up to 12 hours with 2. Temperature Control
the bunk curtain closed. Switch

NOTE: The condition and charge of the vehicle Fig. 6.11, BPHS Control Panel
batteries will directly affect the run time of the
BPHS. If the vehicle run time between dis- the A/C cooling to operate. In between the two ex-
tremes the unit will operate in either the heating or
charges is less than eight hours, or if additional cooling mode to achieve the setpoint. The mid-point
loads are added to the vehicle batteries, the position on the knob is a setpoint of 73°F (23°C).
BPHS run time will be less than expected.
In most conditions the mid-setpoint for temperature
Start the fuel-operated heater once per month and and mid-setpoint for fan speed will assure a stable
allow it to run for 15 minutes. Periodically running the environment. Mid-point for both controls is suggested
heater will keep fresh fuel in the lines and ensure the as the initial position, with subsequent adjustment for
heater is ready to perform when needed. personal preference.
NOTE: The Espar Hydronic 5 water heater can IMPORTANT: Wait three minutes after shutting
use biodiesel blends up to 10% (B-10). Consult down the BPHS before turning the cab load dis-
the engine manufacturer’s manual to confirm the connect switch (CLDS) to OFF.
lowest allowable blend (engine or heater) is not
being exceeded.

BPHS Control Panel

The BPHS control panel replaces the standard
sleeper control panel in BPHS-equipped sleeper
cabs. See Fig. 6.11. The BPHS is designed to main-
tain a comfortable temperature inside the sleeper,
and can operate in combination with the cab climate
control system when the vehicle is running, or inde-
pendently when the vehicle is parked.
To operate BPHS, select a fan speed (other than off)
and push the PARK button. Adjust the temperature
control knob to the desired temperature.
The fan switch has ten fan speeds. Zero (0) is the
OFF position. Turn the switch clockwise to increase
airflow, and counterclockwise to decrease airflow.
The temperature control switch controls the tempera-
ture from 65°F to 85°F (18°C to 29°C). At the mini-
mum setting of 65°F the unit will attempt to cool the
bunk to 65°F and will not allow the coolant heater to
operate. At the maximum setting of 85°F the unit will
attempt to heat the bunk to 85°F and will not allow

6.6
 7
Seats and Restraints
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Sears Atlas Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Sleeper Compartment Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
RollTek Rollover Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
Seats and Restraints

Seats, General Information 2. Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the

shape of the seat back to give more or less sup-
Unless otherwise noted, all seat adjustments should port to the occupant’s lumbar (lower back) area.
be made while seated and before the engine is This adjustment is either mechanical or air con-
started. trolled, depending on make and model of the
seat.
Due to the maximum adjustability of mid- and high-
back air suspension seats, it is possible to combine 3. Isolator: This feature reduces the amount of road
the seat back recline adjustment and the seat slide shock by isolating the occupant from the motion
adjustment so that the seat back contacts the back- of the vehicle, and allowing the upper seat to
wall. It is the responsibility of the driver to adjust the move in a simple pendulum motion. A lockout
seat to prevent damage to the seat and the cab feature is used whenever the isolator is not de-
interior. sired.
4. Height Adjustment: This adjustment moves the
WARNING entire seat up or down. The adjustment is either
manual or air-controlled, depending on the make
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from of the seat.
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do
so could cause personal injury. 5. Bottom Cushion Angle, or Fore-and-Aft Bottom
Cushion Height: This adjustment enables the oc-
The following is a description of adjustments that can cupant to raise or lower the front or back of the
be made to various Freightliner-installed seats. Not bottom cushion. This adjustment is easier to per-
all seats have all of the adjustments listed below. form when all weight is removed from the seat.
See Fig. 7.1.

1
3 4
2
8

6 7
5

02/03/2017 f910149a
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-and- 7. Seat Tilt
2. Lumbar Support aft cushion height) 8. Headrest Adjustment
3. Isolator Feature 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide (seat
4. Height Adjustment track adjustment)

Fig. 7.1, General Seat Adjustments

1. Backrest Tilt: This adjustment enables the back- 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide, or Seat Track Adjust-
rest to pivot forward or backward. ment: This adjustment moves the entire seat for-
ward or backward on its track.

7.1
 Seats and Restraints

7. Seat Tilt: This adjustment allows the seat assem-

bly (back and bottom cushions) to tilt forward or
backward.
8. Headrest Adjustment: This adjustment changes
the angle of the upper part of the backrest to
provide head and upper back support.

High Back Seat

See Fig. 7.2 for seat adjustment controls. Not all
models of High Back seat have all the adjustments
listed below.

NOTICE
Do not install seat covers on seats with heating
and ventilation. Do not cover the seat with blan-
kets, clothing, or pillows. Blocking the air flow
through the cushions can overheat and damage
the seat.
1. Backrest Tilt: Pull the recline handle to adjust the
backrest tilt.
2. Heat/Ventilation: Use the forward switch to turn
the seat heater and ventilation ON or OFF. To
turn on the heat, push the top of the switch. To 1
turn on the ventilation, push the bottom of the 2
switch. To turn off the heat or ventilation, move 9
8 3
the switch to the middle position. To adjust the 4
7
heat or ventilation, Use the rear button to adjust 5
6
seat heating or ventilation. Three settings are 01/14/2016 f910682b
available: low, medium, and high. See Fig. 7.3. 1. Backrest Tilt Handle
IMPORTANT: Turn off seat heating/ventilation 2. Heat/Ventilation Switches
3. Lumbar and Side Support Switches
when the seat is unoccupied. 4. Height Adjustment Lever
3. Lumbar and Side Support: Press the forward but- 5. Shock Absorber Adjustment Lever
6. Fore/Aft Isolator Lever
ton to adjust lower lumbar support, the middle 7. Bottom Cushion Extension Lever
button to adjust upper lumbar support, and the 8. Seat Fore/Aft Slide Lever
rear button to adjust side support. 9. Seat Tilt Lever
4. Height Adjustment: Pull or push the lever to ad- Fig. 7.2, High Back Seat
just seat height.
5. 8. Seat Fore/Aft Slide: Lift the lever to slide the seat
Shock Absorber Adjustment: Move the lever
down to increase damping on rough roads, or up forward or backward. Release the lever to lock
to decrease damping on flat roads. the seat in position.

6. Fore/Aft Isolator: Rotate the isolator knob to the 9. Seat Tilt: Pull the lever and lean back to tilt the
left to lock the isolator, or to the right to allow seat backwards. Three positions are available.
movement. Armrest Tilt: To adjust the armrest angle, tilt the arm-
7. Bottom Cushion Extension: Pull the lever to rest to the highest position, then down to the lowest
move the seat cushion forwards or backwards. position, then to the desired position.
The cushion moves 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) in 3/8-
inch (10-mm) increments.

7.2
Seats and Restraints

4 5

05/08/2012 f910683

1. Ventilation ON
2. Heat/Ventilation OFF
3. Heat ON
4. Heat/Ventilation ON/OFF Switch
5. Heat/Ventilation Adjustment Switch
Fig. 7.3, High Back Seat Heat/Ventilation Controls

Sears Atlas Seat

See Fig. 7.4 for seat adjustment controls.
5
1. Isolator: Position the handle to the left to allow
isolation movement. Position the handle to the
right to lock-out isolation movement. 4 6
3
2. Fore/Aft Seat Slide: To adjust the fore-and-aft 2
position of the entire seat, squeeze the fore/aft 1
slide lock against the adjustment bail, and lift the
bail up. See Fig. 7.5. Slide the seat forward or
backward to the desired position. Release the 7
bail and fore/aft slide lock, to its original position,
to lock the seat in place. 10/15/2007 f910597
3. Bottom Cushion Tilt: Lift the handle upward and 1. Isolator Lever 5. Backrest Tilt Lever
move the seat cushion to the desired position. 2. Fore/Aft Seat Slide 6. Lumbar Support
Three positions are available. Lever Switches
3. Bottom Cushion Tilt 7. Suspension Inflation/
4. Seat Extension: Rotate the handle upward to dis- Handle Deflation Switch
engage, then move the seat cushion to the de- 4. Seat Extension Lever
sired position and release the lever. Three posi-
tions are available. Fig. 7.4, Sears Atlas Seat

5. Backrest Tilt: Pull upward on the recliner handle, suspension; push rearward to deflate and lower
move the backrest to the desired position and the suspension.
release the handle. Armrest Angle: Rotate the control knob, located on
6. Lumbar Support: Rear rocker switch: Push for- the underside of the armrest, to set the desired angle
ward to inflate the lower lumbar bag; push rear- of the armrest.
ward to deflate the bag. Center rocker switch:
Push forward to inflate the upper lumbar bag; Seat Belts and Tether Belts
push rearward to deflate the bag.
Seat belt assemblies are designed to secure persons
7. Suspension Inflation/Deflation: Push forward on
in the vehicle to help reduce the chance of injury, or
the gray rocker switch to inflate and raise the
the amount of injury, resulting from accidents or sud-
den stops. For this reason, Daimler Trucks North

7.3
 Seats and Restraints

Seat Belt Inspection

WARNING
A
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
B the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re-
10/15/2007 f910599
placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at-
A. Squeeze the fore-and-aft slide lock against the tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
adjustment bail. could change the effectiveness of the system.
B. Lift up the adjustment bail.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
Fig. 7.5, Fore/Aft Slide Adjustment, Sears Atlas Seat making any modifications to the system, may re-
sult in personal injury or death.
America LLC (DTNA) urges that the driver and all
Inspect the seat belts and tether belts (if so
passengers, regardless of age or physical condition,
equipped).
use seat belts when riding in the vehicle.
1. Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme dirt and
WARNING dust, or for severe fading from exposure to sun-
light, especially near the buckle latch plate and in
Always use the vehicle’s seat belt system when the D-loop guide area.
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so can result 2. Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort
in severe personal injury or death. Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if equipped), web
Seat belt assemblies in DTNA vehicles meet Federal retractor, and upper seat belt mount on the door
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 209, "Type 1" and pillar. Check all visible components for wear or
"Type 2" requirements. damage.

When transporting a child, always use a child re- 3. Check the seat belt and tether belt connection
straint system or the vehicle seat belts as appropri- points and tighten any that are loose.
ate. To determine whether a child restraint system is
required, review and comply with applicable state Seat Belt Operation
and local laws. Any child restraint used must comply When engaged and used properly, the Komfort Latch
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213, (Fig. 7.6) and the Sliding Komfort Latch (Fig. 7.7)
"Child Restraint Systems." When providing a child introduce a small amount of slack into the seat belt,
restraint system, always carefully read and follow all resulting in a more comfortable ride.
instructions pertaining to installation and usage for
the child. Make certain the child remains in the re- 1. Slowly pull the link end of the seat belt out of the
straint system at all times when the vehicle is in retractor and pull it across your lap (from out-
motion. board to inboard) far enough to engage the
buckle. If the retractor locks too soon, allow the
In addition to seat belt assemblies, tether belts are belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it out
installed on suspension-type seats. Tether belts help again. See Fig. 7.8.
secure the seat to the floor and are intended to re-
strain the seat and seat belt in case of an accident or 2. Fasten the seat belt by pushing the latch into the
sudden stop. buckle. Listen for an audible click.
IMPORTANT: Seat belts have a finite life which 3. Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely
may be much shorter than the life of the vehicle. fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
Regular inspections and replacement as needed step. If the problem continues, replace the seat
are the only assurance of adequate seat belt belt.
security over the life of the vehicle. 4. Snug the seat belt to your waist.

7.4
Seats and Restraints

A B

1
03/11/2010 f910620
A. Disengaged B. Engaged
2
Fig. 7.6, Komfort Latch

07/02/2007 f910578
1. Latch 2. Buckle
Fig. 7.8, Three-Point Seat Belt Operation

duces the effectiveness of the seat belt, and in-

creases the risk of injury or death in an accident.
5. Position the shoulder strap diagonally across
your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
and neck. See Fig. 7.9. If desired, engage the
Komfort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch as fol-
lows.
If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, make
11/18/2010 f910621a
sure that the shoulder strap is snug against your
Fig. 7.7, Sliding Komfort Latch chest. Without loosening the shoulder strap,
push the Sliding Komfort Latch switch to the
"ON" position. See Fig. 7.7. To activate the latch
WARNING lean forward until you hear a click. This will allow
for approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack be-
Before activating the Komfort Latch or the Slid- tween your chest and the shoulder harness.
ing Komfort Latch, make sure the amount of Once engaged, the latch will allow you to lean
slack in the shoulder strap is set as described forward about 5 inches (13 cm) without having to
below. Excess slack in the shoulder strap re- reset the latch. Leaning forward more than 5

7.5
 Seats and Restraints

inches (13 cm) will disengage the Sliding Kom-

fort Latch, requiring it to be reset.
If equipped with a Komfort Latch, pull on the
shoulder strap to lessen the pressure of the strap
on your shoulder and chest. Allow no more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack between your chest and
the shoulder harness. More slack can signifi-
cantly reduce the seat belt effectiveness in an
accident or a sudden stop. While holding the belt
slack, press the Komfort Latch lever up, clamp-
ing the seat belt webbing (Fig. 7.10 and
Fig. 7.11).

02/03/2017 f910144

Fig. 7.11, Locking the Komfort Latch

If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, un-

buckle the seat belt, then tug on the shoulder
belt to release the Sliding Komfort Latch, or
A B C press the Sliding Komfort latch to the "OFF" po-
02/03/2017 f910634
sition, then unbuckle the seat belt.
A. Correct—Belt is centered on your shoulder and If equipped with a Komfort Latch, unbuckle the
chest, away from your face and neck. seat belt, then release the Komfort Latch by giv-
B. Wrong—Belt must not rub against face or neck. ing the shoulder belt a quick tug. If you lean for-
C. Wrong—Belt must not hang off shoulder. ward against the shoulder belt, the Komfort Latch
will automatically release, and will need to be
Fig. 7.9, Proper Shoulder Strap Fit
reset.
NOTE: Neither the Komfort Latch nor the Sliding
Komfort Latch need to be manually released in
an emergency situation. Each will release by
itself under rough road or other abnormal condi-
tions. Make sure the seat belt is completely re-
A
tracted when it is not in use.

Sleeper Compartment
Restraints
WARNING
Keep the upper bunk folded up and locked, and
do not use the sleeper compartment while the
02/03/2017 f910048a
vehicle is in motion unless a bunk restraint is
A. 1 Inch (2.5 cm) Maximum installed and used. Not using the bunk restraint
Fig. 7.10, Adjusting Shoulder Harness Clearance,
increases the chance of injury, or the degree of
Komfort Latch injury, to all occupants of the vehicle from acci-
dents or sudden stops.
6. Unbuckle the seat belt and release the Komfort
Latch or the Sliding Komfort Latch as follows.

7.6
Seats and Restraints

Bunk Restraint Adjustment 1

1. Make sure the belt is attached to the bunk sup-
port and sleeper wall.
2. To lengthen the belt, tip the link end downward
and pull the link until it connects with the buckle.
2
3. After the belt is connected, shorten it by pulling 3
on the loose end until the belt is snug, but com-
fortable. Be sure the belts are not twisted. See
Fig. 7.12.
4

5
A
1
6
3
09/09/2016 f910766
NOTE: Mattresses not shown for clarity. Upper bunk
pan cutaway shown for clarity.
02/17/2017 f910068a
1. Upper Bunk Restraint 4. Lower Bunk Restraint
A. Pull on the loose end to shorten the belt. 2. Upper Bunk 5. Lower Bunk
1. Buckle 3. Link 3. Upper Bunk Buckle 6. Lower Bunk Buckle
2. Belt Release Button
Fig. 7.13, Bunk Restraints
Fig. 7.12, Bunk Restraint Adjustment

Bunk Restraint Operation

Steering Wheel Air Bag
1. Starting at the foot of the bunk, pull the link end
Operation
of the belt up far enough to engage the buckle. NOTE: Only vehicles with the letters "SRS"
See Fig. 7.13. molded into the steering wheel center pad are
2. Fasten the belt by pushing the link end into the equipped with a steering wheel air bag.
buckle until it latches. Make sure that the belt is The air bag, when used with seat belts, provides ad-
not twisted. Check the engagement by trying to ditional protection to the driver in severe frontal colli-
pull the link out of the buckle. If they come apart, sions. Steering wheel air bags are designed to inflate
repeat this step. If the problem continues, re- only in severe frontal collisions. The driver and the
place the belt. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the passenger should always wear seat belts. The steer-
other two belts located in the middle and upper ing wheel air bag will activate during a collision even
portion of the bunk to lock the restraint in place. if the seat belts are not fastened, but the system is
3. To release the bunk restraint, push the release designed to provide protection to the occupant only
button on the buckle at the head of the bunk and when the seat belts are fastened.
pull the link from the buckle.
Repeat this step for the other two buckles to
WARNING
completely release the bunk restraint. Keep all heavy objects in the cab secured. Do not
place objects on the steering wheel or between
you and the steering wheel. Any such objects
may cause harm during an accident. Keep your
hands on the sides and lower portion of the

7.7
 Seats and Restraints

steering wheel. Failure to follow these instruc-

tions may result in death or personal injury.
RollTek Rollover Protection
For maximum protection in a collision, always be in a
System
normal seated position with your back against the Identification
seat back and your head upright. Fasten your seat
belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your Only seats with the RollTek module under the seat
body as described under the "Seat Belt Operation" and the molded side-roll air bag cover on the upper
heading. Since the air bag inflates with considerable side of the seat back are equipped with the RollTek
speed and force, a proper seat position will help rollover protection system; see Fig. 7.14. RollTek
keep you a safe distance from the inflating air bag. may be installed in one of the following configura-
tions:
Inspection and Service • driver seat only or driver and passenger seats
• driver seat only, with an optional steering
WARNING wheel frontal air bag
Do not attempt to service or modify the air bag • driver and passenger seats, with an optional
system. Unintentional or improper air bag deploy- steering wheel frontal air bag
ment could cause severe bodily injury or death.
Contact an authorized Freightliner service facility Operation
for all service and maintenance.
The RollTek system, when used with seat belts, pro-
The air bag system contains components that vides additional protection to the driver and passen-
use combustible chemicals. Do not cut, drill, ger (if equipped with a passenger-side system) in
braze, solder, weld, strike, or probe the air bag rollover accidents. The RollTek system provides a
components. Keep all liquids and chemicals significant increase in seat stability during a rollover.
away from air bag components. Vehicles equipped with RollTek rollover protection
The surface of the deployed air bag may contain have a sensor mounted in the seat base that acti-
small amounts of sodium hydroxide (which is a vates the side-roll air bag and seat pull-down device
by-product of the gas generant combustion) and during a rollover.
metallic sodium. Sodium hydroxide may be irri- When the RollTek module senses a rollover, the
tating to the skin and eyes. Immediately wash module triggers gas cylinders mounted in the base of
your hands and exposed skin areas with a mild the seat. The gas cylinders activate the power
soap and water. Flush your eyes immediately if cinches that then tighten the lap and shoulder belts
exposed to sodium hydroxide. against the occupant of the seat and lower the seat
The operational readiness of the air bag system is suspension, moving the occupant down and away
indicated by the supplemental restraint system (SRS) from the steering wheel and ceiling. The side-roll air
indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator illuminates bag deploys from the outboard side of the seat as
for several seconds when the ignition is turned on, the seat is pulled down to its lowest position. See
and then it goes off. The indicator will remain on if Fig. 7.15.
there is a problem with the air bag system. The ve-
hicle should be serviced if the SRS indicator does WARNING
not illuminate when the ignition is turned on, or if the
SRS indicator remains on. Always use the seat belts when operating the ve-
hicle. Failure to do so can result in severe per-
The air bag module may contain perchlorate mate-
sonal injury or death. Do not place infants and
rial; for information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Special handling may children in seats equipped with the RollTek sys-
apply; follow appropriate rules and regulations when tem. The RollTek system is designed for adults
disposing of materials. only. Doing so could result in severe bodily in-
jury or death. Keep all heavy objects in the cab
For all service and maintenance, contact an autho- secured. Do not place objects on the seat back
rized Freightliner service facility. or block the side-roll air bag. Objects that block
the side-roll air bag may prevent proper inflation
and could result in serious injury or death.

7.8
Seats and Restraints

07/03/2007 f910579
1 A. Side-roll air bag contained in seat.
10/15/2007 f910598
B. Side-roll air bag deployed.
1. RollTek Module
2. Side-Roll Air Bag Cover Fig. 7.15, Side-Roll Air Bag
Fig. 7.14, RollTek Protection System Components • Rollover Crash—occupant seat belt pretension-
The RollTek system will activate during a rollover ing, seat pretensioning, and side-roll air bag at
even if the seat belts are not fastened, but the the proper time
RollTek system is only designed to provide protection • Frontal Crash—steering wheel air bag, occu-
to the occupant when the seat belts are fastened. pant seat belt pretensioning, seat pretension-
For vehicles with the RollTek system(s) only, de- ing, and the side-roll air bag at the proper time
vice(s) deploy as follows:
Inspection and Service
• Rollover Crash—occupant seat belt pretension-
ing, seat pretensioning, and side-roll air bag at
the proper time WARNING
• Frontal Crash—no devices deployed Keep hands and tools away from the scissor
For vehicles with the RollTek system(s) and frontal points under the seats.
steering wheel air bag, device(s) deploy as follows: The RollTek system contains components that
use combustible chemicals. Do not cut, drill,
braze, solder, weld, strike, or probe any part of

7.9
 Seats and Restraints

the RollTek system. Keep all liquids and chemi-

cals away from the RollTek components.
Do not attempt to service or modify the RollTek
system. Unintentional or improper deployment of
the RollTek system could cause severe bodily
injury or death. Contact an authorized Freight-
liner service facility for all service and mainte-
nance.
IMPORTANT: The RollTek system must be re-
placed after being activated. Damaged seat
belts and tethers, or seat belts and tethers that
were worn in an accident, must be replaced,
and their anchoring points must be checked.
The operational readiness of the RollTek system is
indicated by the supplemental restraint system (SRS)
indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator illuminates
for several seconds when the ignition is turned on,
and then it goes off. The indicator will remain on if
there is a problem with the air bag or RollTek sys-
tem. The vehicle must be serviced if the SRS indica-
tor does not illuminate when the ignition is turned on,
or if the SRS indicator remains on.
The air bag module may contain perchlorate mate-
rial; for information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Special handling may
apply; follow appropriate rules and regulations when
disposing of materials.
For all service and maintenance, contact an autho-
rized Freightliner service facility.

7.10
 8
Cab and Sleeper Features
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Cab and Sleeper Features

Windows Mirrors
Power windows are standard on New Cascadia™ ve- The standard outside mirrors are mounted on the
hicles. The driver’s door has two switches mounted door frame. The power mirrors are controlled with a
in the top of the door, that control the driver and pas- left-hand or right-hand mirror selector switch, and a
senger windows separately. See Fig. 8.1. The pas- directional switch. Select the left (driver) mirror, or
senger door has a switch mounted in the top of the the right (passenger) mirror using the selector switch.
door that controls the passenger-side power window. The mirror can then be adjusted by pressing the di-
rectional switch arrow for the direction the mirror
should be adjusted.
The outside door mirrors can be heated to keep
1 them clear of fog, frost, and ice. To heat the mirrors,
press the outboard part of the mirror heat switch on
2 the door. See Fig. 8.1. When the mirror heat switch
is on, an amber indicator light illuminates inside the
switch. If the vehicle has Optimized Idle, mirror heat-
3 ing will not operate with the key in accessory mode,
or if the Optimized Idle feature turns mirror heating
off to reduce stress on the batteries. Refer to Chap-
ter 11 for more information.
4
Cab Amenities
5
New Cascadia vehicles are available with many op-
tional features. The following are some of those
6
options.

Cup Holders
Three cup holders and a map pocket are molded into
02/23/2016 f611331 the center dash. See Fig. 8.2. A removable ash cup
1. Mirror Selector Switch is located in one of the cup holders.
2. Mirror Directional Switch
3. Mirror Heat Switch Lighting
4. Passenger-Side Window Switch
5. Driver-Side Window Switch See Chapter 4 for detailed information regarding
6. Door Lock Switch lighting controls.
Fig. 8.1, Door Switches (driver-side shown)
Power Outlets
CAUTION Two power outlets that supply 12V power for acces-
sories are located on the dash switch panel. Option-
There is no anti-pinch protection when the win- ally, three power outlets, or two power outlets and a
dow is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects cigarette lighter, are offered.
from the window before closing.
Radio and CB
The window switches have three positions: lower
window, neutral, and raise window. Press forward on The radio is mounted in the center dash panel. The
the switch to lower the window. Hold the switch down CB is typically installed in the overhead console. An
in the forward position for approximately one second optional hot mount may be installed on top of the
to activate the express function; the window will con- dash for fleet CB radios.
tinue to roll down after the switch is released. Press
the switch in the rearward position (bump) to raise
the window.

8.1
 Cab and Sleeper Features

5
11/29/2018 f611580
1. CB Tray 3. Power Outlets 5. Cup Holders
2. USB Outlets 4. Map Pocket 6. Storage Tray
Fig. 8.2, Dash Amenities

Storage Sleeper Bunks

Storage pockets are molded into the lower portion of NOTE: Make sure bunks are locked in place
the driver and passenger doors. A map pocket is lo- before sleeping or driving the vehicle.
cated on the passenger side of the center dash. See
Fig. 8.2. Sleeper cabs can come with a lower bunk, an upper
bunk, or both.
Storage compartments are located in the overhead
console, above the windshield and the cab doors. Lower bunk configurations include a bed with a stor-
See Fig. 8.3. For compartments with doors, open the age compartment or a pull-down bed with two fold-
door by pulling outward on the latch. The doors are able seats and a table.
hinged at the top, and will swing upwards. The release lever to unlock the storage bed is cen-
tered under the bunk. Press the lever to the right and
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Outlets pull up on the bunk to access the storage compart-
ment. Pushing the bunk back into its original horizon-
Two USB outlets are located on the dash switch tal position will cause the bed latches to lock.
panel.
Setting up the pull-down (see Fig. 8.4) consists of
the following steps.
Sleeper Amenities
NOTE: To avoid damaging the upholstery, un-
Sleepers are available with a number of optional fea- lock and move the seatbelts to side before fold-
tures. The following are some of those options.
ing the chairs closed.
NOTE: See Chapter 6 for detailed information
regarding sleeper climate controls.

8.2
Cab and Sleeper Features

1
2

09/09/2016 f611449
1. Storage Compartment 2. CB Compartment
Fig. 8.3, Overhead Console

1. To fold up each chair, pull forward on the seat 3. Pull t-handle and lift up on the table. As the table
latch while pulling the back of chair toward the nears the correct height, the t-pull handle will be
seat. pulled back and lock into position. If this doesn’t
happen, reach under the raised table and push
2. Pull the table t-pull handle forward and then push
the t-pull handle in. Then gently push down to
down on the top of the table until it is at the
make sure the table is locked in the upright posi-
same level as the folded seats.
tion.
3. Pull the pull-down bed release latch to the right 4. To unfold each chair, push down on the seat
until you feel a release of tension.
latch while pulling up and then pushing back the
4. Reach up and grasp the edge of the pull-down top of the chair.
bed and pull it down until the lower latch pins Upper bunks fold up against and lock onto the cab
engage in the lower bunk locks. back wall. To unlock and fold down an upper bunk,
Setting up the lounge area consists of the following grasp the bunk release handle (see Fig. 8.5) and
steps: turn it to either the left or right and pull. To fold up
and lock an upper bunk, turn the bunk release
1. Pull the pull-down bed release latch to the right handle to the left or right and push up and back.
until you feel a release.
2. Holding the front edge, push the pull-down bed
up toward the back wall until you hear or feel the
upper latch pins lock into place.

8.3
 Cab and Sleeper Features

7
6

6
5 5

4
4
3

1
2
10/31/2019 f602720
1. Table T-Pull Handle 4. Seatbelts 7. Upper Bunk Latch Pins Engaged
2. Pull-Down Bed Release Latch 5. Seat Latches in Upper Locks
3. Lower Bunk Locks 6. Lower Bunk Latch Pins
Fig. 8.4, Pull-Down Bed With Lounge

IMPORTANT: The baggage compartment doors

have two-stage latching. When closing the
doors, ensure that they are completely latched
to prevent wind noise and water intrusion.

Lighting
See Chapter 4 for detailed information regarding
lighting controls.

Power Outlets
Power outlets are located underneath the lower bunk
10/30/2019 f602722 and/or the sleeper control panel. See Fig. 8.6.
Fig. 8.5, Upper Bunk Release Handle Sleeper Access Door
Baggage Compartment Doors The sleeper access door is not intended for entry or
exit. The door is intended only as a convenient
The baggage compartment doors are intended as a means to stow or remove personal belongings in the
convenient means to stow or remove items under the sleeper area. The sleeper access door can be
bunk. The baggage compartment doors can be opened using two different methods. The primary
opened using the pull cable located near the aft edge method is the pull cable located near the lower rear
of the cab door opening on the sidewall behind the edge of the cab door opening on the sidewall behind
seat. Pull the cable handle labeled BAGGAGE for- the seat. Pull the cable handle labeled ACCESS for-
ward to open the door. ward to open the sleeper door. The secondary
method is the black knob located at the upper rear

8.4
Cab and Sleeper Features

11/15/2019 f611450
1. Inverter/Charger 3. Power Outlet
Display Panel 4. Clock
2. Sleeper Climate
Control Panel

Fig. 8.6, Sleeper Control Panel

edge of the sleeper door opening. Pull the knob

down to open the sleeper door.
IMPORTANT: The sleeper access doors have
two-stage latching. When closing the doors, en-
sure that they are completely latched to prevent
wind noise and water intrusion.

Sliding Side Window

The lower section of the sliding side window moves
vertically and may be locked in multiple positions to
suit. Two spring-loaded tabs are located at the top of
the sliding section. To adjust the window, pull both
tabs toward the center of the glass and move the
sliding section to the desired height. Release the
tabs to lock the sliding section.

8.5
 9
Electrical System
Vehicle Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Emergency Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Progressive Low Voltage Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Inverter/Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Electrical System

Vehicle Power Distribution

Electrical power distribution provides battery power to
the electrical and electronic systems.
The following components make up the power distri-
bution system:
• Battery Cable Access (BCA)
• Vehicle Power Distribution Module (VPDM)
• Cab Load Disconnect Switch (CLDS), optional

Battery Cable Access (BCA)

The BCA is the primary interface through which bat-
tery power gets transferred from outside the cab to
the inside. It is located on the passenger side of the
engine compartment front wall.
On vehicles equipped with a cab load disconnect
switch (CLDS), the BCA houses a contacting device
that can open to shut off power to high current loads.
On vehicles equipped with an optional high current
receptacle and/or optional inverter, the BCA will have
circuit protection and power cables supplying those
devices.

Vehicle Power Distribution Module

(VPDM)
The VPDM is the primary component for power distri-
bution and circuit protection. The VPDM provides
power for cab and powertrain functions, and various
stand-alone modules, and supplies the emergency
power supply circuits with power in the event of a
module failure. The VPDM is located in the vehicle
electronics bay, behind the passenger-side dash
panel.
See Fig. 9.1 for a map of VPDM fuses and relays.

9.1
 Electrical System

REPLACEMENT FUSES REPLACEMENT FUSES

3A 5A 10A 15A 20A 25A 30A
30A 50A

F10
R6
R16

F7

F6

F40
F11

A
R23

F8

F9
F27

F73

F75

F60

F40
F28

B
F16

F69

F70
R20

B
F29

F58

F30
F16

F69

F70
A
F52

F53

F35
R12

F25

F68
F56

F57
R11
R4 R1 R10

F21

F31
F22

F32

F61
B

F66

F54
F71
F23

F33

F34

F61
A
R22 R9 R13

F39

F37

F38
F5 F2

F1

F77
R14

F20

F76
F3 F4 R5
F78

F63
R18 R19

F41

F81
F45
F44
R15 R17

F24
R7
F19

F18

F17
F12

F13

F15

R2
F14

R3
A

F43

F49

F47
F26

F19

F18

F17
B

R24

R8

F64

F50

F48
F51
F46

F67

F74

F65 R25
R21
F79

07/21/2016 f546278

Fig. 9.1, VPDM Fuses and Relays

Fuse Mapping
Standard
FU/CB FU/CB Rating (S) Fuse Circuit Breaker
Label Description
POS Type (Amp) Optional p/n p/n
(O)
F1 FU 3A S 23-12537-003 Use FUSE p/n VPDM, Relay Coil, BAT1
F2 JCASE 50A S 23-13969-050 Use FUSE p/n House Load 1, BAT1
F3 JCASE 50A S 23-13969-050 Use FUSE p/n House Load 2, BAT1
F4 JCASE 50A S 23-13969-050 Use FUSE p/n Basic Load 1, BAT1
F5 JCASE 50A S 23-13969-050 Use FUSE p/n Basic Load 2, BAT1
Methane Detection/CPC/DEF
F6 FU 10A S 23-12537-010 Use FUSE p/n
Pump, PWR
F7 FU 5A* S 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n IPPC/Clock/Telematics, PWR
F8 FU, T2, T3 2A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Spot Lamp, BAT1
12 Volt Power Receptacle 3&4,
F9 FU, T2, T3 2A* S 23-12537-020 23-13126-220
Sleeper, BAT1
F10 FU, T2, T3 3A S 23-12537-003 23-13126-205 Reading Lamp, Front, BAT1
Sleeper Lamp/Auxiliary Fan,
F11 FU, T2, T3 10A* S 23-12537-010 23-13126-010
BAT1
12V Power Receptacle 5,
F12 FU, T2, T3 20A S 23-12537-020 23-13126-220
Sleeper, BAT1
F13 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Power Feed Output 4, BAT1
F14 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Power Feed Output 5, BAT1
F15 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Power Feed Output 6, BAT1
F16
FU 20A S 23-12537-020 Use FUSE p/n Radio, BAT1/PWR
A/B

9.2
Electrical System

Fuse Mapping
Standard
FU/CB FU/CB Rating (S) Fuse Circuit Breaker
Label Description
POS Type (Amp) Optional p/n p/n
(O)
F17 Fleet Management System,
FU, T2, T3 10A O 23-12537-010 23-13126-010
A/B BAT1/PWR
F18 12V Power Receptacle 1/Dash/
FU, T2 20A S 23-12537-020 23-13126-220
A/B Cigar, BAT1/IGN
F19 CB Radio/12 Volt Power
FU, T2 25A* S 23-12537-025 23-13126-225
A/B Receptacle 2, Dash, BAT1/IGN
12 Volt Power Receptacle
F20 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220
6/Refrigerator, BAT1
F21 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Power Feed Output 1, BAT1
F22 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Power Feed Output 2, BAT1
23F FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Power Feed Output 3, BAT1
F24 FU 20A O 23-12537-020 Use FUSE p/n Heated Seat, IGN
F25 FU, T2, T3 25A S 23-12537-025 23-13126-225 ABS Power Feed 2, BAT1
F26 FU, T2, T3 25A S 23-12537-025 23-13126-225 ABS Power Feed 1, BAT1
FCU/ACU HVAC Controller,
F27 FU 3A* S 23-12537-003 Use FUSE p/n
BAT1
F28 JCASE 30A S 23-13969-030 Use FUSE p/n CAB HVAC Fan Motor, BAT1
Sleeper HVAC Fan Motor,
F29 JCASE 30A S 23-13969-030 Use FUSE p/n
BAT1
Auxiliary Cab/Coolant Heater,
F30 FU, T2, T3 20A* S 23-12537-020 23-13126-220
BAT1
Tire Pressure/Transmission
F31 FU 5A* O 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n
Shift Control, BAT1
Central Gateway/Instrument
F32 FU 5A* S 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n
Cluster, BAT1
F33 FU, T2, T3 5A O 23-12537-005 23-13126-205 Expansion Fuse 3, BAT1
F34 FU, T2, T3 10A O 23-12537-010 23-13126-010 Air Suspension/ECAS, BAT1
F35 FU, T2, T3 10A S 23-12537-010 23-13126-010 Dash Splice Pack, BAT1
F37 FU, T2, T3 20A S 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Air Dryer Control
Lube/Air Dryer/Spit Valve/HTD
F38 FU, T2, T3 10A* O 23-12537-010 23-13126-010
Drain, CTRL
Fuel Water Separator Heater
F39 FU, T2, T3 30A S 23-12537-030 23-13126-030
Element, CTRL
F40 Auxiliary Cab/Auxiliary Coolant
FU 3A* O 23-12537-003 Use FUSE p/n
A/B Heater, Enable, BAT1
Fleet Management System,
F41 FU, T2, T3 5A O 23-12537-005 23-13126-205
IGN
F43 FU, T2, T3 30A S 23-12537-030 23-13126-030 Trailer ABS Connector, IGN
F44 FU, T2, T3 10A S 23-12537-010 23-13126-010 Dash Switch/Splice Pack, IGN
F45 FU, T2, T3 5A O 23-12537-005 23-13126-205 Expansion Fuse 4, IGN
Instrument Cluster/Cab HVAC
F46 FU 5A* S 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n
Controller, IGN
Transmission Control Unit
F47 FU, T2 10A O 23-12537-010 23-13126-210
(TCU), IGN
F48 FU 15A O 23-12537-015 Use FUSE p/n ATS Sensor, IGN
CPC/MCM/ACM/TCM/ECM,
F49 FU, T2 5A S 23-12537-005 23-13126-205
IGN

9.3
 Electrical System

Fuse Mapping
Standard
FU/CB FU/CB Rating (S) Fuse Circuit Breaker
Label Description
POS Type (Amp) Optional p/n p/n
(O)
Body Builder/OI Alarm/Lockout
F50 FU 10A O 23-12537-010 Use FUSE p/n
Solenoid,/Fuel Sender, IGN
F51 FU 5A O 23-12537-015 Use FUSE p/n ICM/Electric Fan, IGN
F52 FU, T2, T3 30A O 23-12537-030 23-13126-230 Expansion Fuse 1, BAT2
F53 FU, T2, T3 30A O 23-12537-030 23-13126-230 Expansion Fuse 2, BAT2
F54 FU, T2, T3 15A* S 23-12537-015 23-13126-215 DEF Line Heater, CTRL
F56 FU 5A S 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n Radio, ACC
F57 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 Amplifier, ACC
Auxiliary Mirror Heater, Driver/
F58 FU, T2, T3 15A* O 23-12537-015 23-13126-215
Passenger, CTRL
F60 FU, T2, T3 15A S 23-12537-015 23-13126-215 Aftertreatment System, CTRL
Trailer Option Power 1, CTRL/
F61 FU, T2, T3 20A O 23-12537-020 23-13126-220 BAT1

Lane Departure/Lane
F63 FU 10A O 23-12537-010 Use FUSE p/n
Guidance, IGN
Camera/Video Imaging
F64 FU 5A O 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n
System, IGN
Collision Avoidance/Obstacle
F65 FU 5A S 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n
Detection System, BAT1
F66 FU, T2, T3 A5* O 23-12537-005 23-13126-205 D+ Expansion, Signal 1&2
Common Telematics Platform
F67 FU 5A O 23-12537-005 Use FUSE p/n
(cTP), IGN
F68 FU, T2, T3 5A* O 23-12537-005 23-13126-205 Expansion Fuse 5/6, ACC
F69 Door Control Module, Driver
FU, T2, T3 25A S 23-12537-025 23-13126-225
A/B (DCMD), BAT1/PWR
Door Control Module,
F70
FU, T2, T3 25A S 23-12537-025 23-13126-225 Passenger (DCMP), BAT1/
A/B
PWR
F71 FU, T2 10A S 23-12537-010 23-13126-010 OBD J1939, BAT1
Common Telematics Platform
F73 FU, T2, T3 5A O 23-12537-005 23-13126-205
(cTP), PWR
Third Party Connector (3PC),
F74 FU 10A O 23-12537-010 Use FUSE p/n
IGN
Third Party Connector (3PC),
F75 FU, T2, T3 10A O 23-12537-010 23-13126-010
PWR
Third Party Connector (3PC),
F76 FU 10A O 23-12537-010 Use FUSE p/n
BAT1
F77 T2 7.5A S Use CB p/n 23-13126-207 LED Headlamp, Driver, BAT1
LED Headlamp, Passenger,
F78 T2 7.5A S Use CB p/n 23-13126-207
BAT1
F79 FU 15A O 23-12537-015 Use FUSE p/n DEF Pump, CTRL
Collision Avoidance/Obstacle
F81 FU 10A S 23-12537-010 Use FUSE p/n
Detection System, IGN
* Value shown is maximum design rating. When replacing fuse, circuit breaker, or relay, replace it with a similar value and type.

Table 9.1, Fuse Mapping

9.4
Electrical System

Relay Mapping
Standard (S)
Relay POS Relay Type Relay P/N Relay Label Description
Optional (O)
RE1 Bi-Stable 06-71082-000 S Bi-Stable House Load 1
RE2 Bi-Stable 06-71082-000 S Bi-Stable House Load 2
RE3 Bi-Stable 06-71082-000 S Bi-Stable Basic Load 1
RE4 Bi-Stable 06-71082-000 S Bi-Stable Basic Load 2
RE5 Hi-Current 23-13124-000 S HCR D+/Alternator Charging
RE6 Micro 23-13265-012 O Micro Auxiliary Cab/Auxiliary Coolant Heater
RE7 Hi-Current 23-13124-000 S HCR Ignition
RE8 Hi-Current 23-13124-000 S HCR Ignition
RE9 Mini 23-11276-011 O MINI Trailer
RE10 Micro 23-13265-012 S MICRO DEF Line Heater
RE11 Hi-Current 23-13124-000 S HCR Accessory
RE12 Mini 23-11276-011 O MINI Mirror Heat
RE13 U-Micro 23-13893-000 O U-MICRO DEF Pump/Auto Neutral
RE14 U-Micro 23-13893-000 O U-MICRO PTO1
RE15 U-Micro 23-13893-000 O U-MICRO PTO 2
RE16 U-Micro 23-13893-000 S U-MICRO Aftertreatment System
RE17 U-Micro 23-13893-000 O U-MICRO Remote Start Stop
RE18 U-Micro 23-13893-000 O U-MICRO Spare Relay 1
RE19 U-Micro 23-13893-000 O U-MICRO Spare Relay 2
RE20 Micro 23-13265-012 O MICRO Spare Relay 3
RE21 Micro 23-13265-012 O MICRO Spare Relay 4
RE22 Mini 23-11276-011 O MINI Spare Relay 5
RE23 Hi-Current 23-13124-000 O HCR Spare Relay 6
RE24 U-Micro 23-13893-000 S U-MICRO PT Early Wake Up
RE25 Micro 23-13265-012 O MICRO DEF Pump
Table 9.2, Relay Mapping

Single Signal Detect and Actuation IMPORTANT: The ignition should be turned off
Module (sSAM) before turning the CLDS on or off.
Your New Cascadia vehicle may be equipped with an
The single signal detect and actuation module optional cab load disconnect switch (CLDS). See
(sSAM) combines chassis power distribution, cab Fig. 9.2. The CLDS is used to break (or open) select
power distribution, and modular switch field functions circuits between the battery and the BCA. It mini-
in a single ECU. The sSAM reads input information mizes draw on the battery, and should be set to OFF
from sensors, switches, and databus messages, and when the vehicle is parked for an extended period of
drives output and CAN messages. The sSAM is lo- time.
cated behind the lower dash panel.
When the CLDS switch is set to ON, a red LED indi-
Cab Load Disconnect Switch (CLDS) cator illuminates.
The CLDS may be mounted in a variety of location,
WARNING including:
• inside the cab on the outboard side of the
Turning the cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) to driver’s seat;
the off position does not disconnect power to all
electrical components (e.g. the starter and • behind the cab on the driver’s side;
sSAM). To work on the vehicle safely, the nega- • at the battery box.
tive leads must be disconnected from the battery.

9.5
 Electrical System

• identification lights
• turn-signal indicators in the ICU (alternating)
• rear turn-signal lights

sSAM Failure
If emergency power mode is due to an sSAM internal
failure, the gauges will become unresponsive but the
engine will remain running until it is turned off.

05/13/2009 f545527
Progressive Low Voltage
Disconnect
Fig. 9.2, Cab Load Disconnect Switch
The progressive low voltage disconnect (PLVD) fea-
If the CLDS is turned to the off position while the ve- ture protects the batteries from excessive discharge
hicle is running, the emergency power system will by disconnecting certain circuits from battery power
activate. The powertrain PDM will receive power from supply. This allows the batteries to maintain accept-
the emergency power feed, but the batteries will not able charge to restart the vehicle.
be charging. See the Emergency Power Supply
heading below for details. When battery voltage drops below a predetermined
value, loads designated as comfort loads (priority
level I) are shut down first. Then loads designated as
Emergency Power Supply house loads (priority level II) are shut down. If neces-
The New Cascadia electrical system has an emer- sary, basic loads (priority level III) are shut down last.
gency power circuit that supplies battery power for PLVD allows the driver to continue using critical
exterior lighting. The emergency power circuit is live loads, while noncritical loads are temporarily unavail-
even when the CLDS is turned off. able. Calculations for disconnecting loads are based
on battery voltage, ignition switch status, and engine
WARNING rpm. Also, a time delay is implemented for the shut-
down and reactivation of loads to avoid unnecessary
If the emergency power supply system activates, cycling of loads when battery voltage is close to
do not shut down the engine until the vehicle is shutdown thresholds.
in a safe position to do so. It will not be able to One minute before the comfort loads or house loads
be restarted until the problem is corrected, possi- are shut down, the alarm in the instrument cluster
bly leaving the vehicle in an unsafe situation. beeps. No alarm sounds before basic loads are shut
The emergency power supply feature allows for the down.
vehicle to be driven off the highway with the exterior If the interior lights have been shut down by PLVD,
lighting remaining on in the event of an electrical pressing one of the interior light switches (if
problem. equipped) brings the interior lights back on.
When the ignition is in the ON position, the emer-
gency power supply will cause the following lamps to Inverter/Charger
flash:
The optional 1500- or 1800-watt Inverter/Charger
• dash panel lights powers small appliances and other electric equip-
• clearance lights ment. It is located in the driver-side luggage compart-
ment. See Fig. 9.3. The unit has one three-pin GFIC
• front marker lights OUT connector, one three-pin GFIC IN connector,
• side marker lights and two AC power outlets.
• trailer taillights
• rear stop lights

9.6
Electrical System

1 2
FREEDOM HF
STATUS
7
Utility Input Voltage (V)
Battery Select Input Current (A)
Fault Output Power (kW)

3 4 5 6
09/09/2016 f546067a
1. Power 5. Input Current LED
2. LED Display 6. Output Power LED
3. Select 7. Status LED
4. Input Voltage LED
Fig. 9.4, Inverter/Charger Display Panel (Xantrex
Freedom)

1 2 3

True Sine Wave Inverter

12-110-1800

SELECT

Status
02/17/2017 f546066 Utility Input Voltage (V)

7 Battery
Input Current (A)

Fig. 9.3, Inverter/Charger Fault

Output power (KW)

DANGER
Do not store gasoline, flammable material, or any 6 5 4
component with a connection to the fuel system 10/07/2016 f546642
in the storage compartment with the inverter/ 1. Power 5. Input Current LED
charger. The unit contains equipment that may 2. LED Display 6. Output Power LED
produce sparks. Storing flammable or electrical 3. Select 7. Status LED
equipment in proximity to the unit could result in 4. Input Voltage LED
fire or explosion hazards, which could result in
Fig. 9.5, Inverter/Charger Display Panel (Eaton)
serious injury or death.
The display on the sleeper control panel provides
information about the operation of the unit. See
Fig. 9.4 (Xantrex Freedom) or Fig. 9.5 (Eaton). Refer
to Table 9.3 for details.

9.7
 Electrical System

Display Panel Functions

Number Name Function
Press the power button for one second to turn on the unit.
Press and hold the button for five seconds to enter the feature settings mode, then
press the button to toggle between the following modes:
• Charging Current Setting
1 Power • Inverter Mode Setting
• Alarm Setting
• Shutdown Setting
• Factory Setting
Refer to the owner’s manual for more information.
2 LED Display The LED display screen shows status information and fault codes.
The Select button changes the display or settings.
Press the Select button to cycle through the setting options. Press and hold the
Select button for five seconds to save the setting. Refer to the owner’s manual for
more information.
• In "Inverter Mode Setting" press the button to turn the inverter mode ON or
OFF.
• With the inverter mode ON, press the button to choose what appears on the
3 Select LED display screen: Input Voltage, Input Current, or Output Power. Details are
provided below.
NOTE: The unit is in "Inverter Mode" when shore power is not present and the
unit is using the battery to power the appliances connected to it.
• In an alarm condition, press and hold the button for two seconds to disable or
enable the audible alarm.
• In "Charging Current Setting" mode, press the button to select the charger
current.
In inverter mode, when Input Voltage is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
4 Input Voltage LED
and the display will show the input voltage.
In inverter mode, when Input Current is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
5 Input Current LED
and the display will show the input current.
In inverter mode, when Output Power is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
6 Output Power LED
and the display will show the output power.

9.8
Electrical System

Display Panel Functions

Number Name Function
The Status indicator displays one of three colored lights that indicates the unit’s mode
of operation:
• Green: Utility (Shore Power Mode)
A solid green light indicates that the battery is fully charged.
A flashing green light indicates that the unit is charging the battery.
• Yellow: Battery (Inverter Mode)
7 Status A solid yellow light indicates that the unit is using the battery to supply AC
power.
A flashing yellow light indicates that the unit is in inverter mode, but that AC
shore power is detected and is transferring to shore power mode within 20
seconds.
• Red: Fault Condition
The fault status light indicates a fault condition with the unit. Refer to the owner’s
manual for fault code information and troubleshooting procedures.
Table 9.3, Display Panel Functions

For more information about troubleshooting, settings,

and other features, refer to the owners manual in-
cluded with the inverter/charger.

9.9
 10
Engine Starting, Operation,
and Shutdown
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Engine Protection—Warning and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown

Engine Starting may not be equipped with the STARTER

BLOCKED function.
This engine chapter is to serve as a guide for best
practices only. Each engine model may have operat- 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and
ing characteristics that are unique to that particular allow the gauge sweep to complete. See
engine, and will be documented in the engine manu- Fig. 10.1. The audible alert will sound for ap-
facturer’s literature. Always refer to specific instruc- proximately four seconds.
tions and recommendations from the engine manu-
facturer.
NOTE: Before starting the engine, read Chap-
ter 3, Instruments, and Chapter 4, Driver
Controls. Read the engine manufacturer’s oper-
ating instructions before starting the engine.

WARNING
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
air inlet opening in the air intake in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury or property 02/03/2017 f610805
damage.
Fig. 10.1, Ignition Switch
IMPORTANT: The New Cascadia vehicle is
equipped with starter interlocks to enhance reli- NOTE: The driver display screen may present a
ability and safety. Anti-grinding, starter pinion, STARTER BLOCKED message if the gauge
and thermal protection logic limit the amount of sweep is not completed, the transmission is in
time and conditions for starter engagement. gear, or the starter has overheated.
Cranking may be limited from 5 to 15 seconds,
5. Once the gauge sweep has completed, turn the
with a 30-second cool-down period, as deter- ignition key to the START position. Release the
mined by the protection logic. If the engine is key the moment the engine starts.
turning, the starter will not engage. Depending
on the transmission option, the starter will not If the vehicle is equipped with an engine start
engage if the clutch is not fully depressed, or if switch (see Fig. 10.2), hold the switch down
while turning the ignition key to the START posi-
the transmission is not in neutral. tion. Release the switch and the key the moment
IMPORTANT: The starter can not be used for the engine starts.
priming the fuel system. If the fuel/water separa-
tor filter is replaced, and the fuel system needs
to be primed, see the engine manufacturer’s
operating instructions.
1. Before engine start-up, complete the pre- and
post-trip inspections and maintenance proce-
dures in Chapter 23. ENGINE
START
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in neutral. On vehicles 09/15/2016 f611456
with manual transmissions, fully depress the
clutch pedal. Fig. 10.2, Engine Start Switch
NOTE: Depending on local jurisdictional emis-
sions regulations, vehicles and/or engines that
are domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada

10.1
 Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown

NOTICE Engine Operation

Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge
Safety and Environmental
indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine Considerations
if oil pressure does not build within approxi-
mately ten seconds. Check to determine the WARNING
cause of the problem. Operating the engine with
no oil pressure will damage the engine. Do not operate the engine in an area where flam-
6. It is not necessary to idle the engine before en- mable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes
gaging or starting the operation, but load should are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
be applied gradually during the warm-up period where flammable liquids or gases are being
until the oil temperature reaches 140°F (60°C). handled. Failure to observe these precautions
could result in serious injury or death.
7. Apply load gradually during the warm-up period.
All engines on Freightliner vehicles comply with the
requirements of the Federal (U.S.) Clean Air Act.
NOTICE Once an engine is placed in service, the responsibil-
ity for meeting both state and local regulations is with
If the oil pressure gauge indicates no oil pres- the owner/operator.
sure, shut down the engine within approximately
ten seconds to avoid engine damage. IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic-
tional emissions guidelines, vehicles that are
8. Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in lu-
domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may
bricating oil pressure or mechanical malfunction
in the lubricating oil system. Minimum oil pres- not have engines and/or emissions aftertreat-
sure at idle is 7 psi (50 kPa). ment systems that are compliant with EPA07,
EPA10, GHG14, or GHG17 regulations.
Cold-Weather Starting
See the engine manufacturer’s operation manual for
NOTICE
starting aids that are approved for specific engines. It is extremely important that the following guide-
lines be followed for engines that comply with
Starting After Extended Shutdown EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may
Before engine start-up, complete the engine pretrip occur to the aftertreatment device, and the war-
inspections in Chapter 23. ranty may be compromised.
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
NOTICE fur content or less.
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine
Failure to eliminate water-diluted lubricating oil lube oil or kerosene.
may lead to serious engine damage at startup.
• Use only engine lube oil with a sulfated ash
An engine in storage for an extended period of time
level less than 1.0 wt%; API CJ-4, CK-4, and
(over winter, for example) may accumulate water in
FA-4 oils meet this requirement.
the oil pan through normal condensation of moisture
on the internal surfaces of the engine. Oil diluted by
water cannot provide adequate bearing protection at
start-up. For this reason, change the engine oil and
filters after extended storage.

10.2
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown

A Top Tier™ compliant fuel is recommended. Look for Prolonged idling of engines is not recommended, and
the symbol that denotes a Top Tier compliant fuel; is illegal in some states. Idling produces sulfuric acid
see Fig. 10.3. that is absorbed by the lubricating oil, and eats into
bearings, rings, valve stems, and engine surfaces. If
you must idle the engine for cab heating or cooling,
use the high idle function of the cruise control
switches. An idle speed of 900 rpm should be
enough to provide cab heat in ambient temperatures
that are above freezing.
04/27/2017 f470698
If the engine is programmed with an idle shutdown
Fig. 10.3, Top Tier Fuel Symbol timer, 90 seconds before the preset shutdown time,
the CHECK engine light will begin to flash at a rapid
Adequate maintenance of the engine and the diesel rate. If the position of the clutch pedal or service
particulate filter (DPF) are the responsibility of the brake changes during this final 90 seconds the idle
owner/operator, and are essential to keep the emis- shutdown timer will be disabled until reset.
sion levels low. Good operating practices, regular
maintenance, and correct adjustments are factors Cold-Weather Operation
that will help keep emissions within the regulations.
Satisfactory performance of a diesel engine operating
The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning in low ambient temperatures requires modification of
system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if the engine, surrounding equipment, operating prac-
the engine malfunctions. If the driver doesn’t under- tices, and maintenance procedures. The lower the
stand how the warning system works, an engine temperature, the greater the amount of modification
shutdown could occur, causing a safety hazard. See required. For service products approved for use in
Chapter 11 for more information. cold weather for your engine, see the engine manu-
facturer’s engine operation manual.
Engine Break-In If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained,
Each engine must pass a full-load operating test on maintenance costs will increase due to greater en-
a dynamometer before shipment, thereby eliminating gine wear. If the engine coolant gets too cold, raw
the need for a break-in. Before running the engine fuel will wash the lubricating oil off the cylinder walls
for the first time, follow the instructions in the manu- and dilute the crankcase oil, causing all moving parts
facturer’s engine operation manual. of the engine to suffer from poor lubrication.
If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the
Normal Operation precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are
taken, ordinary cold weather will not cause difficulty
WARNING in starting or loss of efficiency.
The following points are important to observe when
Do not operate the engine in an area where flam- operating in cold weather.
mable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes
are present. Shut off the engine when in an area • Check for cracks in the battery cases, for cor-
where flammable liquids or gases are being rosion of the terminals, and for tightness of the
handled. Failure to observe these precautions cable clamps at the terminals.
could result in serious injury or death. • Charge the batteries to full capacity. Replace
Every engine has an operating range in which it per- damaged batteries.
forms most efficiently. The operating range extends
• If equipped, turn off the load disconnect switch
from maximum torque rpm at the low end, to engine
after the engine is shut down to prevent battery
rated speed at the high end. Most engines deliver
discharge.
best fuel economy when operated in the low- and
mid-speed segments of the efficiency range and pro- • Have the alternator output checked at an au-
duce maximum horsepower at rated speed, which is thorized Freightliner service provider.
also the recommended maximum speed of the en-
gine. For further engine-specific information, refer to • Check the condition and tension of the drive
the engine manufacturer’s operation manual. belts.

10.3
 Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown

• Refer to the engine manufacturer’s operation All engines used on Freightliner vehicles are altitude-
manual for recommended heaters, low- compensated by the use of a turbocharger. This re-
viscosity lubricating oils, winter-grade fuels, duces smoky exhaust at high altitudes, requires less
and approved coolants. downshifting, and allows the engine to make better
use of its fuel. Nevertheless, shift gears as needed to
• Periodically check the coolant mixing ratio
avoid excessive exhaust smoke.
(concentration of antifreeze in the coolant). Add
more if necessary.
• At outside temperatures below -4°F (-20°C), a
Engine Shutdown
coolant preheater is recommended. 1. With the vehicle stopped, set the parking brake
and place the transmission in neutral.
NOTICE
NOTICE
For Detroit engines (EPA07 and newer), use of a
winterfront is not recommended, as it can cause Idle the engine one to two minutes before shut-
false fault codes with the engine and aftertreat- ting it down. After hard operation, shutting down
ment system, and possible emission component the engine without idling may cause damage to
failures. the turbocharger.
If using a winterfront, leave at least 25% of the grille 2. Allow the engine to idle one to two minutes be-
opening exposed in sectioned stripes that run per- fore shutting it down. This allows the lubricating
pendicular to the charge-air-cooler tube-flow direc- oil and the coolant to carry heat away from the
tion. This assures even cooling across each tube, combustion chambers, bearings, shafts, and
and reduces header-to-tube stress, and possible seals.
chance of component failure. For engine-specific
guidelines, see below: 3. Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the
engine.
Cummins engines: A winterfront may be used to im-
prove cab heating while idling, and only when the
ambient temperature remains below 10°F (-12°C).
Engine Protection—Warning
Detroit engines: Use of a winterfront is not recom- and Shutdown
mended. Using a winterfront can cause excessive The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning
fan run time, increased fuel consumption, and failure system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if
of the DEF system heaters to operate correctly, re- necessary. If the driver doesn’t understand how the
sulting in fault codes, poor performance, and power warning system works, the driver may not be able to
reduction. A winterfront should only be used tempo- utilize the advantage of the advance warning system
rarily in the following situations: to pull over appropriately.
• To improve cab heating while idling in an ex- The engine will begin a warning and derate and/or
tremely cold ambient temperature; shutdown process if the engine coolant temperature,
• When the ambient temperature remains below coolant level, engine oil pressure, or exhaust after-
-22°F (-30°C) and the engine is unable to treatment system (ATS) reach preset levels. On
maintain a running coolant temperature of some engines, the warning process will begin when
175°F (80°C) during normal over-the-road the engine oil temperature, engine coolant tempera-
operation. ture, or the intake air temperature reach preset lev-
els. Detroit™ engines may also begin the warning
High-Altitude Operation and shutdown process if water is detected in the fuel.

Engines lose horsepower when operated at high alti- See the engine manufacturer’s operation manual for
tude because the air is too thin to burn as much fuel specific details for your vehicle. See Chapter 12 for
as at sea level. This loss equals about three percent the warning and shutdown modes associated with
for each 1000 ft (300 m) altitude above sea level for the ATS.
a naturally aspirated engine. Electronic engine protection can be specified as ei-
ther SHUTDOWN or WARNING and DERATE.

10.4
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown

WARNING
When the STOP engine or CHECK engine lamp
illuminates, most engines are programmed to
shut down automatically within 30 seconds. The
driver must immediately move the vehicle to a
safe location at the side of the road to prevent
causing a hazardous situation that could cause
bodily injury, property damage, or severe damage
to the engine.
In SHUTDOWN mode, the red STOP engine lamp
will illuminate when the problem is serious enough to
reduce power or speed. See Fig. 10.4. Engine power 09/9/2016 f611451
will ramp down, then the engine will shut down if the NOTE: On vehicles with Detroit engines only, the time
problem continues while in derate mode. The driver remaining before shutdown is displayed.
has 30 or 60 seconds (depending on the critical fault
type) after the STOP engine lamp illuminates to Fig. 10.5, Shutdown Alert
move the vehicle safely off the road. If the vehicle
cannot be moved to a safe location within that time,
turn the ignition switch to OFF for at least five sec- OVER
onds, then restart the engine. Repeat this action until RIDE
the vehicle is safely off the road.
NOTE: In addition to the warning lamp, the
driver display screen will present a warning
ENG
message when the engine is in SHUTDOWN SHDN
mode. See Fig. 10.5. For vehicles with Detroit
engines only, the time remaining before shut-
03/29/2016 f611345
down is displayed.
Fig. 10.6, Shutdown Override Switch

NOTICE
CHECK STOP
When the derate process begins, immediately get
the vehicle serviced in order to prevent severe
damage to the engine.
07/09/2009
1 2 3 f611036
Detroit engines may begin a warning and derate pro-
1. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) cess if water is detected in the fuel, or for high en-
2. CHECK Engine Lamp gine coolant temperature. In WARNING and DER-
3. STOP Engine Lamp ATE mode, the CHECK engine, STOP engine, or MIL
Fig. 10.4, Engine Warning Lamps lamp will illuminate to indicate an engine problem
that requires service and the engine controls will
Do not operate the vehicle further until the problem begin a derate of engine output. Continuing to run
causing the shutdown has been corrected. the engine while it is in derate mode could cause
severe damage to the engine.
Some vehicles may have a shutdown override
switch, which can be used to momentarily override
the shutdown sequence. This switch resets the shut-
down timer, restoring power to the level before the
derate. The switch must be pressed again after five
seconds to obtain a subsequent override. See
Fig. 10.6.

10.5
 11
Optional Engine Systems
Engine Idle Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Optimized Idle® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Optional Engine Systems

Engine Idle Limiting In cold startability mode, Optimized Idle starts the
engine when engine oil temperature drops to a pre-
Idle Shutdown Timer set lower limit (programmable). The engine is shut
down when engine oil temperature reaches an upper
This feature is an optional 1- to 100-minute idle shut- limit (programmable) unless the requirements of
down system with a timer on the driver display other active modes require the engine to keep run-
screen. Its purpose is to conserve fuel by eliminating ning.
excessive idling. Idle shutdown timing and param-
eters are programmable. See the engine manufactur- Interior comfort mode controls the temperature set
er’s operation manual for specific details for your ve- point, which is the desired temperature of the cab
hicle. and sleeper, and the comfort zone, which is the al-
lowed temperature deviation from the set point be-
fore the engine starts.
Optimized Idle®
In extreme ambient conditions, comfort mode may
Optimized Idle is an optional feature on vehicles stay on continuously.
equipped with Detroit engines only. With the vehicle
parked, Optimized Idle reduces engine idle time by In battery mode, the engine runs for 2 hours before
running the engine only as required. shutting down. On vehicles without BPHS, the engine
will run an additional 2 hours in extended mode if
Optimized Idle automatically shuts down and restarts necessary, and continuously in continuous mode.
the engine as needed to: When in continuous mode, the driver display will indi-
• keep the engine oil temperature between pro- cate Optimized Idle status as "continuous battery
grammed limits; mode." Continuous mode may indicate a problem,
such as a bad battery.
• maintain battery voltage;
NOTE: If the mode settings are changed while
• keep the cab and sleeper areas at the thermo- in one mode, the system may continue running
stat setting; and in another mode.
• in coordination with Battery-Powered HVAC When Optimized Idle is on, it may turn off these
System (BPHS) (if equipped), maintain the bat- functions to reduce stress on the batteries:
tery and assist in HVAC.
• Cab climate control fan
The benefits of the system include reduced engine
idle time, fuel savings, reduction of exhaust emis- • Sleeper climate control fan
sions and noise, increased starter and engine life, • Mirror heat
and reduced chance of dead batteries.
• Fuel/water separator heat
Optimized Idle operates in the following modes:
• Seat heat
• Cold startability and battery modes: Keeps the
battery charged and engine oil temperature • Advertising light
between programmed limits.
• Auxiliary circulation fan (windshield)
• Interior comfort mode (sleeper cabs without
• Air dryer
BPHS only): Keeps the cab and sleeper at a
constant preset temperature, in addition to all
functions available in cold startability and bat- Activating Optimized Idle
tery modes. Extended and continuous run NOTE: Turning the sleeper HVAC fan off will
modes allow the engine to keep running longer turn off the interior comfort mode, until the fan is
if necessary.
turned back on.
• Interior comfort mode with BPHS (sleeper cabs
1. Set the parking brake.
with BPHS only): Keeps the cab and sleeper at
a constant preset temperature, in addition to all 2. Close and secure the hood, if it is open.
functions available in cold startability and bat-
tery modes.

11.1
 Optional Engine Systems

3. Allow the engine to idle if it is running. If the en-

gine is not running, turn the key to the ON posi-
tion.
4. Put the transmission in neutral.
5. Navigate to the Optimized Idle screen on the
driver display. See Fig. 11.1.

09/9/2016 f611422

Fig. 11.3, Optimized Idle State Screen

05/20/2016 f611420

Fig. 11.1, Optimized Idle Start Screen

6. Press OK on the steering wheel switch pod to

view the mode option screen. Turn on the interior 09/09/2016 f611428a
comfort mode (sleeper cabs only) if desired.
Fig. 11.4, Optimized Idle Telltale
7. Select OK to enable Optimized Idle. See
Fig. 11.2. The current Optimized Idle state is dis- 8. If the interior comfort mode is activated (sleeper
played. See Fig. 11.3. When Optimized Idle is cabs only), set the desired temperature and fan
active, the Optimized Idle telltale illuminates at speed on the sleeper HVAC controls. The allow-
the bottom of the driver display. See Fig. 11.4. If able temperature range for Optimized Idle opera-
Optimized Idle fails to start, see the driver dis- tion is 65 to 80°F (18 to 27°C).
play for information.
Optimized Idle will operate the engine, starting
and turning it off as needed to maintain battery
charge, engine oil temperature, and cab/sleeper
temperature.
NOTE: If the hood is opened or the parking
brake is released, Optimized Idle will be deacti-
vated. Restoring conditions (e.g. closing the
hood or applying the parking brake, and setting
the transmission in neutral) re-activates Opti-
mized Idle.

Deactivating Optimized Idle

Optimized Idle can be shut down by:
09/09/2016 f611421
• using the Optimized Idle menu screens on the
Fig. 11.2, Optimized Idle Mode Selection Screen driver display;
• turning off the ignition;

11.2
Optional Engine Systems

• using the drive-away feature, as follows. 7. To deactivate PTO, press the PTO switch again.
1. If the engine is running: Release the parking When the light in the switch goes out, power to
the PTO is shut off.
brakes, put the transmission in gear
(automated/automatic transmissions), or de-
press the clutch (manual transmissions).
2. Let the engine return to base idle. The tell-
tale will turn off. Optimized Idle is now dis-
abled.

Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor

WARNING
To avoid injury, do not install a PTO that is not
Detroit Diesel approved onto a Detroit™ Trans-
mission. Use of a non-Detroit Diesel approved
PTO with a Detroit Transmission could result in
unintended operation which could lead to severe
personal injury.
Engine power takeoffs (PTO) tap into engine power
to run auxiliary devices, such as hydraulic pumps
that power additional equipment. The following are
general guidelines for operating a PTO.
1. Set the parking brake and put the transmission in
neutral.
2. Press the dash PTO switch. Release the switch
when the light begins to blink.
When the light illuminates steadily, the PTO is
engaged and ready to operate. In stationary
mode, the vehicle must remain in neutral with the
parking brake set.
3. To activate mobile mode, shift from neutral to
reverse, 1st, or 2nd gear. The clutch will open
and the PTO will disengage for a moment.
4. Touch the accelerator pedal to close the clutch
and engage the PTO in mobile mode. The PTO
may be operated with the transmission in neutral
or reverse, and 1st and 2nd gears only.
NOTE: Do not attempt to change gears while
the vehicle is moving. The transmission will ig-
nore the request.
5. To deactivate mobile mode, bring the vehicle to a
stop. The clutch will open and shut down power
to the PTO.
6. To resume stationary mode, shift to neutral. The
PTO will engage.

11.3
 12
Emissions and Fuel
Efficiency
Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Fuel Consumption Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
EPA-Regulated Emissions Aftertreatment Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

Greenhouse Gas Emissions IMPORTANT: Using non-specification fuels or

oils can lead to shortened diesel particulate filter
and Fuel Consumption (DPF) cleaning or replacement intervals. For
Standards example, using CI-4 Plus oil with 1.3% sulfated
ash (30% more ash content) may result in the
Vehicles and/or engines manufactured after Decem- need for DPF cleaning or replacement 20 to
ber 31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada 30% sooner than would normally be required.
are required to meet all EPA and NHTSA regulations
effective as of the vehicle build date. Engines manu- IMPORTANT: See the engine manufacturer’s
factured between January 1, 2007 and December 31, operation manual for complete details and op-
2009 meet EPA07 requirements. Engines manufac- eration of the ATS.
tured between January 1, 2010 and December 31,
2012 meet EPA10 requirements. Engines manufac- Euro V Emission Compliant Engines
tured from January 1, 2013 meet NHTSA and EPA
2014 fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emission for Export
standards (GHG14) requirements. Engines manufac- IMPORTANT: Depending on local jurisdictional
tured from January 1, 2016 meet NHTSA and EPA
guidelines, vehicles that are domiciled outside of
2017 fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emission
standards (GHG17) requirements. the U.S. and Canada may not have emissions
aftertreatment systems (ATS) that are compliant
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional with EPA regulations.
requirements as specified by GHG14 requirements.
Model year 2017 and later vehicles meet similar re- Vehicles sold with Euro V engines for export are
quirements as specified by GHG17 requirements. required to use diesel with a maximum sulfur
These vehicles are equipped with components that content as follows:
increase fuel efficiency and reduce GHG emissions.
Components may include, but are not limited to, low- • Cummins Engines 50 ppm (tolerant to 500
rolling resistance tires; aerodynamic devices such as ppm)
hood, cab/sleeper extenders, and fuel tank fairings; • Detroit Engines 50 ppm
vehicle speed limiter; and idle shutdown timer. If re-
placement of any drag-reducing component is re- See Fig. 12.1 for an example of the label.
quired, the replacement component must meet or
exceed the drag reduction performance of the origi-

USA DIÉSEL CON

nally installed component in order to maintain compli-
ance with GHG14 and GHG17 requirements.

EPA-Regulated Emissions 50 PPM MÁXIMO

Aftertreatment Systems
DE AZUFRE
NOTICE 24-01472-002

Follow these guidelines for engines that comply 06/11/2018 f080203

with EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may (Use diesel with a maximum sulfur content of 50 ppm)
occur to the aftertreatment device (ATD) and the
Fig. 12.1, Euro V Engine Label (Detroit engine label
warranty may be compromised.
shown)
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
fur content or less. EPA10 and Newer Engines
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine The EPA mandates that all engines built after De-
lube oil or kerosene. cember 31, 2009 must reduce the level of emissions
• Engine lube oil must have a sulfated ash exhausted by the engine to the following levels:
level less than 1.0 wt %; API CJ-4, CK-4, • Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) – 0.2 g/bhp-hr
and FA-4 oils meet this requirement.

12.1
 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

• Particulate Matter (PM) – .01 g/bhp-hr indicating that a regen is required. See Fig. 12.2.
To meet EPA guidelines, engines that are compliant The driver must either bring the vehicle up to high-
way speed to increase the load (thus starting an ac-
with EPA10 and newer regulations use an ATS
where the exhaust first passes over the diesel oxida- tive regen), or park the vehicle and initiate a parked
regen. See Regen Operations, below, for instructions
tion catalyst (DOC), then passes through the diesel
on initiating a parked regen.
particulate filter (DPF), which traps soot particles.
The soot is burned to ash during a process called
regeneration (regen). A Selective Catalytic Reduction
Regen Operations
(SCR) device is used to reduce NOx downstream of Parked regen is initiated by selecting OK when the
the engine. After exhaust gases leave the DPF, a driver display screen shows "Parked Regen Re-
controlled quantity of diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is quired." See Fig. 12.2. If the vehicle is equipped with
injected into the exhaust stream. In the presence of the optional digital STOP REGEN switch, parked
heat, DEF is converted to ammonia gas, which re- regen can be stopped by selecting OK while the
acts with NOx in the selective catalyst chamber to regen is in progress. See Fig. 12.2.
yield nitrogen and water vapor, which exit through
the tailpipe. Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen inhibit
switch. See Fig. 12.3. To stop a regen in progress or
Regeneration prevent the start of a regen, press the lower half of
the switch. Regen is then delayed until the switch is
The harder an engine works, the better it disposes of no longer active.
soot. If the exhaust temperature is high enough, a
NOTE: Parked regen can be initiated only when
process called passive regeneration (regen) occurs
as the vehicle is driven normally. However, if the en- the DPF lamp is illuminated.
gine isn’t running hot enough, the electronic controls
may initiate an active regen, whereby extra fuel is WARNING
injected into the exhaust stream to superheat and
reduce the soot trapped in the DPF to ash. Active During parked regen, exhaust temperatures are
regen happens only when the vehicle is moving very high and could cause a fire, heat damage to
above a certain speed, determined by the engine objects or materials, or personal injury to per-
manufacturer. See your engine operation manual for sons near the exhaust outlet.
complete details. Both active and passive regen hap-
Before initiating a parked regeneration, make cer-
pen automatically, without driver input.
tain the exhaust outlets are directed away from
structures, vegetation, flammable materials, and
WARNING anything else that may be harmed by prolonged
exposure to high heat.
Active regeneration can occur automatically any-
time the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas tem- To initiate a parked regen, perform the following
perature could reach 1500°F (800°C), which is hot steps.
enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects 1. Park the vehicle away from all flammable materi-
or materials, or personal injury to persons near als, put the transmission in neutral, and set the
the exhaust outlet. The exhaust temperature can parking brake.
remain high even after the vehicle has stopped.
When stopping the vehicle shortly after an auto- 2. Start and warm the engine until the coolant tem-
matic regen, ensure the exhaust outlets are di- perature is at least 150°F (66°C).
rected away from structures, vegetation, flam- 3. Select OK when the DPF screen is displayed on
mable materials, and anything else that may be the driver display screen. See Fig. 12.2. Select
harmed by exposure to high heat. OK again to confirm regen. As the regen process
See Regen Switches, below, for instructions on is initiated, engine rpm increases and the HEST
preventing automatic regen if necessary. lamp illuminates to indicate extremely high ex-
haust temperatures.
When operating conditions do not allow for ATD filter
cleaning by active or passive regen, the vehicle may IMPORTANT: The driver is responsible for
require a driver-activated parked regen. When this ensuring, during the entire regen cycle, that
occurs, the driver display screen presents a message anything that could be harmed by exposure to

12.2
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

A B
06/10/2016 f611396

A. Start Regen Message Screen B. Stop Regen Message Screen

Fig. 12.2, Parked Regen Message Screens

• depress the clutch pedal, brake pedal, or

accelerator pedal;
• select OK on the parked regen screen
while the regen is active, then select OK
again to confirm;
• press and hold the regen inhibit switch until
REGEN
OFF idle returns to normal;
• shut down the engine.
04/18/2016 f611395
ATS Warning Lamps and Messages
Fig. 12.3, Regen Inhibit Switch
There are three warning lamps that alert the driver of
high heat does not come in contact with the high exhaust temperature, the need to perform a
exhaust gases flowing from the outlets. parked regen or service the DPF, or of an engine
fault that affects emissions. A decal attached to the
4. The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes, driver’s sun visor explains the ATS warning lamps.
at which time engine idle speed drops to normal
and the vehicle can be driven normally. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
HEST lamp is extinguished when vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h) or the system has A steadily illuminated yellow malfunction indicator
cooled to normal operating temperature. lamp (MIL) indicates an engine fault that affects
emissions. See Fig. 12.4.
5. To stop a parked regen at any time during the
process:

12.3
 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

DPF Status Lamp and Messages Table 12.1 (Detroit engines) or Table 12.2 (Cummins
engines).
When soot accumulates in the DPF, the driver dis-
play screen presents a DPF status bar. As the soot If the DPF status lamp blinks and the driver display
level in the DPF reaches 60%, the DPF status lamp screen shows a red status bar (90% full), initiate a
illuminates. See Fig. 12.5. Perform a parked regen parked regen immediately in order to prevent an en-
or bring the vehicle up to highway speed to increase gine derate.
the load (thus starting an active regen). After the soot If the DPF status lamp blinks, and the driver display
level in the DPF reaches 80%, a parked regen is screen shows a DPF status bar that is fully red
necessary. (100% full), begin a parked regen in order to prevent
For an explanation of DPF zones, message screens, an engine shutdown. Park the vehicle and perform a
warning lamps, and available regen modes, see parked regen.

DPF Zones, Detroit Engines

DPF Zone DPF Status Bar Warning Lamps Regen Mode Available

0 — • passive

06/10/2016 f611398

0–10% Green

1 — • over-the-road

06/10/2016 f611399

10–60% Green

DPF solid yellow • over-the-road

2
• parked

06/10/2016 f611400 HEST solid yellow*

60–70% Yellow

12.4
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

DPF Zones, Detroit Engines

DPF Zone DPF Status Bar Warning Lamps Regen Mode Available

DPF flashing yellow • over-the-road

3
• parked

06/10/2016 f611401 HEST solid yellow*

70–80% Yellow

DPF flashing yellow

4 • parked

06/10/2016 f611402 HEST solid yellow*

80–90% Red

DPF flashing yellow

5 • parked

06/10/2016 f611403 HEST solid yellow*

90–100% Red
* Illuminates if exhaust temperature is above a preset limit.

Table 12.1, DPF Zones, Detroit Engines

12.5
 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

DPF Zones, Cummins Engines

DPF Zone DPF Status Bar Warning Lamps Regen Mode Available

1 — • over-the-road

06/10/2016 f611399

0–60% Green

DPF flashing yellow • over-the-road

3
• parked

06/10/2016 f611401 HEST solid yellow*

60–80% Yellow

DPF flashing yellow

5 • parked

06/10/2016 f611403 HEST solid yellow*

80–100% Red
* Illuminates if exhaust temperature is above a preset limit.

Table 12.2, DPF Zones, Cummins Engines

process if the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/

High Exhaust System Temperature h), or during a parked regen. See Fig. 12.6.
(HEST) Lamp
Maintenance
Slow (10-second) flashing of the high exhaust sys-
tem temperature (HEST) lamp indicates that a Authorized service facilities must perform any DPF
parked regen is in progress, and the engine’s high service. For warranty purposes, maintain a record
idle speed is being controlled by the engine software, that includes:
not the vehicle driver. • date of cleaning or replacement;
Steady illumination of the HEST lamp alerts the • vehicle mileage;
driver of high exhaust temperature during the regen

12.6
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

White crystals may be noticeable around compo-

nents that come into contact with DEF. The crystals
are easily removed with water.
DEF consumption varies depending on ambient con-
ditions and vehicle application.

Freezing Conditions
DEF freezes to slush at around 12°F (-11°C). It is not
damaged or destroyed if frozen, and is fully usable
when thawed. The DEF in the tank is allowed to
09/25/2006 f610814a freeze while a vehicle is non-operational. At start-up,
normal operation of the vehicle is not inhibited if the
Fig. 12.4, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DEF is frozen; an immersion heater with engine cool-
ant flowing through it warms the DEF once the en-
gine is running, allowing the SCR system to operate.

DEF Tank
Engines that are compliant with EPA10 and newer
regulations are equipped with a DEF tank located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle behind the battery box
or forward of the fuel tank. The DEF tank has a 19
mm filler neck inlet that prevents the hose from a
diesel outlet from being inserted, and has a blue cap
for easy identification.
09/25/2006 f610815a

Fig. 12.5, DPF Status Lamp

Fuel/DEF Gauge
The diesel fuel and DEF levels are measured in a
dual-purpose gauge. Below the gauge, a low fuel
warning lamp illuminates amber when the fuel level
drops below 1/8th of the capacity. See Fig. 12.7.
A DEF warning lamp illuminates amber when the
DEF tank is near empty.

DEF Warnings and Engine Limits

IMPORTANT: Ignoring the DEF low level warn-
09/09/2016 f611430a
ings results in limited engine power, with the
Fig. 12.6, HEST Lamp application of a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit.

• particulate filter part number and serial number. DEF Level Low—Initial Warning
When the DEF level is low, the DEF warning lamp
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank illuminates solid amber, and the driver display screen
presents an alert. See Fig. 12.8. Refill the DEF tank
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in order to cancel the warning sequence.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is used in the ATS to
lower NOx in the exhaust stream. DEF is colorless DEF Empty
and close to odorless (it may have a slightly pungent When the DEF level reads empty, the following
odor similar to ammonia). It is nontoxic, nonflam- lamps and messages notify the driver.
mable, and biodegradable. It is mildly corrosive to
aluminum, but does not affect the strength or struc- • The DEF warning lamp flashes amber.
ture of the aluminum. • The MIL lamp illuminates.

12.7
 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

DEF Tank Empty and Ignored

1 If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF tank is
not refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in
addition to the MIL lamp and CHECK engine lamp
(on vehicles with a Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine).
If the DEF is not refilled, a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed
2 limit is applied after the next engine shutdown, while
parked and idling, or if a fuel refill is detected.

DEF Contamination or SCR Tampering

3 4 NOTICE
Once contaminated DEF or tampering has been
detected, the vehicle must be taken to an autho-
06/28/2016 f611409 rized service facility to check the SCR system for
damage and to deactivate the warning lights and
1. Fuel Gauge Pointer
2. DEF Gauge Pointer
engine limits.
3. Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp If contaminated DEF or tampering with the ATS is
4. Low DEF Level Warning Lamp detected, the DEF warning light flashes and the MIL
Fig. 12.7, Fuel/DEF Gauge lamp illuminates to warn the driver. The CHECK en-

A B
05/15/2017 f611397

A. DEF Level Low B. DEF Tank Empty

Fig. 12.8, DEF Level Messages

• The driver display screen presents the warn- gine lamp also illuminates on vehicles with a Cum-
ing, "DEF Tank Empty." See Fig. 12.8. mins ISB or ISC/L engine.
Power is limited with progressively harsher engine • Detroit engines: Engine power is limited with
power limits applied. progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault
is not corrected, the STOP engine light illumi-
nates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is ap-
plied after the next engine shutdown, while
parked and idling, or if a fuel refill is detected.

12.8
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

• Cummins engines: Engine power is limited with

progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault
is not corrected, the STOP engine light illumi-
nates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is ap-
plied after the next engine shutdown, or while
parked and idling.

12.9
 13
Brake Systems
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Meritor WABCO® Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
Brake Systems

Air Brake System control, resulting in property damage or personal

injury.
Brake System General Information If air pressure drops below approximately 70 psi (483
A dual air brake system consists of two independent kPa) in either system, a warning light illuminates and
air systems that use a single set of brake controls. the driver display shows a warning. An audible alert
Each system has its own reservoirs, plumbing, and also sounds if the park brake is not set. See
brake chambers. The primary system operates the Table 13.1.
service brakes on the rear axle; the secondary sys- If the low air pressure warning is activated, check the
tem operates the service brakes on the front axle. air pressure gauges to determine which system has
Service brake signals from both systems are sent to low air pressure. Although the vehicle’s speed can be
the trailer. reduced using the foot brake control pedal, either the
front or rear service brakes will not be operating at
WARNING full capacity, causing a longer stopping distance.
Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and have the air sys-
Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes tem repaired before continuing.
backed off or disconnected. Backing off or dis- NOTE: The buzzer sounds only when the park
connecting the front brakes will not improve ve-
brake is released.
hicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle

Brake System Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Telltale Color Description Driver Display

Low Air Pressure Indicates air pressure in the primary or

Red (EPA10 and secondary reservoir has dropped below
Newer) approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).

06/30/2016 f611429

Parking Brake
P
Red (EPA10 and Indicates the parking brake is engaged. N/A
PARK
Newer)
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle
ABS is engaged.
Amber Vehicle ABS Solid illumination indicates a problem with the N/A
vehicle ABS. Repair the ABS immediately to
ensure full braking capability.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer
ABS is engaged.
Amber Trailer ABS Solid illumination indicates a problem with the N/A
trailer ABS. Repair the ABS immediately to
ensure full braking capability.
Flashing indicates a stability event has been
detected, and the ESC system is active. Solid
illumination indicates a problem with the
Amber Stability Event stability system. Repair the ESC system N/A
immediately to ensure full stability capability.
For more information on the ESC system, see
Chapter 5.

13.1
 Brake Systems

Brake System Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Telltale Color Description Driver Display

Flashing indicates a wheel spin event has

Amber Wheel Spin Event N/A
been detected, and the ATC system is active.

Indicates the ATC SPIN button has been

ATC Deactivated
pressed to allow wheel slip.

Green Engine Brake Indicates the engine brake is enabled. N/A

Table 13.1, Brake System Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of ser- rear service brakes and the trailer brakes (if
vice brakes with full system air pressure, use equipped).
the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the saf- Brake System Operation
est location possible. Before driving your vehicle, allow time for the air
Before a vehicle with insufficient system air pressure compressor to build up a minimum of 100 psi (689
can be moved, the spring parking brakes must be kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary
released by applying an external air source at the systems. Monitor the air pressure system by observ-
gladhands, or by manually caging the parking brake ing the air pressure gauges and the low-air-pressure
springs. warning light and buzzer. The warning light and
buzzer shut off when air pressure in both systems
reaches approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
WARNING
NOTE: The buzzer sounds only when the park
Do not release the spring parking brakes and brake is released.
then drive the vehicle. There would be no means
of stopping the vehicle, which could result in se- IMPORTANT: Before driving the vehicle, secure all
rious personal injury or vehicle damage. Before loose items in the cab so that they will not fly forward
releasing the spring parking brakes, make the during a full brake application. Make sure all passen-
connection to a towing vehicle or chock the tires. gers are wearing seat belts.
After correcting the brake system problem, uncage During normal brake stops, depress the foot brake
the spring parking brakes before resuming normal control pedal until braking action slows down the ve-
vehicle operation. hicle. Increase or decrease the pressure on the
pedal so that the vehicle comes to a smooth, safe
Loss of air pressure in the primary air system causes stop. Apply the spring parking brakes if the vehicle is
the rear service brakes to become inoperative. The to be parked.
secondary air system will continue to operate the
front brakes and the trailer brakes (if equipped). IMPORTANT: An air brake proportioning system
may be used in tractor air brake systems when
Loss of air pressure in the secondary air system
causes the front axle brakes to become inoperative. the vehicle is not equipped with antilock braking
The primary air system will continue to operate the system (ABS). When operating in bobtail mode,
the rear brake chambers (on which the axle

13.2
Brake Systems

load has been greatly reduced) receive reduced

(proportional) air pressure, while the front axle
brake chambers receive full (normal) air pres-
sure. This results in a different brake pedal
"feel," as the pedal seems to require more travel
and/or effort to slow or stop the vehicle. How-
ever, the air brake proportioning system actually
improves vehicle control when the tractor is in
bobtail mode. When the tractor is towing a
trailer, the rear brake chambers will receive full
(normal) application air pressure.
When parking a vehicle attached to a trailer that 02/03/2017 f610591
does not have spring parking brakes, apply the trac-
tor parking brakes. Chock the trailer tires before dis- Fig. 13.1, Trailer Brake Lever
connecting the vehicle from the trailer.
supply system and to release the trailer spring park-
ing brakes.
WARNING
Pull the trailer air supply valve out before disconnect-
If a trailer or combination vehicle is not equipped ing a trailer or when operating a vehicle without a
with spring parking brakes, do not park it by pull- trailer. If pressure in both air systems drops to 35 to
ing out only the trailer air supply valve knob. 45 psi (242 to 310 kPa), the trailer air supply valve
This would apply only the trailer service brakes. automatically pops out, exhausting the trailer air sup-
If air were to bleed from the trailer brake system, ply, and applying the trailer service or spring parking
the trailer brakes would release, possibly causing brakes.
an unattended runaway vehicle.
1
2
NOTICE
Never apply the service and spring parking
brakes simultaneously. To do so transmits exces-
sive input force to the brake components, which
could damage or cause eventual failure of brake
actuating components.
02/02/2017 f610291
Brake Controls 1. Trailer Air-Supply-Valve Knob
2. Parking-Brake-Valve Knob
The trailer brake lever (hand control valve) is used
for applying the trailer brakes without applying the Fig. 13.2, Brake Valve Knobs
truck or tractor service brakes. It is usually mounted
on the right-hand control panel. See Fig. 13.1. The The yellow diamond-shaped knob in the control
valve can be partially or fully applied, but in any par- panel actuates the parking brake valve. See
tially on position it will be overridden by a full applica- Fig. 13.2. Pulling out the parking brake valve applies
tion of the service brake pedal. Moving the lever both the tractor and trailer spring parking brakes and
down applies the trailer brakes, while moving it up automatically causes the trailer air supply valve to
releases the trailer brakes. The lever will automati- pop out. Pushing in the parking brake valve releases
cally return to the up position when it is released. the tractor parking brakes.
The red octagonal-shaped knob in the control panel
actuates the trailer air supply valve. See Fig. 13.2. NOTICE
After the vehicle’s air hoses are connected to a
trailer and the pressure in both air systems is at least Do not use the spring parking brakes if the ser-
65 psi (448 kPa), the trailer air supply valve must be vice brakes are hot, such as after descending a
pushed in. It should stay in to charge the trailer air steep grade. To do so could damage the brakes.

13.3
 Brake Systems

Allow hot brakes to cool before using the spring tem. ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at
parking brakes. all times, and controls wheel speed during emer-
gency stops.
Do not use the spring parking brakes during
freezing temperatures if the service brakes are IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,
wet. To do so could cause them to freeze. If the do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires
brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low gear and installed during production are programmed into
lightly apply the brakes to heat and dry them. the electronic control unit. Installing different-
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking sized tires could result in a reduced braking
brakes, pulling out the parking brake valve applies force, leading to longer stopping distances.
the tractor spring parking brakes and the trailer ser-
ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and sen-
vice brakes. When the tractor and trailer parking
sors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed
brakes (or trailer service brakes) are both applied,
wheel. The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed
the trailer brakes are released by pushing in the
information to an electronic control unit, located in
trailer air supply valve, leaving the tractor parking
the vehicle electronics bay. The control unit’s main
brakes applied. Air pressure in the primary or sec-
circuit interprets the speed sensor signals and calcu-
ondary reservoir must be at least 65 psi (447 kPa)
lates wheel speed, wheel retardation, and a vehicle
before the tractor spring parking brakes, or the trailer
reference speed. If the calculations indicate wheel
service or spring parking brakes, can be released.
lockup, the main circuit signals the appropriate
modulator valve to reduce braking pressure. During
Automatic Slack Adjusters emergency braking, the modulator valve alternately
Automatic slack adjusters should never be manually reduces, increases, or maintains air pressure supply
adjusted except during routine maintenance of the in the brake chamber to prevent front and rear wheel
foundation brakes (e.g., replacing shoes), during lockup.
slack adjuster installation, or in an emergency situa- The electronic control unit (ECU) also has a safety
tion. circuit that constantly monitors the wheel sensors,
When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal traction control valve (if equipped), modulator valves,
brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a and the electrical circuitry.
mechanical problem with the foundation brake com-
The Meritor WABCO ABS combines one front-axle
ponents or the adjuster is improperly installed.
control channel with one rear-axle control channel to
Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when form one control circuit. For example, the sensor and
brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are modulator valve on the left-front axle form a control
determined to be out of adjustment. circuit with the sensor and modulator valve on the
right-rear axle. If, during vehicle operation, the safety
WARNING circuit senses a failure in any part of the ABS, the
driver display presents an ABS warning,the tractor
Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to warning lamp (TRACTOR ABS) illuminates, and the
bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is control circuit where the failure occurred is switched
likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment to normal braking action. See Table 13.1. The re-
is not a repair. Before adjusting an automatic maining control circuit will retain the ABS effect. Even
slack adjuster, troubleshoot the foundation brake if the ABS is completely inoperative, normal braking
system and inspect it for worn or damaged com- ability is maintained. An exception would be if a
ponents. Improperly maintaining the vehicle brak- modulator valve (or combination modulator valve) is
ing system may lead to brake failure, resulting in damaged and inoperative. As these components are
property damage, personal injury, or death. an integral part of the air brake system, normal brak-
ing may be impaired or inoperative.
Meritor WABCO® Antilock During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
Braking System safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS) brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
is an electronic wheel speed monitoring and control wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
system that works with the standard air brake sys- braking distance.

13.4
Brake Systems

Although the ABS improves vehicle control during If the system detects wheel spin or a stability event,
emergency braking situations, the driver still has the the wheel spin/stability telltale illuminates and an
responsibility to change driving styles depending on alert is shown on the driver display. See Table 13.1.
existing traffic and road conditions. For example, the Pressing the ATC SPIN switch (Fig. 13.3) shuts ATC
ABS cannot prevent an accident if the driver is off and allows drive wheel spin. An alert is shown on
speeding or following too closely. the driver display. Pressing the switch again, or cy-
cling the ignition key, will cycle the system back to
Trailer ABS Compatibility normal operation.
The Meritor WABCO ABS is designed to communi-
cate with a trailer ABS, if they are compatible. Com-
patibility will result in the illumination of the TRAILER
ABS lamp during vehicle start-up and fault detection.
See Table 13.1.
The TRAILER ABS lamp will not illuminate unless a
compatible trailer is connected to the tractor. The
ATC
dash-mounted lamp will operate as follows when a SPIN
compatible trailer is properly connected to the tractor:
• When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- 03/02/2016 f611333
tion, the TRAILER ABS lamp will illuminate mo-
mentarily, then turn off. Fig. 13.3, ATC SPIN Switch
• If the lamp illuminates momentarily during ve-
hicle operation, then shuts off, a fault was de- NOTICE
tected and corrected.
• If the lamp illuminates and stays on during ve- The ATC spin feature is intended to be used
hicle operation, there is a fault with the trailer under specific slippery conditions that require
ABS. Repair the trailer ABS system immedi- momentary increased wheel spin. Using this op-
ately to ensure full antilock braking capability. tion for an extended period of time may damage
the vehicle brake system.
IMPORTANT: If a compatible trailer is con-
After the ignition switch is turned on, the TRACTOR
nected, and the lamp is not illuminating momen- ABS lamp comes on for about three seconds. After
tarily when the ignition key is turned to the ON three seconds, the warning light goes out if all of the
position, it is possible that the lamp is burnt out. tractor’s ABS components are working.

Automatic Traction Control IMPORTANT: If the ABS warning light does not
work as described above, or comes on while
Vehicles with electronic engines and ABS may have driving, repair the ABS immediately to ensure
Automatic Traction Control (ATC). On these vehicles, full antilock braking capability.
the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin dur-
ing reduced-traction situations. In normal braking ap- ECAS Automatic Load Transfer
plications, the standard air brake system is in effect.
(ECAS only)
An additional solenoid valve is installed. During
reduced-traction situations, the ATC solenoid valve On vehicles equipped with Electronically Controlled
controls air pressure to the modulator valves and Air Suspension (ECAS), ECAS works in conjunction
they in turn increase, hold, or reduce pressure to the with ABS. When wheel slippage is detected by the
appropriate brake chambers to provide better traction ABS, the ECAS system transfers weight from the tag
whenever wheel spin occurs. axle to the drive axle by changing air pressures in
the suspension air bellows, increasing drive wheel
When the ATC system is in the NORMAL mode, it
traction.
will apply gentle braking to the spinning wheel, to
feed power to the wheel(s) with better traction. If The ECAS load transfer feature is optimized to apply
both wheels are spinning, the system will signal the the maximum available vehicle load on the drive
engine to reduce power. axle, up to the maximum allowable limit, determined

13.5
 Brake Systems

by the gross axle weight rating (GAWR). In bobtail or Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road
with a loaded trailer less than the GAWR, the tag conditions, the engine brake may be used in con-
axle supports a negligible load while the drive axle junction with the service brakes. There is no time
supports nearly the full weight. Above the GAWR, the limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an
drive axle is loaded with approximately the maximum engine brake does not provide the precise control of,
allowable load and the tag supports the remainder. and is not a substitute for, service brakes.
On vehicles equipped with the ICUC, when load
transfer mode is active, "Load Transfer" will display WARNING
in the message field of the driver display. See Figure
13.4. Usage of the engine brake as the primary braking
system can cause unpredictable stopping dis-
tances, that could result in personal injury or
property damage. Service brakes are the primary
vehicle braking system.
Since the engine brake is most effective at rated en-
gine speed, gear selection is very important. Gearing
down the vehicle within the limits of the rated engine
speed makes the engine brake more effective. Rec-
11/09/2016 f611472
ommended engine braking speed is above 1800 rpm
and below the rated speed.
Fig. 13.4, Load Transfer Notification, ICUC
"Control speed" is the speed at which the engine
Load transfer mode will automatically deactivate brake performs 100 percent of the required downhill
when the vehicle reaches 45 mph (72 kmh). braking, resulting in a constant speed of descent.
The control speed varies, depending on vehicle
Engine Brake weight and the downhill grade.
For faster descent, select a higher gear than that
Each engine manufacturer uses a specific engine used for control speed. Service brakes must then be
brake for their engine. Regardless of the manufac- used intermittently to prevent engine overspeed and
turer, the engine brake is operated with the principles to maintain desired vehicle speed.
outlined in here. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s
operation manual for details of their particular engine For slower descent, select a lower gear, being care-
brake product. ful not to overspeed the engine. Occasional deactiva-
tion of the engine brake may be necessary to main-
WARNING tain the designated road speed under these
conditions.
To avoid injury from loss of vehicle control, do If the engine is equipped with both cruise control and
not activate the engine brake system under the an engine brake, the engine brake can operate auto-
following conditions: matically while cruise control is activated. The maxi-
• on wet or slippery pavement, unless the mum amount of braking is selected with the engine
vehicle is equipped with antilock braking brake control. When the vehicle returns to the set
system (ABS) and you have had prior expe- cruise speed, the engine brake will turn off.
rience driving under these conditions; The engine brake will only operate when the accel-
• when driving without a trailer or pulling an erator and clutch pedals are fully released.
empty trailer; Vehicles equipped with ABS have the ability to turn
• if the tractor drive wheels begin to lock, or the engine brake off if wheel slip is detected. The
there is fishtail motion after the engine engine brake will automatically turn back on once
brake is activated. wheel slip is no longer detected.

NOTE: When the engine brake is enabled, the

engine brake lamp illuminates in the ICU. See
Table 13.1.

13.6
Brake Systems

Engine Brake Operation

NOTICE
Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
speed, or serious engine damage could result.
NOTE: Depending on the brake type, the engine
brake may be disabled when engine tempera-
ture falls below a set level.
The engine brake control is located on the right-hand
steering column lever. At the top position, the engine
brake is off, and at the three lower positions, the en-
gine brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
high) increases with each step down. See Fig. 13.5.
NOTE: The cruise control system and safety
systems may activate the engine brake regard-
less of the lever position.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Detroit au-
tomated transmission, setting the engine brake
with the cruise control set activates Deceleration
Mode. Setting the cruise control while the en-
gine brake is on activates Descent Control
Mode. For information on these modes, see
"Cruise Control" in Chapter 4.

02/17/2017 f270164a
0. Off 2. Medium
1. Low 3. High

Fig. 13.5, Engine Brake Positions, Right-Hand Steering

Column Lever

13.7
 14
Steering System
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Steering System

Power Steering System

The power steering system includes the power steer-
ing gear, hydraulic hoses, power steering pump, res-
ervoir, steering wheel and column, and other compo-
nents.
The power steering pump, driven by the engine, pro-
vides the power assist for the steering system. If the
engine is not running, there is no power assist.

WARNING
Driving the vehicle without the power-assist fea-
ture of the steering system requires much greater
effort, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds,
which could result in an accident and possible
injury.
If the power-assist feature does not work due to hy-
draulic fluid loss, steering pump damage, or another
cause, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Do not drive
the vehicle until the cause of the problem has been
corrected.

NOTICE
Never steam clean or high-pressure wash the
steering gear. Internal damage to gear seals, and
ultimately the steering gear, can result.
Drivers should carefully use the power available with
a power steering system. If the front tires become
lodged in a deep hole or rut, drive the vehicle out
instead of using the steering system to lift the tires
out of the hole.

NOTICE
Avoid turning the tires when they are against a
curb, as this places a heavy load on steering
components and could damage them.

14.1
 15
Automated and Automatic
Transmissions
Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Detroit™ Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Eaton Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10
Automated and Automatic Transmissions

Automated/Automatic
Transmission Shift Control
Vehicles with automated or automatic transmissions B
use the multifunction stalk switch control shown in A
Fig. 15.1 and Fig. 15.2. This control can be used to
request manual shifts, change driving mode, and set C
engine brake levels. See Table 15.1 for an overview
of control functionality.

Direction Switch
Use the direction switch to request drive (D), neutral
(N), or reverse (R). See Fig. 15.1, Ref. A.

Mode Switch
E
The driving mode can be changed using the Mode
switch on the shift control. See Fig. 15.1, Ref. B and
C. (−)

Gear Switch D (+)

For automated and automatic transmissions, gear 06/30/2017 f270163b
shifts can be requested manually; push the lever
away to request a downshift, or pull the lever toward See Table 15.1 for a description of control functionality.
you to request an upshift (Fig. 15.1, Ref. D and E). A. Rotate for drive (D), neutral (N), or reverse (R).
See Table 15.1 for more information about upshift B. Short press for automatic mode or switch between
available modes.
and downshift requests.
C. Long press for manual mode.
D. Pull for upshift (+) request.
E. Push for downshift (-) request.
Fig. 15.1, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift
Control

Functionality, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control

Function/Switch Action/Position Request
Direction All Transmissions
D Forward gears
N Neutral
R Reverse gears
Mode Short press Detroit and Eaton: Activate the automatic drive
mode, or switch between available modes
Allison: Switch between available shift modes.
Long press Detroit and Eaton: Activate the manual drive mode
(if available)
Allison: Switch between automatic and manual drive
mode.

15.1
 Automated and Automatic Transmissions

Functionality, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control

Function/Switch Action/Position Request
Gear(Detroit Detroit Automated Transmissions
Automated Short pull on the lever Upshift, single gear
Transmissions) Pull on the lever in quick repetitions Upshift, multiple gears
Short push on the lever Downshift, single gear
Push on the lever in quick repetitions Downshift, multiple gears
Gear (Eaton Eaton Automated Transmissions
Automated Short pull on the lever Upshift, single gear
Transmissions) Pull on the lever in quick repetitions Upshift, multiple gears
Short push on the lever Downshift, single gear
Push on the lever in quick repetitions Downshift, multiple gears
While in automatic drive mode, long push on Downshift to low mode
the lever
While in low mode, pull on the lever Exits low mode and returns to automatic drive mode
While in reverse mode, push on the lever Selects deep reverse gear
While in deep reverse gear, pull on the lever Upshifts to standard reverse gear
Gear (Allison Allison Automatic Transmissions
Automatic Short pull on the lever Upshift, single gear
Transmissions) Pull on the lever in quick repetitions Upshift, multiple gears
Short push on the lever Downshift, single gear
Push on the lever in quick repetitions Downshift, multiple gears
While in automatic drive mode, long push on Downshift to low mode
the lever
While in low mode, pull on the lever Exits low mode and returns to automatic drive mode
While in reverse mode, push on the lever Selects deep reverse gear (only on 7-speed 4000
Series transmissions)
While in deep reverse gear (only on 7-speed Upshifts to standard reverse gear
4000 Series transmissions), pull on the lever
Engine Brake * Engine Brake Functions
Lever at position 0 (top) Engine brake off
Lever at position 1 Low intensity
Lever at position 2 Medium intensity
Lever at position 3 (bottom) High intensity
* For functions with cruise control active, see Chapter 4.

Table 15.1, Functionality, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control

Engine Brake Power Up and Shift into Gear

The engine brake is controlled by the lever position 1. With the parking brake set and Neutral (N) se-
(as shown in Fig. 15.2). At the top position, the en- lected on the shift control, turn the ignition switch
gine brake is off, and at the three lower positions, the to the ON position.
engine brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
2. Start the engine.
high) increases with each step down. For more infor-
mation about using the engine brake, see 3. Apply the service brake.
Chapter 13.
4. Select the desired starting gear.
NOTE: Using the engine brake with cruise con-
5. Release the parking brake.
trol can be used to activate Descent Control
Mode or Deceleration Mode. For more informa- 6. Release the service brake and apply the accel-
tion, see "Cruise Control" in Chapter 5. erator.

15.2
Automated and Automatic Transmissions

Suggested Shift (Detroit and Eaton

0
Transmissions)
In Manual mode only (if available), a suggested shift
is displayed to indicate the most economical gear
1 available. The suggested shift is the number of up or
down arrows from the current gear with a maximum
of three up or down arrows.
2
Detroit™ Automated
Transmissions
3 Detroit transmissions have twelve forward gears and
up to four reverse gears that can be shifted automati-
02/17/2017 f270164a
cally or manually. Shifting and clutch actuation are
0. Off 2. Medium computer controlled, and there is no clutch pedal
1. Low 3. High needed to operate the vehicle. Automatic shifts are
Fig. 15.2, Engine Brake Positions selected for fuel economy or engine power. Manual
shifts can be requested with the shift control and the
Gear Display transmission ECU grants them when conditions per-
mit. In all cases, shifts depend on the following fac-
The current transmission gear and driving mode are tors: engine speed, accelerator pedal position, ser-
displayed in the static menu at the bottom of the vice brake usage, engine brake operation, vehicle
driver display screen. See Fig. 15.3. load status, and road conditions.

1 2 NOTE: To avoid potential engine stall risk or un-

expected shifting, use the interaxle differential
lock when the vehicle is operated in slippery
conditions. See Chapter 17 for information
about the interaxle differential lock.
3 Driving Modes
f611348
There are three driving modes: Manual, Automatic
06/13/2016
Economy, and Automatic Performance. To activate
1. Suggested Shift 3. Driving Mode the manual drive mode, press and hold the mode
2. Current Gear switch briefly. Press the switch quickly to activate the
Fig. 15.3, Typical Gear Display (Detroit and Eaton) automatic drive mode or change between modes.
See Fig. 15.1.
Selected Gear (Detroit and Eaton In Automatic Economy mode, gear shifts are de-
Transmissions) signed for saving fuel. In Automatic Performance
mode, gear shifts are designed for higher perfor-
If the selected gear is different than the current gear mance and are made at higher engine speeds. In
for longer than a half second, the current gear dis- manual mode, gear shifts are requested manually.
play will flash and the selected gear value will be
shown. Once the current gear and selected gear NOTE: In Automatic Performance mode, the
match, the selected gear display disappears and the transmission will automatically change to Auto-
current gear display stops flashing. matic Economy mode if it hasn’t received a re-
quest for more power in several minutes, unless
current road conditions require higher engine
performance.

15.3
 Automated and Automatic Transmissions

eCoast
The eCoast feature can improve driving economy.
When conditions permit, the transmission control au-
tomatically shifts the transmission to neutral to coast
at speeds between approximately 22 mph (35 km/h)
- 55 mph (88.5km/h), and above depending on spe-
cific programming. An "E" shows in the gear display
when eCoast is in effect. See Fig. 15.4.
To turn eCoast on or off, navigate to the transmission
settings screen (if available). See Fig. 15.5. The
eCoast function cannot be deactivated when the Au-
tomatic Economy mode is active.
The eCoast function is not active when any of the
following occur:
• the accelerator pedal is pressed.
• vehicle acceleration rate is exceeded.
• the service brake pedal is pressed.
• the engine brake is in use.
03/20/2017 f611350
• cruise control brakes or accelerates.
NOTE: Upshift and downshift arrows are not shown
• vehicle speed exceeds the cruise control set when "E" is shown in the gear display.
speed by more than approximately 4 mph (6
km/h). Fig. 15.4, eCoast Display

• the speed limiter is active and the maximum press the accelerator pedal. The vehicle’s urge to
speed set is exceeded. move can then be felt.
• diesel particulate filter (DPF) regeneration oc- If creep is active and no acceleration is achieved
curs. within five seconds, then Creep mode will abort. A
display message notifies the operator when Creep
NOTE: eCoast availability and the On/Off screen mode is about to be aborted.
are customer-selectable parameters. To enable
or disable eCoast, see an authorized Freight- IMPORTANT: When slowing down from higher
liner service facility. speeds in drive or reverse, remember that
Creep mode will be in effect at lower speeds.
Creep Mode Use the service brakes to stop the vehicle.
To turn Creep Mode on or off, navigate to the trans-
Creep mode allows the vehicle to be maneuvered at
mission settings screen (if available). See Fig. 15.5.
very slow speeds. To activate Creep mode for the
first time within the current driving cycle, press the NOTE: Creep mode availability and the On/Off
accelerator pedal to launch the vehicle, thereby fully screen are customer-selectable parameters. To
engaging the clutch. Following this and for the dura- enable or disable creep mode, see an autho-
tion of the current driving cycle, Creep mode is ac- rized Freightliner service facility.
tive.
Once the vehicle is stopped via the service brakes, Hill Start Aid (HSA)
the vehicle will begin to creep again, without the ac-
celerator pedal actuation, as soon as the service Detroit transmissions are equipped with a Hill Start
brakes are released. Aid (HSA) feature to prevent rolling backward when
launching the vehicle on an uphill grade. The system
To begin using Creep mode (once active) from a delays the release of service brakes until enough
parked position, shift from neutral to either drive or
reverse, release the service brakes, and briefly de-

15.4
Automated and Automatic Transmissions

There are three clutch abuse protection levels. At

each, the driver is alerted and functionality is modi-
fied; see Table 15.2.
To avoid clutch overheating, follow these tips:
• To hold the vehicle stationary on an uphill
slope, use the service brakes, not the accel-
erator pedal.
• To start moving on an uphill slope, use the ac-
celerator pedal and release the brakes as the
vehicle begins to move.
• When hooking up to a trailer, ensure the trailer
is high enough to back under, and use first
gear reverse.
• Avoid starting in higher gears, and start in first
gear when a trailer is attached.
• Ensure trailer brakes have had time to com-
pletely release prior to starting.
• Do not use Creep mode for an extended pe-
03/20/2017 f611349
riod. Stop or adjust the vehicle speed when
warned to deactivate Creep mode.
Fig. 15.5, eCoast and Creep Mode On/Off Screen
Engine Overspeed Alerts
torque is available to begin moving the vehicle for-
ward. The system will hold the brakes for a maxi- To help protect the engine, the system has display
mum of 3 seconds. If driveline torque is not detected, messages to notify the operator when the engine has
the system will audibly alert the driver and release exceeded certain thresholds and needs to be slowed
the brakes. down before significant engine damage occurs.
There are two warnings, one at about 2300 rpm and
Clutch Abuse Protection another at 2500 rpm, indicated with messages and a
fault code.
A vehicle equipped with a Detroit transmission does
not have a clutch pedal, but still has a clutch that is Transmission Low Air Warning
operated automatically and can be damaged by abu-
sive driver actions. To protect the clutch, the vehicle
has a clutch abuse protection system that alerts the CAUTION
driver and restricts functionality when needed. Ex-
If the yellow "Caution: Transmission Air Supply
tended periods in Creep Mode, slipping the clutch
Low" popup appears while the vehicle is in op-
(using the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on a
eration, slow down, safely pull the vehicle off the
hill, for example), and high clutch temperatures can
road, then correct the problem.
activate the clutch abuse protection system. A display
message notifies the operator when the protections Pneumatic controls are used to shift the transmis-
are needed. sion. If there is inadequate air pressure, a yellow
caution pop-up will appear and the quality of gear
NOTICE shifts may be degraded. See Fig. 15.6. Wait for air
pressure to build before operating the vehicle.
To hold the vehicle stationary on an uphill slope,
use the service brakes, not the accelerator pedal. CAUTION
Using the accelerator pedal can overheat and
damage the clutch. To start moving, use the ac- If the red "Warning: Transmission Will Not Shift"
celerator pedal and release the brakes as the ve- popup appears while the vehicle is in operation,
hicle begins to move. choose the safest location available to pull the

15.5
 Automated and Automatic Transmissions

10/21/2019 f611801 10/21/2019 f611802

Fig. 15.6, Low Transmission Air Pressure Pop-up Fig. 15.7, No Transmission Air Pressure Pop-up

vehicle off the road. Prepare for the vehicle to be Clutch Abuse Alerts and Protections
immobile if the problem cannot be resolved.
If a severe loss of air pressure occurs, a red warning
pop-up will appear and the transmission will not shift.
See Fig. 15.7.

Clutch Abuse Alerts and Protections

Protections
Alert Level Alert
Highest Start Gear Creep Mode Clutch Function
1 Heavy clutch load message 1 No restriction Normal function
2 Heavy clutch load message 1 Disabled Normal function
3 Disabled If the accelerator pedal is
depressed, the clutch closes
Clutch overload message and at fixed rate.
1
buzzer If the accelerator pedal is
released, the clutch opens at
fixed rate.
Table 15.2, Clutch Abuse Alerts and Protections

Eaton Automated Automatic Mode (A)

Transmissions In automatic drive mode, upshifts and downshifts are
made by the transmission without driver intervention.
Eaton automated transmissions use shift selection
software and electric clutch actuation; a clutch pedal Use the mode switch on the shift control to select the
is not needed to operate the vehicle. These transmis- automatic mode (A). Rotate the D/N/R switch to
sions use the multi-function stalk switch shown in Drive (D), and press down on the throttle pedal. The
Fig. 15.1 to select mode, direction, neutral, low, and transmission will shift automatically.
to make manual shifts. To know what gear the trans- NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
mission is in, see the driver display. Forward shifts mode without applying the service brakes, the
can be made either manually or automatically.
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into

15.6
Automated and Automatic Transmissions

gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes, fall outside of the acceptable range to perform a
and select the desired mode again. shift. If the shift is denied, a tone will sound.
In Drive, the start gear is automatically selected. The NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
selected start gear can vary depending on several mode without applying the service brakes, the
vehicle inputs such as load, grade, and axle/ transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
transmission ratio. The start gear can be changed gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
using the shift control, provided the selected gear
would allow the vehicle to launch without damaging
and select the desired mode again.
the transmission. If the start gear is changed using
the shift control, it will be the default until the vehicle
Manual Mode Override
is powered down or the selection is changed again The system is equipped with a manual mode over-
manually. ride function. If the vehicle is being "back driven" (for
example, descending a grade and the engine speed
IMPORTANT: Prior to ascending a steep grade,
is excessively high), the system will upshift automati-
either reduce the default start gear by one cally. Also, if the start gear is changed and it causes
(using the shift control) or apply full throttle for the engine to lug at takeoff, the system will override
the duration of the grade so the vehicle main- the current position and select the best available
tains the proper engine and vehicle speed dur- gear.
ing the entire grade.
In Drive, the transmission automatically performs up- Low (L)
shifts and downshifts. However, when the transmis- Use Low when wanting to maximize engine braking
sion is near the shift point, the shift can be forced and minimize the use of the brake pedal—for ex-
using the upshift or downshift function of the shift ample, when driving down long grades or when com-
control. ing to a stop. To select Low, push down on the multi-
NOTE: The transmission may deny a shift while function stalk switch, and hold in the down-shift
ascending or descending a grade if the load of position for half a second or more. The lowest avail-
able start gear will be selected (the starting gear can-
the vehicle and grade of the terrain in combina-
not be changed in Low).
tion with the drivetrain ratio and engine torque
fall outside of the acceptable range to perform a If Low is selected while moving, the transmission will
shift. If the shift is denied, a tone will sound. not upshift (unless the system initiates a Low over-
ride). The system will downshift at the earliest oppor-
Manual Mode (M) tunity to provide maximum engine braking.
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
In manual mode, the driver requests upshifts and
downshifts instead of letting the Eaton transmission mode without applying the service brakes, the
select them automatically. Manual shifting may be transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
helpful when traversing a work site, railroad tracks, gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
or steep grades, for example. and select the desired mode again.
Use the mode switch on the shift control to select the Low Override
manual mode (M). To drive forward, rotate the D/N/R
switch to Drive (D), and press down on the throttle The system is equipped with a Low override function.
pedal. To shift up, pull the lever up (towards you); to If the vehicle is being "back driven" (for example, de-
shift down, push the lever down (away from you). scending a grade and the engine speed is exces-
The system holds the current gear unless a shift is sively high), the system will upshift automatically.
requested or if the system initiates a manual mode Also, if the start gear is changed and it causes the
override. engine to lug at takeoff, the system will override the
current position and downshift.
NOTE: The transmission may deny a shift while
ascending or descending a grade if the load of Clutch Abuse Protection
the vehicle and grade of the terrain in combina-
tion with the drivetrain ratio and engine torque Although a vehicle equipped with an Eaton auto-
mated transmission uses an automated clutch, the

15.7
 Automated and Automatic Transmissions

clutch can still overheat and slip with improper use. Engaging Creep Mode
The clutch abuse protection feature helps protect the
clutch if the automated clutch starts to overheat. To engage Creep Mode:
When the clutch abuse protection feature initiates 1. Select Low, Manual, or Automatic Mode, and the
and sounds a warning tone, full clutch actuation must desired gear (while stopped or moving).
be completed quickly. If it is not completed quickly
enough, the system will either open the clutch (if the 2. Apply the throttle pedal to accelerate the vehicle
throttle pedal is not being pressed) or close the until the clutch is closed (engaged).
clutch (if the throttle pedal is being pressed). If the 3. Release the throttle pedal. The vehicle will con-
abuse continues, the system will open the clutch and tinue moving at governed low engine idle speed.
take away throttle control briefly to allow the clutch to
cool down. Exiting Creep Mode
To protect the clutch: To exit Creep Mode, apply the throttle pedal to accel-
• Select the lowest possible start gear for the erate temporarily, or select a higher gear in Manual
application. Mode. (Creep Mode can be resumed in the selected
gear by releasing the throttle pedal.)
• Use Creep Mode when appropriate.
NOTE: The transmission will exit Creep Mode if
• Use the service brakes and the Hill Start Aid
the engine lugs 150 rpm below the governed
when launching on a grade.
low engine idle speed. In this case, a lower gear
• Minimize the time it takes to engage the clutch should be selected if available.
from rest.
• Do not use the throttle to hold the vehicle on a Hill Start Aid
grade; use the service brakes. Eaton transmissions are equipped with a Hill Start
• Do not use the throttle to stop roll back on an Aid (HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle from rolling
incline after Hill Start Aid disengages; use the while on grades steeper than 3% and allow for a
service brakes, and then relaunch. controlled launch. A grade sensor is used to deter-
mine when to engage the feature.
• Do not continually start and stop, especially
when loaded; use a lower gear or Creep Mode. HSA is "on" by default. It can be turned off by press-
ing and releasing the override switch on the dash
Creep Mode (see Chapter 4). HSA will turn back on after the first
successful launch.
The Creep Mode function allows the vehicle to main-
When the vehicle is stopped on a grade greater than
tain a constant speed at engine idle without the
3% and in a forward mode or reverse, depress the
driver holding the throttle pedal position. This mode
service brakes then release them. The vehicle will
is useful for very low-speed maneuvering and appli-
begin to move after 3 seconds, and the clutch will
cations where steady vehicle speed is required. The
perform partial engagements to slow the vehicle mo-
vehicle speed is determined by the selected gear
tion. Either step on the brake or apply the throttle to
ratio operating at governed low engine idle speed.
continue negotiating the grade.
Any available gear may be selected, though the
transmission will downshift or exit Creep Mode to
prevent stalling if the engine lugs due to load condi-
Engine Overspeed Protection
tions. The system will upshift if necessary to prevent en-
By default, Creep Mode can be activated while in gine overspeed in Drive, Manual, and Low.
Manual Mode or Low. Eaton’s ServiceRanger diag-
nostic software can be used to enable Creep Mode Shuttle Shifting
in Automatic Mode and/or Reverse. Shuttle shifting from reverse to any forward mode is
only allowed if the vehicle speed is approximately
zero.

15.8
Automated and Automatic Transmissions

Auto Start Gear Selection and To disable the ATC, depress the ATC switch (see
Chapter 4). This mode allows for the drive axle
Override wheels to spin.
The transmission uses various inputs to automatically
select the best start gear in Drive and Manual. This Load-Based Shifting
selection can be changed using the shift control; An Eaton automated transmission system is adaptive
however, if the selection requested could cause dam- and will change the shift points based on grade, en-
age or engine lugging, the request will be denied and gine RPM, throttle position, and vehicle load. After
a tone will sound. changing loads or powering up, the system needs to
relearn these inputs for the first few shifts to make
Skip Shifting the proper adjustments.
When appropriate, the transmission may skip shift in
Drive. When prevailing conditions like load and grade Coasting
allow, skip shifts can be performed in Manual mode When coasting to a stop on level terrain, the trans-
using the SmartShift control. mission system may not downshift into the lower
gears. It will select a gear after the throttle is applied.
Auto Neutral
An Eaton automated transmission system will auto- Transmission Low Air Warning
matically shift to neutral if the vehicle is left in Drive
and the parking brake is set. "AN" will show on the CAUTION
gear display. To re-engage the transmission, select
Neutral and then either Drive or Reverse on the shift If the yellow "Caution: Transmission Air Supply
control (it will re-engage regardless of whether the Low" popup appears while the vehicle is in op-
parking brake is released). eration, slow down, safely pull the vehicle off the
road, then correct the problem.
Automatic Traction Control Pneumatic controls are used to shift the transmis-
An Eaton automated transmission system requires sion. If there is inadequate air pressure, a yellow
the Automatic Traction Control (ATC) option to be caution pop-up will appear and the quality of gear
enabled when driving in soft soil/sand to prevent shifts may be degraded. See Fig. 15.6. Wait for air
wheel slippage and shifting issues. pressure to build before operating the vehicle.
With the ATC enabled, the system will engage the
brakes on the wheel or side that the wheel slip is CAUTION
occurring to help the vehicle gain traction. The point
at which the traction control will actuate the braking If the red "Warning: Transmission Will Not Shift"
system increases with throttle: low throttle allows the popup appears while the vehicle is in operation,
system to brake the wheels earlier; heavy/full throttle choose the safest location available to pull the
raises the point of the acceptable wheel slip. vehicle off the road. Prepare for the vehicle to be
immobile if the problem cannot be resolved.
Adhere to the following points when driving with ATC
enabled: If a severe loss of air pressure occurs, a red warning
pop-up will appear and the transmission will not shift.
• If using Automatic mode in soft soil and/or See Fig. 15.7.
sand, maintain the engine speed between
1000 and 1300 rpm to prevent unnecessary Transmission Prognostics
upshifting.
The Eaton Ultrashift clutch requires the application of
• If using Manual mode in soft soil and/or sand,
grease for maintenance.
do not attempt an upshift and try to maintain
the current gear. The Eaton transmission prognostics display can be
found by navigating to the maintenance screens in
• If the vehicle comes to a stop in the sand it the driver display. The screen will state if the Grease
may be necessary to back up prior to attempt- Interval is OK or if grease needs to be added. See
ing forward movement. Fig. 15.8.

15.9
 Automated and Automatic Transmissions

1. Current Gear
2. Highest Gear Available
3. Mode

Fig. 15.9, Allison Gear Display in Automatic Mode

Operation Tips, Allison Transmissions

10/21/2019 f611803
WARNING
Fig. 15.8, Eaton Transmission Prognostics
Never shift from neutral (N) to drive (D) or re-
If the system status cannot be read, the message verse (R) at engine speeds above idle. The ve-
"SNA" displays. hicle will lurch forward or backward, which could
cause property damage and personal injury.
Allison Automatic
Transmissions NOTICE
Refer to the Allison website for additional information: The engine should never be operated for more
www.allisontransmission.com. than thirty seconds at full throttle with the trans-
mission in gear and the output stalled. Prolonged
General Information, Allison operation of this type will overheat the transmis-
sion fluid and will result in severe damage to the
Transmissions transmission.
Allison transmissions have electronic shift controls
that can be programmed to allow the use of different NOTICE
numbers of geared speeds. For instance, the trans-
mission can be programmed to operate as a Do not allow the vehicle to coast in neutral. This
4-speed, 5-speed, or 6-speed unit in the "primary" can result in severe transmission damage. Also,
shift mode. If needed, a "secondary" shift mode can no engine braking is available.
be programmed to provide another shift configuration
to optimize vehicle use under different operating con- The following tips highlight important operation prin-
ditions. To activate a secondary shift mode, or other ciples.
special functions programmed into the electronic con- • Use reverse (R) to back the vehicle. Com-
trol unit (ECU), briefly depress the mode switch on pletely stop the vehicle before shifting from a
the multi-function stalk switch control; see Fig. 15.1, forward gear to reverse, or from reverse to for-
item 3. ward.
These transmissions use the multi-function stalk • Select drive (D) for all normal driving condi-
switch to select mode, direction, neutral, low, and to tions. The vehicle will start out in 1st gear (un-
preselect lower ranges. The current gear, highest less the transmission is programmed with 2nd
available gear, and mode are shown in the driver dis-
play; see Fig. 15.9. Forward shifts can be made ei-
ther automatically or by using Manual mode.

15.10
Automated and Automatic Transmissions

gear start), and as speed increases, the trans- mode switch activates the manual mode (M). To in-
mission will upshift through each gear auto- crease selected range, pull the lever up (towards
matically. As the vehicle slows down, the trans- you); to decrease the selected range, push the lever
mission will downshift to the correct gear down (away from you). The transmission will not up-
automatically. shift above the selected range unless the hold over-
ride upshift speed is exceeded.
• The pressure of your foot on the accelerator
pedal influences the automatic shifting. When See Fig. 15.10 for an example of the driver display
the pedal is fully depressed, the transmission with the transmission in manual mode.
will automatically upshift at higher engine
speeds. A partially-depressed position of the 2 1
pedal will cause the upshifts to occur at a
lower engine speed.
• Occasionally the road, load, or traffic conditions
make it desirable to restrict the automatic shift-
ing to a lower range. The lower the gear range,
the greater the engine braking power. When in
Manual mode, push or pull on the multifunction
stalk switch to reach the desired gear. In the 07/12/2017 f611482
lower gear ranges, the transmission will not 1. Current Gear
upshift above the highest gear selected unless 2. Selected Gear
the hold override upshift speed is exceeded.
Fig. 15.10, Allison Gear Display in Manual Mode
• Use neutral and apply the parking brake when
the vehicle is parked with the engine running. NOTE: The transmission may deny a downshift
if the engine speed would fall outside of the ac-
Automatic Mode (A) ceptable range.
In automatic drive mode, upshifts and downshifts are NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
made by the transmission without driver intervention.
mode without applying the service brakes, the
Automatic mode is the default start mode. If in transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
manual mode, a short push on the shift control mode gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
switch activates the automatic mode (A). Rotate the and select the desired mode again.
D/N/R switch to Drive (D), and press down on the
throttle pedal. The transmission will shift automati- Low (L)
cally.
Use Low when wanting to maximize engine braking
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral and minimize the use of the brake pedal—for ex-
mode without applying the service brakes, the ample, when driving down long grades or when com-
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into ing to a stop. To select Low, push down on the multi-
gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes, function stalk switch, and hold in the down-shift
and select the desired mode again. position for half a second or more. The lowest avail-
In Drive, the start gear is automatically selected. The able start gear will be selected (the starting gear can-
transmission automatically performs upshifts and not be changed in Low).
downshifts. If Low is selected while moving, the transmission will
not upshift (unless the system initiates a Low over-
Manual Mode (M) ride). The system will downshift at the earliest oppor-
tunity to provide maximum engine braking.
In manual mode, the driver selects the maximum al-
lowed range. This may be helpful when traversing a In the driver display, the low gear is shown as "1."
work site, railroad tracks, or steep grades, for ex- See Fig. 15.11.
ample. NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
When in automatic mode and with the D/N/R switch mode without applying the service brakes, the
set to Drive (D), a long push on the shift control transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into

15.11
 Automated and Automatic Transmissions

1. Low (displayed as "1")

2. Highest Gear Available in Low
Fig. 15.11, Allison Gear Display in Low Gear

gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,

and select the desired mode again.

Transmission Prognostics
The Allison transmission prognostics display can be
found by navigating to the maintenance screens in
the driver display. The prognostics screen displays
information on the transmission health status (oil filter
status, oil level, and oil life). See Fig. 15.12. If trans-
mission health falls below acceptable limits, a mes-
sage will be shown on the driver display.
NOTE: For a valid oil level measurement, the
vehicle must be stopped on a level surface with
the transmission in neutral (N).

10/21/2019 f611483a

Fig. 15.12, Allison Transmission Prognostics

15.12
 16
Manual Transmissions and
Clutch
Eaton® Fuller® Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Manual Transmissions and Clutch

Eaton® Fuller® Manual • Never make a range shift or a splitter shift

while the vehicle is in reverse.
Transmissions • Never move the range-preselection lever with
General Information the transmission in neutral while the vehicle is
moving.
A Freightliner New Cascadia vehicle may be
equipped with an Eaton 10-, 13-, or 18-speed • Skip ratios while shifting only when operating
manual transmission. Vehicles with Eaton manual conditions permit, depending on the load,
transmissions have clutch brakes and a hydraulic grade, and road speed.
clutch actuation system. • Never coast with the transmission in neutral.
The transmission shift pattern is printed on a decal
attached to the driver-side sun visor or to the dash Clutch
below the center dash panel. The shift pattern may
also be printed on the shift knob. General Information
NOTE: For additional information, refer to the The hydraulic clutch control system consists of a
Eaton website, www.roadranger.com. pedal unit and a slave cylinder connected by a hy-
draulic hose. The components of the system have
Transmission Operation Tips been specially designed to use DOT 4 brake fluid.
The hydraulic system is self-adjusting.
Follow these important operation principles:
Typical operation will not break down the clutch fric-
• For all conditions, use the highest gear that is tion surfaces. Heat and wear are almost nonexistent
still low enough to start the vehicle moving with when a clutch is fully engaged. However, during the
the engine at or near idle speed, and without moment of engagement, when the clutch is picking
slipping the clutch excessively. up the load, considerable heat is generated. If a
When operating on-highway with no load or clutch slips excessively, high temperatures develop
under ideal conditions, use 1st gear to start the quickly between the flywheel, driven discs, and pres-
vehicle moving forward. sure plates. An improperly adjusted or slipping clutch
can generate temperatures high enough to cause the
When operating off-road or under adverse con- friction-facing material to char and burn, destroying
ditions, use LOW gear to start the vehicle mov- the clutch.
ing forward.
To ensure long service life of the clutch, start in the
• Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation right gear and be alert to clutch malfunctions.
when shifting into LOW or reverse while the
vehicle is stationary. The clutch brake is actu- Clutch Operation
ated by depressing the clutch pedal all the way
to the floor. Clutch Break-In
• Partially disengage the clutch to break engine With a new or newly installed clutch, the clutch may
torque during normal gear shifts. slip for a short time while the friction surfaces break-
in. However, allowing the clutch to slip for more than
• Double-clutch between all upshifts and down- two seconds can severely damage the clutch disc,
shifts that require movement of the shift knob. pressure plate, and the flywheel.
Splitting of gears does not require movement
of the shift knob. During initial operation of a new vehicle or a vehicle
with a new clutch, check for clutch slippage during
• Never push the range-preselection lever down acceleration. If the clutch slips, decelerate until the
into low range while operating in high range, clutch does not slip. Allow the clutch to cool 15 to 30
except when downshifting from 5th gear to 4th seconds, and then gradually accelerate again. If the
gear. clutch continues to slip, repeat the procedure. If nec-
• Do not shift from high range to low range at essary, repeat the procedure up to five times. If the
high vehicle speeds. clutch slips after five attempts, stop the vehicle. Allow
the clutch to cool for at least one hour. Notify your
Freightliner dealer of the problem.

16.1
 Manual Transmissions and Clutch

NOTICE WARNING
Do not allow sustained slippage of the clutch; Always shift into the gear that is correct for the
this could severely damage the clutch disc, pres- traveling speed of the vehicle and engage the
sure plate, or flywheel. Damage caused by clutch clutch. Coasting with the clutch disengaged can
slippage due to improper break-in is not warrant- prevent engagement of the correct transmission
able. gear which can cause loss of vehicle control,
possibly resulting in personal injury or property
Using the Clutch Brake damage.
The clutch brake is applied by depressing the clutch High clutch disc speeds while coasting can also
pedal past the fully released clutch position, almost cause the clutch facing to be thrown off the disc.
to the floor plate. The last part of the clutch pedal Flying debris from the clutch can cause injury to
travel will compress the clutch brake plates together, persons in the cab.
stopping the transmission input shaft. The purpose of
the clutch brake is to stop the transmission gears Clutch Adjustment
from rotating in order to quickly engage a transmis-
sion gear after idling in neutral. Eaton Fuller Solo clutches are adjustment-free. As
the clutch wears, its wear-adjusting technology moni-
tors clutch components and makes any necessary
NOTICE adjustments. The wear adjusting technology comes
from two sliding cams, which rotate to maintain the
Never apply the clutch brake when the vehicle is proper adjustment. Atop the upper cam, a wear indi-
moving. If the clutch brake is applied when the cating tab mirrors the cam’s movement, letting you
vehicle is moving, the clutch brake will try to know when it’s time to replace the clutch.
stop or decelerate the vehicle, causing rapid
wear of the clutch brake friction discs. Consider-
able heat will be generated, causing damage to
the release bearings and the transmission front
bearings.

Holding the Vehicle on an Incline

Always use the vehicle service brakes to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards while stopped on a
hill. Slipping the clutch on a hill to maintain the ve-
hicle position will quickly damage the clutch assem-
bly.

Coasting
Coasting with the clutch pedal depressed and the
transmission in a low gear can cause high driven
disc speed. The clutch speed can be much higher
under these conditions than when the engine is driv-
ing the clutch. This condition creates a hazardous
situation due to the lack of vehicle control and due to
the high clutch disc speed. Engaging the clutch
under these conditions can cause component dam-
age because of the shock loads to the clutch and
drivetrain.

16.2
 17
Drive Axles
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Driver-Controlled Differential Lock (DCDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Drive Axles

Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles 1 2 3

LOCK LOCK LOCK
The interaxle lock (axle lock, interaxle differential
lockout) feature causes the drive axle shafts to rotate
together, and is recommended for use under adverse
road conditions where greater traction is needed.
When engaged, the interaxle lock essentially makes
INTR FWD REAR
the driveshaft a solid connection between the drive AXLE DIFF DIFF
axles. Power entering the forward axle is transmitted
straight through to the rearmost axle(s). Driveline UNLOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK
torque is now delivered equally and the drive axles,
and wheels, turn together at the same speed. The LOCK LOCK LOWER

interaxle lock increases drivetrain and tire wear and

should be used only when improved traction is
required.
A status screen showing engaged locks is found in
the vehicle operations menus on the driver display. DIFF DIFF LIFT
LOCK LOCK AXLE
See Fig. 17.1.
UNLOCK UNLOCK RAISE
4 5 6
09/15/2016 f611344
1. Interaxle Lock Switch
2. Forward Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
3. Rear Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
4. Differential Lock Switch, 6X4
5. Differential Lock Switch, 4X2
6. Lift Axle Switch
Fig. 17.2, Axle Switches

Interaxle Lock Operation

NOTICE
The interaxle lock should not be engaged on a
vehicle with obviously spinning wheels. Engage-
ment at high speed or power can damage the
axle(s).
NOTE: If the interaxle lock is engaged when the
engine is turned off, the interaxle lock will disen-
09/15/2016 f611458 gage.
Fig. 17.1, Interaxle and Differential Locks Status Screen 1. With the engine running, press the upper half of
the interaxle lock switch to engage the interaxle
Interaxle Lock Switch lock. Do not wait until traction is lost and the tires
are spinning before engaging the interaxle lock.
The interaxle lock switch (see Fig. 17.2) allows the
driver to lock the drive axles together. 2. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-
celerator until the interaxle lock engages. An indi-
cator light on the interaxle lock switch illuminates
when the lock is engaged. Depending on the ve-
hicle configuration, a buzzer may also sound.

17.1
 Drive Axles

NOTE: On some vehicles, the differential lock

NOTICE system is connected through the low speed
range of the transmission. If this system is used,
Do not operate the vehicle continuously with the
interaxle locked during extended good road con- the transmission must be in the low speed
ditions. To do so could result in damage to the range for the wheels to fully lock. In addition,
axle gearing and excessive driveline and tire shifting out of low speed range will also disen-
wear. gage the differential lock.
3. Proceed over poor road conditions with caution. NOTE: If the DCDL is engaged when the engine
4.
is shut down, the DCDL will disengage.
Press the lower half of the interaxle lock switch
to disengage the interaxle lock after leaving poor 1. With the engine running, press the upper half of
road conditions. the differential lock switch to engage the DCDL.
5. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac- 2. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-
celerator to allow the interaxle lock to disengage, celerator to relieve torque on the gearing, allow-
then resume driving at normal speed. Once the ing the differential to fully lock. An indicator light
interaxle lock disengages, the indicator light will on the differential lock switch illuminates when
go off. the lock is engaged. Depending on the vehicle
configuration, a buzzer may also sound.
Driver-Controlled Differential
Lock (DCDL) WARNING
The driver-controlled differential lock (DCDL) feature Be especially careful when driving under slippery
(side-to-side wheel lock, traction control, or traction conditions with the differential locked. Though
equalizer) is available on vehicles with single- or forward traction is improved, the vehicle can still
tandem-drive axles. slip sideways, causing possible loss of vehicle
control, personal injury, and property damage.
The DCDL provides maximum traction for slippery
conditions by forcing the wheels on each drive axle 3. Drive cautiously and do not exceed 25 mph (40
governed by the switch to rotate together. When the km/h). When the differential is fully locked, the
DCDL is engaged, the clutch collar completely locks turning radius will increase because the vehicle
the differential case, gearing, and axle shafts to- understeers. See Fig. 17.3.
gether, maximizing the traction of both wheels. Use
the DCDL if the interaxle lock does not provide suffi- A
cient traction.
A status screen showing engaged locks is found in
the vehicle operations menus on the driver display.
See Fig. 17.1. B

Differential Lock Switch

Each differential lock is controlled by a switch on the
dash. See Fig. 17.2. 02/03/2017 f350079a
A. Turning Radius When the DCDL is Engaged
DCDL Operation (understeer condition)
B. Turning Radius When the DCDL is Disengaged
NOTICE Fig. 17.3, Turning Radii
Engage the DCDL only when the vehicle is 4. Press the lower half of the differential lock switch
stopped or moving at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). to disengage the DCDL after leaving poor road
Engaging the DCDL at speeds above 5 mph (8 conditions.
km/h) can cause internal axle damage.

17.2
Drive Axles

5. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-

celerator to allow the wheels to fully unlock, then
resume driving at normal speed.

Single Drive Axles with Traction

Equalizer
Some single drive axles are equipped with a traction
equalizer that is a load-sensing, self-actuating fea-
ture. A traction equalizer provides normal differential
action where traction is good. When one wheel be-
gins to spin faster than the other, clutch plates in the
differential housing automatically engage, delivering
power to both wheels. There is no operator control
with this feature.

NOTICE
Tire sizes on both rear wheels should be the
same on axles equipped with a traction equalizer.
If not, excessive wear may occur in the traction
equalizer.

17.3
 18
Fifth Wheels
Fifth Wheels, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6
Fifth Wheels

Fifth Wheels, General Fontaine and Holland Fifth Wheels

Information Coupling
1. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to
WARNING prevent the trailer from moving.
2. Ensure the fifth wheel jaw is fully open and the
Do not use any fifth wheel that fails to operate operating rod is in the unlocked position. See
properly. Doing so may cause loss of vehicle Fig. 18.1 or Fig. 18.2.
control, possibly resulting in severe personal in-
jury or death.

Fifth Wheel Lubrication

1

WARNING
Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent
binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding A
fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal 2
injury or death.
The standard fifth wheel plate must be kept well lu-
bricated with chassis grease to prevent friction and
1
binding between the tractor fifth wheel plate and the
trailer.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, inspect the condition
of the low-lube pads. There should be no damaged
or missing pieces. Slight puckering at the outside B
edges is normal. 2

For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the ve- 04/06/2017 f310110a

hicle Maintenance Manual. NOTE: Make sure the safety latch is down when the
control handle is locked.
Fifth Wheel Coupling A. Unlocked B. Locked
1. Safety Latch 2. Lock Control Handle
Fifth wheel coupling is activated with the lock control
handle located on either the right side or left side of Fig. 18.1, Fontaine Locking Mechanism
the fifth wheel. Coupling has successfully occurred
when the kingpin has been forced into the jaws and 3. Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted so the
the lock control handle has moved to the locked ramps are as low as possible.
position. 4. Position the tractor so that the center of the fifth
wheel is in line with the trailer kingpin. The king-
NOTICE pin should be in a position to enter the throat of
the locking mechanism.
Some fifth wheels may be mounted on sliding
rails. Before attempting to couple a trailer to a
sliding fifth wheel, the slide feature must be
NOTICE
locked to prevent the top plate from sliding rap- Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
idly forward or rearward, causing damage to the cause improper coupling, which could result in
fifth wheel or kingpin. damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
5. Adjust the trailer height if required.

18.1
 Fifth Wheels

B
1

04/28/2017 f311125
A. Adjust trailer height B. Ramps tilted down
1 Fig. 18.4, Trailer Connection Point, Low-Lube Fifth
3 Wheel

6. With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the

trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
trailer. After sliding under the trailer, STOP to
prevent from hitting the kingpin too hard, then
resume backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
04/19/2017 f310447
On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
1. Safety Latch the trailer.
2. Operating Rod (locked)
3. Operating Rod (unlocked) On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
Fig. 18.2, Holland Simplex SE Locking Mechanism
7. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to WARNING
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the fifth wheel
pivot. See Fig. 18.3. A visual inspection is required by law. Some im-
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel proper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incor-
should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See rect coupling could cause the trailer to discon-
Fig. 18.4. nect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
or death.
D 8. Perform a coupling inspection, checking that
A
there is no gap between the bottom of the trailer
C and the fifth wheel, and that the kingpin is se-
curely locked. See Fig. 18.5
When lockup has occurred, the fifth wheel con-
trol handle moves to the locked position. Make
sure that the safety latch is down over the lock
B control handle to hold the control handle in the
locked position. (The safety latch will only rotate
04/28/2017 f311124
down if the operating rod is fully retracted in the
locked position.) See Fig. 18.1 for Fontaine fifth
A. Fifth wheel must lift C. Ramps tilted down wheels. See Fig. 18.2 for Holland fifth wheels.
trailer D. 4 to 8 inches
B. Adjust trailer height 9. Release the tractor parking brakes. Test for king-
pin lockup slowly inching the tractor forward, pull-
Fig. 18.3, Trailer Connection Point, Standard Fifth ing on the trailer against the chocks.
Wheel

18.2
Fifth Wheels

A B
04/28/2017 f311126
A. No gap between trailer B. Kingpin inside lock
and fifth wheel
Fig. 18.5, Coupling Inspection

10. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to- 04/28/2017 f311128

trailer air system lines and the electrical cable to A. Lock held open by catch mechanism
the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign
material from entering the air system lines. Fig. 18.6, Jost Release Handle Unlocked

brakes are set. See Chapter 4 in this manual for

NOTICE operation of the dash-mounted brake controls.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables posi- NOTICE
tioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rub-
bing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, poten- cause improper coupling, which could result in
tially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems. damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
11. Charge the air brake system with air, checking 7. Adjust the trailer height (if required).
that the air connections do not leak. For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
WARNING 8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the pivot. See
Fig. 18.3.
Incorrect fifth wheel lock adjustment could cause For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in se- must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
rious personal injury or death. should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See
12. With the trailer wheels chocked and the brakes Fig. 18.4.
set, check for clearance between the kingpin and 8. Back the tractor under the trailer.
the fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward
and backward against the locked kingpin. If slack On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
is present, uncouple the trailer and have the fifth the trailer.
wheel inspected and adjusted by a certified On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
technician. this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling 9. After sliding under the trailer, STOP to prevent
from hitting the kingpin too hard, then resume
1. Tilt the ramp down. backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
2. Open the kingpin locks. See Fig. 18.6.
3. Back the vehicle close to the trailer, centering the
WARNING
kingpin on the fifth wheel. A visual inspection is required by law. Some im-
4. Chock the trailer wheels. proper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incor-
5. Connect the air lines and electrical cable. rect coupling could cause the trailer to discon-
6. Ensure that the red trailer air supply valve (trailer nect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
brake) is pulled out, and that the trailer parking or death.

18.3
 Fifth Wheels

10. Apply the tractor parking brake, then perform a 6.1 Fontaine: Lift the safety latch and pull the
physical check for positive kingpin lockup, and lock control handle to the unlocked posi-
that there is no gap between the trailer and the tion. See Fig. 18.1.
fifth wheel. See Fig. 18.5.
6.2 Holland: In the locked position the safety
11. Ensure that the release handle is in the locked indicator swings freely over the operating
position adjacent to the casting. See Fig. 18.7. rod. See Fig. 18.8, View A.

OK OK

04/28/2017 f311127

Fig. 18.7, Jost Release Handle Locked

12. Release the tractor parking brakes and test for To unlock the mechanism, manually rotate
kingpin lockup by slowly moving the tractor for- the safety indicator toward the rear of the
ward, pulling on the trailer against the chocks. fifth wheel. See Fig. 18.8, View B.
Pull the operating rod out. When the
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling upper operating rod shoulder is outside
the slot, raise the handle and place the
Manual Uncoupling shoulder of the upper rod against the plate
1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes. casting, above the slot. See Fig. 18.8,
View C.
2. Chock the trailer rear wheels.
The fifth wheel is now in the lockset posi-
3. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is tion and is ready for uncoupling. As the
removed from the fifth wheel. tractor pulls away from the trailer the king-
pin forces the jaw to rotate, contacting the
4. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines
lock. Continued rotation of the jaw forces
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
the lock to move outward, and drops the
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines.
upper rod back into the slot. See Fig. 18.8
5. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red View D. The wheel is now ready for
trailer-air-supply knobs are out, the tractor and coupling.
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer 6.3 Jost: Pull the retractable handle out, then
is prepared for uncoupling. secure it in the open position with the
6. Release the kingpin locking mechanism following catch. See Fig. 18.6.
the instructions for each manufacturer below. 7. Release the tractor parking brake then drive out
slowly, allowing the trailer to slide down the fifth
wheel and pick-up ramps.

18.4
Fifth Wheels

1
4

A 2 C

B D

11/02/2010 f311133
A. Locked Position C. Lockset Position (upper rod resting against casting
B. Unlatched Position (safety indicator rotated towards the above slot)
rear of the fifth wheel) D. Open Position (ready for recoupling)
1. Safety Indicator 3. Upper Rod
2. Operating Rod 4. Plate Casting

Fig. 18.8, Holland Kingpin Locking Mechanism

Air-Actuated Uncoupling WARNING

A dash-mounted kingpin release switch (if equipped)
may be used to uncouple the trailer. See Fig. 18.9. Once the kingpin release switch has been
pushed, the kingpin lock is released. The vehicle
NOTE: In the event of an air system failure, air- MUST NOT be driven with the trailer until the
actuated kingpins can be manually released fol- trailer has been uncoupled and coupled again.
lowing the instructions for manual unlocking. Failure to do so may result in separation of the
trailer from the tractor, possibly causing serious
personal injury or death.

18.5
 Fifth Wheels

K−PIN
REL

03/09/2016 f611341
06/14/2016 f611426
Fig. 18.9, Kingpin Release Switch
Fig. 18.10, Kingpin Release Alert Screen
Preparing the Trailer for Uncoupling
Before using the air valve to unlock a fifth wheel Fifth Wheel Slide
kingpin, prepare the trailer as follows.
1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes. WARNING
2. Chock the trailer rear wheels. Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly, and do not
3. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading
removed from the fifth wheel. the trailer. Incorrect slide adjustment or improper
axle loading could cause erratic steering and
4. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air lines and elec- loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in seri-
trical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent dirt or ous personal injury or death.
foreign material from entering the lines.
On sliding fifth wheel assemblies, the fifth-wheel
Air-Activated Kingpin Unlock plate is attached to rails that allow forward and rear-
ward movement of the fifth wheel to optimally distrib-
1. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red ute the load across the axles. Slots are evenly
trailer-air supply knobs are out, the tractor and spaced along the slide rails, and retractable wedges
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer are positioned through the slots to hold the fifth
is prepared for uncoupling. wheel in the desired position.
NOTE: The kingpin release will not actuate if the The amount of load distribution on the front steering
switch is pushed for less than 3 seconds, the axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
vehicle is moving, or the parking brake is not the steering control of the vehicle. Determine the
set. Unless all these conditions are met, the front and rear axle weights by weighing the vehicle
trailer is not uncoupled and an alert is shown on on scales designed for this purpose.
the driver display. The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on the
2. Push and hold the kingpin release switch Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
(Fig. 18.9) for a minimum of 3 seconds. The sys- label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
tem will apply air for 20 to 30 seconds to ensure (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear door post of
the kingpin unlocks. When the kingpin is un- the tractor. The desired load on the axle is no less
locked, a notification is displayed; see than 80 percent of the maximum axle weight rating,
Fig. 18.10. but in no instances should the axle load exceed the
maximum axle weight rating given on the FMVSS or
3. Release the tractor parking brake. CMVSS label.
4. Drive out from under the trailer.
Manual Slide Operation
The manual slide feature is operated from the fifth
wheel plate with a manual release handle using the
following procedure. See Fig. 18.11.

18.6
Fifth Wheels

05/05/2017 f310050
2
07/25/95 f310190 Fig. 18.12, Releasing the Sliding Fifth Wheel, (Fontaine)
1. Locking Wedge
2. Slide Release Pull Handle
5
Fig. 18.11, Manual Release Sliding Fifth Wheel 4
(Fontaine shown)
6
1. Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight line on 3
level ground. Pull the red trailer air supply knob
to apply the trailer parking brakes. 8

2. Apply the tractor parking brake, then release the 3

2
sliding mechanism using the appropriate method
for the fifth wheel manufacturer. 1 7
2.1 Fontaine: Lift the slide release pull handle
to disengage it from the guide plate. Then,
pull out the handle until it is in the un- 05/05/2017 f310445
locked position and can be positioned
1. Baseplate 5. Slider Saddle Plate
against the guide plate to hold it out. The
2. Bolted Stop 6. Safety Latch
handle will stay in the unlocked position 3. Baseplate Rail 7. Operating Rod
until it is manually disengaged from the 4. Fifth Wheel Mount 8. Operating Lever
guide plate. See Fig. 18.12.
Fig. 18.13, Sliding Fifth Wheel Manual Release,
2.2 Holland: Pull the operating rod out. Make (Holland Simplex)
sure both side plungers have released.
See Fig. 18.13.
3. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re-
NOTICE
move the weight from the tractor. When moving the fifth wheel to the desired posi-
4. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to tion, be sure the trailer landing gear will not at
prevent the trailer from moving. any time come in contact with the tractor frame
or other components. Make sure that the front of
5. Release the tractor parking brakes, then slowly the trailer will not come in contact with the rear
move the tractor forward or backward until the of the cab or with other components if they ex-
fifth wheel is in the desired location. tend beyond the rear of the cab.

18.7
 Fifth Wheels

Ensure the locking plungers have released. See

WARNING Fig. 18.15.
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the For Jost fifth wheels, the mechanism activates as
slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may shown in Fig. 18.16.
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal in- 1
jury or death.
6. Apply the tractor parking brakes, then lock the
sliding member in position using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
6.1 Fontaine: Disengage the slide release
pull handle from the guide plate. The slide
release pull handle is spring-loaded in the
locked position and will seek the locked
position when disengaged from the guide
plate. After the slide release pull handle
returns to the fully locked position, visually
and physically check the locking wedges
to make sure they are fully inserted into
the slots in the slide rails. Make sure the
handle is locked in position against the 2
guide plate. 07/25/95 f310189
1. Locking Wedge 2. Air Cylinder
6.2 Holland: Raise the operating rod so that it
is free to move inward. Make sure that the Fig. 18.15, Air-Operated Sliding Fifth Wheel (Fontaine
lock pins have seated in the base plate shown)
rail holes and the operating rod moves
into the locked position. 2. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re-
move the weight from the tractor.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to enter 3. Pull the red trailer-air-supply knob to set the
the fully locked position. trailer-parking brakes.
4. Slowly move the tractor forward or backward
Air Slide Operation until the fifth wheel is in the desired location.
The slide feature may be operated with an air switch
mounted in the dash, that operates an air cylinder NOTICE
that locks and unlocks the slide. See Fig. 18.14.
Ensure the trailer landing gear does not come in
SLIDE
contact with the tractor frame or other compo-
nents, and that the front of the trailer will not
come in contact with the rear of the cab or other
components if they extend beyond the rear of the
cab.
5. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
AIR
SLIDE
WARNING
LOCK
09/28/2016 f611343 Check that the locking wedges have seated in the
1. Fifth Wheel Air-Slide Switch slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
Fig. 18.14, Air-Slide Switch trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal in-
jury or death.
1. Set the air-slide switch (Fig. 18.14) to SLIDE.

18.8
Fifth Wheels

09/10/2010 f311131
A. Unlocked B. Locked
Fig. 18.16, Jost Sliding Fifth Wheel

6. Set the air-slide switch to LOCK. Visually inspect

the locking wedges or plungers to make sure
that they are fully inserted in the slide rail slots.
Verify that the plungers have engaged by tugging
the tractor forward while the trailer brakes are
locked and the wheels are chocked.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to fully
lock.

18.9
 19
Trailer Couplings
Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Trailer Couplings

Holland Trailer Coupling

1 2
General Information
IMPORTANT: Refer to the Holland web site 3
(www.hollandhitch.com) for additional informa-
tion.
The Holland trailer coupling is designed for use with
trailers having a maximum gross weight of 10,000 lb.
(4540 kg) for Holland PH-10RP41 and PH-10RP51,
or 30,000 lb. (13,610 kg) for Holland PH-30RP41 and
PH-30RP51. It is a rigid-type pintle hook, used only
on tractor applications, and is fastened to the rear
closing crossmember of the vehicle. It is a non-air- 4
adjusted coupling. See Fig. 19.1 and Fig. 19.2.

1
02/17/2017 f311176
1. Lock 3. Latch
2. Lock Pin 4. Pintle Hook
2
Fig. 19.2, Holland Trailer Coupling with Lock Pin

tioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rub-

bing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting
in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, poten-
3 tially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
6. Connect the trailer electrical and air lines.

Trailer Release
01/12/2016 f311187
1. Lock 3. Pintle Hook 1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
2. Latch
Fig. 19.1, Holland Trailer Coupling with FastLatch
WARNING
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail-
Trailer Hookup ers not equipped with spring parking brakes.
1. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer. This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air
bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake appli-
2. Remove the lock pin (if equipped), then lift the cation is lost. This could allow the unattended
lock handle and raise the latch. vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious
3. Back up the vehicle until the drawbar eye is over personal injury or death.
the pintle hook. 2. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
4. Lower the trailer, until the drawbar eye rests on 3. Disconnect the trailer air and electrical lines.
the pintle hook. Plug the air lines to keep them free of dirt.
5. Push the latch closed, then insert the lock pin (if 4. Take the weight of the trailer drawbar off the
equipped). pintle hook.
5. Open the latch by removing the lock pin (if
NOTICE equipped), then lift up the lock and raise the
latch.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables posi- 6. Slowly drive the vehicle away from the trailer.

19.1
 20
Headlights
Headlight Aiming, Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Headlight Aim Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Headlight Aim Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Halogen Headlamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3
Headlights

Headlight Aiming, Preliminary

Checks A
Before checking or adjusting the headlight aim, do
the following.
• Check that the hood is closed and latched.
• Remove any large amounts of mud or ice from
the underside of the fenders.
• Check the springs for sagging or broken
leaves.
• Check the suspension for proper functioning of
the leveling mechanism. On cabs with air sus-
pensions, make sure that the height is properly 09/21/2016 f546613
adjusted. A. The height adjusting dot is located in front of the
• Check for damage to the hood and hinge as- low-beam lamp on the headlight lens.
sembly. Repair as necessary. Fig. 20.1, Headlight
• With the vehicle unloaded, check that the tires
Table 20.1, adjust the vertical positioning of that
are inflated to the recommended air pressure. headlight.
• Clean the headlight lenses. Use a soft cloth
with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent, and Headlight Aim Adjustment
water.
The adjusting screw is located on the bottom of the
Headlight Aim Check headlight assembly, accessible from inside the wheel
well when the hood is closed. See Fig. 20.4. Re-
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, 25 ft (7.6 m) move the plug. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to
away from, and perpendicular to, a vertical raise the beam and counterclockwise to lower it, until
screen or wall. Shut down the engine and set the the beam pattern meets the acceptable standard.
parking brake. Chock the tires.
2. Each headlight has a height adjusting dot on the
lens. See Fig. 20.1. Measure the distance from
the ground to the height adjusting dot on each
headlight (Fig. 20.2, Item A). Note those
distances.
3. On the screen or wall, mark the locations of each
headlight bulb center using the distances found
in step 2. See Fig. 20.2, Items 2 and 3.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlights.
5. Check the vertical adjustment of the low beams.
The center of each beam projection should fall
on or near the marks made during step 3. See
Fig. 20.3.
6. Use Table 20.1 to determine the maximum verti-
cal distance allowable between the marks on the
wall and the center of each low-beam projection.
If the distance between either projection center
and the mark made on the wall or screen is
greater than the maximum distance given in

20.1
 Headlights

2
3

A A
B
B

7.6 m)
25 ft (
1
02/25/2016 f546264
A. Measure the distance from the ground to the center of each headlight bulb.
B. Mark where the center of each headlight projection should appear.
1. Screen or Wall 3. Center of Left-Hand Headlight Projection
2. Center of Right-Hand Headlight Projection
Fig. 20.2, Headlight Aiming Screen/Wall

1
2

02/25/2016 f546265
A. Measurement: 25 ft (7.6 m)
1. Low-Beam Angle Upper Limit 3. Low-Beam Angle Lower Limit
2. Ideal Low-Beam Projection

Fig. 20.3, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

20.2
Headlights

02/25/2016 f546266

Fig. 20.4, Headlight Adjusting (shown with the hood

open)

Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

Distance Between Ground Desired Variation (Fig. 20.3, Upper Limit (Fig. 20.3, Item Lower Limit (Fig. 20.3, Item
and Headlight: inches (mm) Item 2): inches (mm) 1): inches (mm) 3): inches (mm)
22–36 (560–900) 0 3.9 (100) 3.9 (100)
36–48 (900–1200) 2 (50) down 2 (50) 6 (150)
48–54 (1200–1400) 4 (101.6) down 1.6 (40) 6.5 (165)
Table 20.1, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

Halogen Headlamp Bulb and marker lamps. Installing higher wattage

bulbs may damage the headlamp housing or the
Replacement wiring.
NOTE: The following procedure is for halogen There are three bulbs housed in the headlight bucket
headlamp bulbs only. Light-emitting diode (LED) assembly. See Fig. 20.5. Each bulb can be replaced
must be replaced as an assembly because indi- using the same procedure.
vidual bulbs cannot be replaced.
1. Open the hood.
IMPORTANT: When replacing halogen bulbs, 2. Remove the back cover from the headlamp
use only SAE/DOT approved H11 bulbs with a housing.
55 watt rating for the headlamps, and SAE/DOT
approved 4157 NAK LL lamps for turn signal

20.3
 Headlights

1
1
2

01/11/2019 f546929
1. Turn Signal Lamp, 4157NAL LL, 28.5/8.3 Watt (dual
01/11/2019 f546928
element)
2. Low Beam Headlamp, H11, 55 Watt 1. Red Locking Tab
3. High Beam Headlamp, H11, 55 Watt
Fig. 20.6, Halogen Headlamp Electrical Connector
Fig. 20.5, Halogen Headlamp Assembly
pointing straight down and the red gasket is no
NOTE: Do not disconnect the electrical connec- longer visible. See Fig. 20.7.
tor before removing the bulb from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly
by twisting the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn then lifting the bulb out of the headlamp as-
sembly.
4. Squeeze the connector lock and slide the red A
locking tab down to disconnect the electrical con- B
nector. See Fig. 20.6.
01/15/2019 f546930
CAUTION A. If the red gasket on the headlamp is visible, the
headlamp is not fully seated in the housing.
Ensure that the bulb is installed correctly, and B. The headlamp is installed properly if the connector
that it is firmly seated in the headlamp housing. is pointing straight down and no part of the red
Failure to install the bulb correctly may damage gasket on the headlamp is visible.
the headlamp housing or the wiring.
Fig. 20.7, Correct Halogen Headlamp Installation
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the bulb during re-
placement. Any oils or debris that come in con- 7. Install the back cover on the headlamp housing.
tact with the glass bulb may shorten the life of
the lamp.
5. Connect the electrical connector to the lamp and
slide the red locking tab up.
6. Position the new bulb in the headlamp housing,
then twist the bulb clockwise a quarter turn. The
lamp is fully seated only when the connector is

20.4
 21
Vehicle Appearance and
Care
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Dashboard and Instrument Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Vehicle Appearance and Care

Cab Washing and Polishing • To prevent rust, have any nicks or other dam-
age on the finish touched up as soon as pos-
IMPORTANT: Carefully read all instructions be- sible.
fore using or applying any cleaner or product on • Park your vehicle in a sheltered area whenever
the vehicle or components. Failure to follow possible.
manufacturers’ recommendations can result in
damage to the finish. To prevent delamination and deterioration of labels
and stickers on the cab, follow these guidlines care-
fully:
WARNING
• Do not pressure wash the label or sticker or
Do not power wash or steam clean the engine surfaces near it.
bay in the area of vehicle electrical components,
• Do not use strong alkaline soaps on or near
unless specified by vehicle manuals or service
the label or sticker.
literature. Power washing and steam cleaning can
cause corrosion, permanently damaging these
components, which could result in fire, personal Care of Fiberglass Parts
injury, or property damage.
Wash unpainted fiberglass air fairings and shields
To protect the finish of your new vehicle, follow these monthly with a mild detergent, such as dishwashing
guidelines carefully. liquid. Avoid strong alkaline cleansers.
• During the first 30 days, rinse your vehicle fre- Apply a wax specifically designed for fiberglass.
quently with water. If the vehicle is dirty, use a
mild liquid soap. Do not use detergent. Care of Chrome Parts
• During the first 30 days, do not use anything
abrasive on your vehicle. Brushes, chemicals, To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and pro-
and cleaners may scratch the finish. tected at all times. This is especially important during
winter driving and in coastal areas where there is
• During the first 120 days, do not wax your exposure to salt air.
vehicle.
When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
To extend the life of your vehicle’s finish, follow these soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
guidelines. used.
• Avoid washing your vehicle in the hot sun. Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a non-
• Always use water. After the cab is completely abrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or
other material. Do not use steel wool.
washed, dry it with a towel or chamois.
• Do not dust painted surfaces with a dry cloth, To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a
coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax
as this will scratch the paint.
on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as ex-
• Do not remove ice or snow from a painted sur- haust pipes.
face with a scraper of any sort.
• To prevent damage to the finish, wax it regu- Care of Exterior Lights
larly. Before waxing, if the finish has become
Clean the headlight lenses by hand only, using a
dull, remove oxidized paint using a cleaner
flannel cloth with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent,
specifically designed for this purpose. Remove
and water.
all road tar and tree sap before waxing.
Freightliner recommends that a quality brand of
cleaner or cleaner-polish and polishing wax be NOTICE
used.
Do not use a power buffer, paper towels, chemi-
• Do not let diesel fuel or antifreeze stand on a cal solvents, or abrasive cleaners on the head-
painted surface. If either should occur, rinse light lens, all of which can remove the UV coating
the surface off with water. from the surface, and result in yellowing of the
lens.

21.1
 Vehicle Appearance and Care

Dashboard and Instrument Chewing Gum

Panel Care Harden the gum with an ice cube wrapped in a plas-
tic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Any re-
maining traces of gum can be removed with an all-
NOTICE purpose light oil (peanut butter will also work) and
wiped off.
When cleaning the dashboard, instrument panel,
or gauge lens covers, do not use Armor-All Pro-
tectant®, STP Son-of-a-Gun®, window cleaner, or Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote
other equivalent treatments. These cleaners con- Each of these items stains vinyl after prolonged con-
tain vinyl plasticizers which can cause stress tact. They should be wiped off immediately and the
crazing in the interior plastic panels and can re- area carefully cleaned, using a cloth dampened with
sult in cracking of the panels. Some cleaners can naphtha.
also have an adverse effect on the clear plastic
of instrument panels and gauge lens covers, re- Paint, Shoe Heel Marks
sulting in a foggy or cloudy appearance. This
type of damage is not covered by vehicle war- Paint should be removed immediately. Do not use
ranty. paint remover or liquid-type brush cleaner on vinyl.
An unprinted cloth, dampened with naphtha or tur-
To clean the dashboard, instrument panel, and gauge pentine may be used. Use care to prevent contact
lens covers, use a cloth dampened with warm soapy with parts of the upholstery that are not vinyl.
water. Make certain to wring the cloth out well before
cleaning, as excess water will damage the electrical
components.
Sulfide Stains
Sulfide compounds, such as those found in eggs and
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning some canned goods, can stain after prolonged con-
tact with vinyl. These stains can be removed by plac-
To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush- ing a clean, unprinted piece of cloth over the spotted
ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Harsh area and pouring a liberal amount of 6 percent hy-
cleaning agents can cause permanent damage to drogen peroxide onto the cloth. Allow the saturated
vinyl upholstery. To preserve the upholstery and pre- cloth to remain on the spot for 30 to 60 minutes. For
vent damage, carefully review the following sections stubborn spots, allow the hydrogen-peroxide satu-
for recommended cleaning procedures. Waxing or rated cloth to remain on the area overnight. Use cau-
refinishing improves soil resistance and cleanability tion to prevent the solution from seeping into the
for all vinyls. Any hard wax, such as that used on seams, or it will weaken the cotton thread.
automobiles, may be used.
Nail Polish and Nail Polish Remover
Ordinary Dirt
Prolonged contact with these substances causes per-
Wash the upholstery with warm water and mild soap, manent damage to vinyl. Careful blotting immediately
such as saddle or oil soap. Apply soapy water to a after contact minimizes damage. Do not spread the
large area and allow to soak for a few minutes, then liquid during removal.
rub briskly with a cloth to remove the dirt. This can
be repeated several times, as necessary. Shoe Polish
If dirt is deeply imbedded, use a soft bristle brush Most shoe polishes contain dyes which penetrate
after applying the soap. vinyl and stain it permanently. Shoe polish should be
If dirt is extremely difficult to remove, wall-washing wiped off as quickly as possible using naphtha or
preparations normally found around the home can be lighter fluid. If staining occurs, try the procedure used
used. Powdered cleaners, such as those used for for sulfide stains.
sinks and tiles, are abrasive and must be used with
caution as they can scratch the vinyl or give it a per-
manent dull appearance.

21.2
Vehicle Appearance and Care

Ball Point Ink Mildew

Ball point ink can sometimes be removed if rubbed Brush the dry fabric with a soft brush. Sponge with
immediately with a damp cloth, using water or rub- detergent, and blot. If the fabric is colorfast, dilute a
bing alcohol. If this does not work, try the procedure teaspoon of bleach in one quart (one liter) of cool
used for sulfide stains. water. Apply with a swab, directly on the mildew
stain. Dab repeatedly with clear, cool water, and blot
Miscellaneous dry.
If stains do not respond to any of the treatments de-
scribed above, it is sometimes helpful to expose the
vinyl to direct sunlight for up to 30 hours. Mustard,
ball point ink, certain shoe polishes, and dyes often
bleach out in direct sunlight, leaving the vinyl undam-
aged.

Velour Upholstery Cleaning

To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush-
ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Spot
clean with a mild solvent or an upholstery shampoo,
or the foam from a mild detergent. When using a sol-
vent or a dry-cleaning product, follow the instructions
carefully, and clean only in a well-ventilated area.
Avoid any product that contains carbon tetrachloride
or other toxic materials. With either method, pretest a
small area before proceeding. Use a professional
upholstery cleaning service when extensive cleaning
is needed.

Grease and Oil-Based Stains

Dampen a small absorbent cloth with dry-cleaning
solvent or spot remover. Apply the cloth carefully to
the spot from the outer edge to the center. Pat and
blot the spot with a clean, dry cloth. Repeat several
times, as necessary, turning the cloths so that the
stain does not redeposit on the fabric.

Sugar and Water-Based Stains

Apply water-based detergent or cleaner, working in
circular motions. Pat and blot as dry as possible. Re-
peat, if necessary, before drying thoroughly.

Chewing Gum or Wax

Harden the gum or wax with an ice cube wrapped in
a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Ex-
cess wax can be absorbed by placing a thick white
blotter over the wax and heating with a warm (not
hot) iron. Remove the remainder by using the proce-
dure for grease and oil-based stains.

21.3
 22
Pre- and Post-Trip
Checklists
Periodic Inspections and Maintenance, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists

Periodic Inspections and Saddle Tank Areas Comp.

Drain air reservoirs (without automatic drain
Maintenance, General 1
valves)
Information 2 Fuel tank(s) secure
3 Frame rails and crossmembers
It is the driver’s responsibility to perform an inspec- 4 Visible exhaust components
tion, and ensure the complete road-worthiness of a
vehicle, before placing it into service. Commercial Engine Compartment Comp.
vehicles may be subject to inspection by authorized
1 Leakage under engine
inspectors, and an unsafe vehicle can be taken "out
2 Air intake system
of service" until the driver or owner repairs it.
3 Engine oil level
Use the following checklists to ensure that vehicle 4 Power steering reservoir level
components are in good working condition before 5 Engine coolant level
each trip. Careful inspections eliminate stops later to 6 Visible engine wiring
fix overlooked or forgotten items.
7 Frame rails
The checklists in this chapter can be copied and kept
as a record that the procedures have been com- Cab Comp.
pleted. For details on how to inspect each item on 1
Reset dash-mounted air intake restriction
the checklists, see the corresponding procedure indicator (if equipped)
(step number) in Chapter 23. 2 Air pressure warning systems
3 Air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures
Checklists 4 Air pressure build-up time
5 Air system leakage
NOTE: Checklists in this chapter correspond 6 Air pressure reserve
with the procedures and steps in Chapter 23, 7 Mirrors, windows, windshield
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Mainte- 8 Horn, windshield wipers, windshield washers
nance. Your vehicle may not be equipped with 9 Heater and defroster
all components listed below. 10 Interior lights
11 Exterior lights
Daily Pretrip Inspection Checklists 12 Seat belts and tether belts
See the following tables for a list of procedures that 13 Fuel level
should be performed daily, before the first trip. Place 14 Mirror adjustment
a check mark in the complete (Comp.) column to 15 Service brakes
indicate a procedure has been performed. 16 Backup alarm

Inspector Date Weekly Post-trip Inspection Checklist

See the following table for procedures that should be
performed weekly, post-trip. Place a check mark in
Suspension and Slack Adjusters Comp. the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a proce-
1 Suspension components dure has been performed.
2 Slack adjusters
Inspector Date
Wheels and Tires Comp.
1 Wheel covers
2 Tire condition
Engine Compartment Comp.
3 Tire inflation
1 Windshield washer reservoir level
4 Rims and wheel components
2 Air intake restriction indicator
5 Wheel bearing oil seals and lubrication levels
3 Water evacuation components
6 Mud Flaps
4 Automatic transmission fluid level
5 Water in fuel/water separator

22.1
 Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists

Engine Compartment Comp. Fluids Added During Inspection

6 Steering components Fluid Amount Added
7 Serpentine drive belts Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (DOT
4 brake fluid)
Monthly Post-trip Inspection
Checklists
See the following tables for procedures that should
be performed monthly, post-trip. Place a check mark
in the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a proce-
dure has been performed.

Inspector Date

Brake Components Comp.

1 Brake system components
2 Brake chambers
3 Air brake lines
4 Flex air hoses
5 Brake linings and brake drums
6 Brake lining thickness

Saddle Tank Areas Comp.

Drain air reservoirs (with automatic drain
1
valves)
2 Batteries (location may vary)
3 Aerodynamic components

Engine Compartment Comp.

1 Hood and bumper
2 Hydraulic clutch reservoir
3 Radiator and heater hoses
4 Steering wheel play

Fluids Added
Use the following table to note any fluids that were
added during the inspection and maintenance proce-
dures.

Fluids Added During Inspection

Fluid Amount Added
Wheel Bearing Lubricant
Engine Oil
Power Steering Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield Washer Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Fluid

22.2
 23
Pre- and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Daily Pretrip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.9
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.10
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

Safety Precautions • suspension arms

• suspension brackets
DANGER • axle seats

When working on the vehicle, shut down the en- • bushings

gine, set the parking brake, and chock the tires. 2. Inspect slack adjusters for signs of damage. See
Before working under the vehicle, always place Fig. 23.1, Fig. 23.2, or Fig. 23.3.
jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the
vehicle can not drop. Failure to follow these
steps could result in serious personal injury or
death. 4
5
Daily Pretrip Inspections and 6
Maintenance 3
7
8
Complete the following inspection and maintenance
procedures to ensure that vehicle components are in
good working condition before each trip. A driver who 2 9
is familiar with the vehicle and drives it regularly can
perform the daily inspections, then add the weekly 1
and monthly post-trip inspections as scheduled.
10
If the driver does not operate the vehicle on a con-
sistent basis, all daily, weekly, and monthly inspec-
tion and maintenance procedures should be per-
formed before the trip. 02/03/2017 f421398
1. 7/16-inch Adjusting 6. Clevis
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists, Nut 7. ½-inch Clevis Pin
inspections, and maintenance procedures de- 2. Grease Fitting 8. 1/4-inch Clevis Pin
tailed in this chapter are not all-inclusive. 3. Boot 9. Grease Relief
Refer to other component and body manufactur- 4. Link Opening
ers’ instructions for specific inspection and 5. Brake Chamber Piston 10. Slack Adjuster Spline
Rod
maintenance instructions, as well as local, state,
and federal guidelines. Fig. 23.1, Gunite Automatic Slack Adjuster
NOTE: If any system or component does not • Inspect slack adjuster boots, if equipped,
pass this inspection, it must be corrected before for cuts or tears.
operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment re-
• Inspect anchor straps, if equipped, for
quires adjustment, replacement, and/or repair,
damage.
see the New Cascadia Workshop Manual for
procedures and specifications. • Look for worn clevis pins on brake cham-
ber pushrods.
Suspension and Slack Adjuster • Look for missing or damaged cotter pins
Inspection on the clevis pins.
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect suspen- • Ensure chamber piston rods are in line
sion and slack adjuster components. with the slack adjusters.
1. Inspect the following suspension components for Wheel and Tire Inspection
signs of structural damage, cracks, or wear.
• springs
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect each
wheel and tire assembly.
• spring hangers
• shocks

23.1
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

1
2
3
3 4
5

6
7
4 8 9
8
7
6

2
5
A
02/03/2017 f421397
1. Clevis 6. Control-Arm Washers
2. Slack Adjuster and Nut
3. Clevis Pin 7. Anchor Strap Slot
4. Manual Adjusting Nut 8. Anchor Strap
5. Control Arm 9. Brake Chamber
9
Fig. 23.2, Haldex Automatic Slack Adjuster 1 10
05/05/2017 f422530
1. If the vehicle was originally equipped with wheel
1. Grease Fitting (if 5. Clevis Pin (large)
covers, ensure all wheel covers are present. In-
equipped) 6. Clevis Pin (small)
spect wheel covers for damage or wear. Remove 2. Slack Adjuster 7. Actuator Rod
wheel covers from rear drive wheels, if equipped, Housing 8. Boot
prior to inspecting the tires and wheel compo- 3. Brake Chamber 9. Manual Adjusting Nut
nents. Pushrod 10. Camshaft Splines
4. Clevis
NOTE: During wheel cover installation, ensure
the V-notch in the liner inner retaining ring is Fig. 23.3, Meritor Automatic Slack Adjuster
centered on the valve stem. The inner and outer
• oil contamination (petroleum derivatives will
retaining rings should be uniformly aligned to
soften the rubber and destroy the tire)
each other and to the wheel rim. The outer re-
taining ring of the liner is equipped with two • tread depth—if tread is less than 4/32 inch
canvas flaps. When installing the face cover, (3 mm) on any front tire, or less than 2/32
make sure the cover retaining ring is inserted inch (1.5 mm) on any rear tire, replace the
between the two canvas flaps on the liner outer tire
retaining ring so that the Velcro strips line up • debris lodged between duel tire sets
between the face cover and the liner. Make cer-
tain the detachable view cover is centered on IMPORTANT: Low-rolling resistance (LRR) tires
the face cover, and the Velcro strips are minimize wasted energy as a tire rolls, thereby
pressed firmly in place. decreasing rolling effort and improving fuel effi-
ciency. If tire replacement is necessary, replace-
2. Inspect each tire for the following: ment tires must meet or have less rolling resis-
• valve stem caps on every tire, screwed on tance than the originally installed tires in order
finger-tight to maintain compliance with greenhouse gas
and fuel efficiency regulations (GHG14).
• bulges, cracks, cuts, and penetrations

23.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

Contact your tire manufacturer/supplier to deter- Otherwise a vehicle or workshop accident could
mine the rolling resistance of the originally in- occur, possibly resulting in serious personal in-
stalled tires. Visit www.epa.gov/smartway for jury or death.
additional information and resources. 4.2 Inspect for broken, cracked, badly worn,
3. Check tire inflation. bent, rusty, or sprung rings and rims.
For inflation pressures and maximum loads, see
the tire manufacturer’s guidelines. Inflate the tires NOTICE
to the applicable pressures if needed.
Use the recommended torque values and follow
If a tire has been run flat or under-inflated, check the proper tightening sequence. Insufficient
the wheel and tire for damage before adding air. wheel nut torque can cause wheel shimmy, re-
Keep compressed air reservoirs and lines dry sulting in wheel damage, stud breakage, and ex-
during tire inflation. Use well-maintained inline treme tire tread wear. Excessive wheel nut torque
moisture traps and service them regularly. can break studs, damage threads, and crack
discs in the stud hole area.
WARNING 4.3 Make sure all wheel nuts are tightened. If
tightening is necessary, use the tightening
Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or pattern in Fig. 23.4 to initially tighten the
overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress flange nuts to 50 to 100 lbf·ft (68 to 136
the tires and make the tires and rims more sus- N·m). Then tighten the flange nuts to 450
ceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or to 500 lbf·ft (610 to 678 N·m).
tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting
in serious personal injury or death. 1
10 8
NOTICE
A weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or more
in a tire may indicate damage. The tire should be 3 6
inspected and, if necessary, repaired or replaced
by a qualified tire service facility.
IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation pres-
sure must not exceed the rim or wheel manu- 5 4
facturer’s recommendations, even though the
tire may be approved for a higher load inflation.
Consult the rim or wheel manufacturer for the 7 9
correct tire inflation pressure for the vehicle 2
load. 04/30/2007 f400268
4. Examine each rim and wheel component.
Fig. 23.4, Tightening Pattern, 10-Hole Wheels
4.1 Remove all dirt and debris from the as-
sembly. Rust streaks or metal build-up 5. Inspect the outboard side of all wheel hubs and
around stud holes, or out-of-round or worn the hub oil seal area on the inboard side of each
stud holes, may be caused by loose wheel wheel for signs of oil leakage. If any oil is found
nuts. on wheel and tire or brake components, remove
the vehicle from service until the leak has been
fixed.
WARNING
If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
Have any worn or damaged wheel components the hub cap. See Group 35 of the New Casca-
replaced by a qualified person using the wheel dia Maintenance Manual for recommended lubri-
manufacturer’s instructions and the wheel indus- cants.
try’s standard safety precautions and equipment.

23.3
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

6. Check that mud flaps are undamaged and hang 2. Inspect the air intake system for leaks or dam-
10 inches (25.4 cm) or less from the ground. age.

Saddle Tank Areas Inspection NOTICE

WARNING Failure to maintain a sealed air intake system
could allow the entry of dirt and contaminants
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into into the engine. This could adversely affect en-
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or gine performance and result in engine damage.
sludge particles may be in the airstream and 2.1 Push the reset button on the air intake
could cause injury. restriction indicator, if equipped.

NOTICE NOTE: The air intake restriction indicator

may be located on the air intake or the
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is dash.
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the 2.2 Check the air intake duct from the air
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the cleaner to the engine intake. Make sure
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air the duct components are secure and air-
brake system, which could adversely affect brak- tight.
ing.
3. Check the engine oil level.
1. Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs
without automatic drain valves only).
NOTICE
WARNING Operating the engine with the oil level below the
minimum fill (or "add") mark or above the maxi-
Never operate the engine with the fuel tank shut- mum fill (or "full") mark could result in engine
off valves partially closed. This could damage the damage.
fuel pump, causing sudden loss of engine power,
possibly resulting in serious personal injury due 3.1 Check the oil level with the vehicle parked
to reduced vehicle control. on a level surface. See the engine manu-
facturer’s guidelines for engine shutdown
2. Ensure fuel tanks are secured to their mounting time requirements prior to checking the oil
brackets and that the mounting brackets are se- level.
cured to the frame.
If equipped with fuel tank shutoff valves, be sure IMPORTANT: Use CJ-4 engine oil with less
the valves are fully open. than 1% sulfated ash. Failure to use CJ-4 oil
may void the warranty on emission after-
3. Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny treatment components.
areas, or rust streaks. Check all visible cross-
members for damage or signs of looseness. 3.2 If the oil level is at or below the minimum
fill (or "add") mark on the dipstick, add
4. Inspect visible components of the exhaust sys- enough oil to maintain the level between
tem to ensure connections are tight. the minimum and maximum fill marks. See
Inspect upstream of the aftertreatment device the engine operation manual for recom-
(ATD), if equipped, for cracking or signs of leaks, mended lubricants.
such as soot trails. Inspect downstream of the 4. Check the power steering reservoir fluid level.
ATD for signs of exhaust leaks, such as blister-
ing or warping of nearby components. The power steering fluid level should be between
the MIN COLD mark and the middle mark just
Engine Compartment Inspection above it. See Fig. 23.5. If needed, fill the reser-
voir with automatic transmission fluid that meets
1. Check the ground underneath the engine for fuel, Dexron III or TES-389 specifications.
oil, or coolant leaks.

23.4
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

NOTICE
Coolant must be filled to the COLD MAX line of
1
the surge tank. Low coolant could result in en-
gine overheating, which could cause engine dam-
age.
5.1 If the coolant is low, fill the surge tank to
the MAX line with a 50/50 mixture of water
12/15/2014 f462252 and the type of antifreeze currently in-
NOTE: Typical reservoir shown; configurations may stalled in your vehicle.
vary. 5.2 If the surge tank was empty, start the en-
1. Filler Cap gine after refilling and check the level
Fig. 23.5, Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
again when the engine is at operating
temperature.
6. Inspect visible engine wiring for damage or
NOTICE looseness. Check for loose wiring, chafed insula-
Low coolant could result in engine overheating, tion, and damaged or loose hold-down clamps.
which could cause engine damage. 7. Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny
areas, or rust streaks.
IMPORTANT: The surge tank must be cool to
check the coolant level. Cab Inspection
5. Check the engine coolant level in the radiator
1. Push the reset button on the dash-mounted air
surge tank. See Fig. 23.6.
intake restriction indicator, if equipped.
2. With the ignition switch in the OFF position,
check the air-pressure warning system.
NOTE: The low-air warning buzzer only
works when the park brake is released. The
1 low-air warning buzzer is silenced when the
park brake is set.
2.1 If not previously drained, drain the air res-
ervoirs using moderate brake applications
until pressure in both reservoirs is less
than 70 psi (483 kPa).
2.2 Turn the ignition to the ON position. The
ICU will complete a full gauge sweep and
bulb check, and a low-air warning buzzer
2 will sound. Ensure the low air pressure
3 lamp (BRAKE AIR) remains illuminated
4 and a low-air warning buzzer continues to
03/14/2016 f200864 sound after the gauge sweep is complete.
1. Pressure Relief Cap 3. COLD MAX Fill Line 3. Check air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures.
2. Filler Cap 4. COLD MIN Fill Line
3.1 Start the engine and ensure the BRAKE
Fig. 23.6, Coolant Surge Tank AIR lamp goes out and the buzzer si-
lences when pressure reaches approxi-
mately 70 psi (483 kPa) in both air reser-
voirs.

23.5
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

The air governor should cut out at ap- Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
proximately 120 psi (827 kPa). For ve-
Pressure Drop:
hicles with an optional dryer reservoir
Description psi (kPa) Per Minute
module (DRM), the cut-out pressure is
approximately 130 psi (896 kPa). Released Applied
Truck or Tractor Only 2 (14) 3 (21)
3.2 With the engine idling, apply the brake Truck or Tractor w/Single Trailer 3 (21) 4 (28)
pedal several times. The air governor Truck or Tractor w/Two Trailers 5 (35) 6 (42)
should cut in when pressure in the primary
air reservoir (top air gauge) reaches ap- Table 23.1, Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
proximately 100 psi (689 kPa).
4. Check air pressure build-up time. WARNING
4.1 With the air system fully charged, make
one full brake application and note the air When cleaning windshields and windows, always
pressure reading on the primary air stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or
gauge. platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner. Do
not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel tanks,
4.2 Further reduce air pressure using moder- engine, or under-hood components to access the
ate brake applications, then run the en- windshield or windows. Doing so could cause a
gine at governed rpm. fall and result in an injury.
4.3 Note the time that the pressure reaches 7. Inspect the mirrors, window glass, and wind-
the previously noted reading on the pri- shield for cracks or other damage.
mary air gauge, then note the time that
the air pressure reaches cut-out pressure. 8. Ensure that the horn, windshield wipers, and
windshield washers are operating properly.
4.4 If it takes longer than 30 seconds to reach These devices must be in good working order for
cut-out pressure after the primary air safe vehicle operation.
gauge passes the previously noted pres-
sure (noted after one full brake applica- 9. Ensure the heater and defroster are operating
tion), eliminate any leaks or replace the air properly.
compressor before operating the vehicle. 10. Check the operation of all interior lights.
5. Check air leakage in the system. 10.1 Turn on the headlamps and leave them
5.1 With the parking brake applied, the trans- on. If equipped, ensure all gauge bulbs
mission out of gear, and the air system illuminate. If equipped, ensure ICU
fully charged, release the service brakes screens illuminate.
and shut down the engine. 10.2 Ensure all equipped driver control
5.2 Wait one minute and note the air pressure switches illuminate and verify the interior
drop in psi (kPa) per minute from the pri- cab lights controlled by these switches
mary air reservoir. illuminate.
If the pressure drop exceeds the limits 10.3 Ensure both turn signal indicators illumi-
shown in Table 23.1, eliminate any leaks nate when the turn signal switch is acti-
before operating the vehicle. vated.
6. Check the air pressure reserve. 11. Check the operation of all exterior lamps manu-
ally or, if equipped, by using either the LIGHT
With the engine still off, make one full brake ap-
TEST switch on the dash or the Lamp Check
plication and observe the pressure drop on the
button on the key fob.
primary air gauge. If pressure drops more than
25 psi (172 kPa), eliminate any leaks before op- 12. To check exterior lamps manually:
erating the vehicle.
12.1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position.
12.2 Make certain the parking brake is set.

23.6
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

1
2

3
4
9 5
6

8
7
10/25/2019 f546503a

1. Clearance Lamp 6. Headlamp, High Beam

2. Identification Lamps 7. Fog/Driving Lamp
3. Turn Signal 8. Side Marker Lamp
4. DRL/Accent Lamps 9. Stop Lamps, Tail Lamps, Turn Signals, and Back-Up
5. Headlamp, Low Beam Lamp
Fig. 23.7, Exterior Lights

12.3 Activate the high-beam headlamps and

hazard warning lamps.
12.4 Exit the cab and check that all exterior
lamps and reflectors are clean and intact.
12.5 Check that the brake lamps, tail lamps,
headlamps, turn signals, marker lamps,
LIGHT
identification lamps, and clearance lamps TEST
are working properly.
13. To check the exterior lamps using the dash 08/04/2016 f611436
LIGHT TEST switch (see Fig. 23.8) or key fob
Lamp Check button (see Fig. 23.9): Fig. 23.8, Pretrip Light Test Switch

13.1 Make sure the parking brake is set. 13.2 Press either the LIGHT TEST switch or
Lamp Check button to begin the pretrip
NOTE: Factory settings have groups of
light inspection. If equipped, groups of
lamps activate sequentially up to 100 times lamps will cycle on and off in the following
or until manually stopped. sequence:

23.7
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

1 WARNING
2
3
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re-
placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at-
tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may re-
sult in personal injury or death.
14.1 Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme
dirt and dust, or for severe fading from
10/23/2019 f546880a
exposure to sunlight, especially near the
1. Door Lock 2. Door Unlock 3. Lamp Check buckle latch plate and in the D-loop guide
Fig. 23.9, Key Fob area.
14.2 Check operation of the buckle, latch, Kom-
• Group 1: Always ON: marker lamps,
fort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if
clearance lamps, tail lamps, licence equipped), web retractor, and upper seat
plate lamp belt mount on the door pillar. Check all
• Group 2: Low beam headlamps visible components for wear or damage.
• Group 3: High beam headlamps and 14.3 Check the seat belt and tether belt con-
stop lamps nection points and tighten any that are
loose.
• Group 4: Backup lamps and daytime
running lamps
WARNING
• Group 5: Front and rear fog lamps
Never fill fuel tanks to more than 95 percent of
• Group 6: Turn signals and utility
their liquid capacity. This could make them more
lamps
likely to rupture from impact, possibly causing
NOTE: LED accent lighting turns off when fire and resulting in serious personal injury or
the high beam headlamps turn on. death by burning.
13.3 Walk around the truck and check that the Do not mix gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel.
lamps are working properly. This mixture could cause an explosion, possibly
resulting in serious personal injury or death. Do
13.4 Verify that all exterior lights and reflectors not fill the fuel tanks in the presence of sparks,
are clean and intact. open flames, or intense heat. These could ignite
13.5 The pretrip light inspection can be stopped the fuel, possibly causing severe burns.
by: IMPORTANT: Use ultralow-sulfur diesel (ULSD)
• releasing the parking brake; with 15 ppm sulfur content or less. Failure to
use ULSD fuel may void the warranty on emis-
• Pressing either the LIGHT TEST
sion components.
switch on the dash or the Lamp
Check button on the key fob. 15. Check the fuel level in the fuel tank(s). To keep
14. Inspect the seat belts and tether belts.
condensation to a minimum, fuel tanks should be
filled at the end of each day.

23.8
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

16. Adjust the rearview and down view mirrors as

necessary.
17. Test the service brakes.
17.1 With the engine running and air system
fully charged, set the parking brake.
17.2 Put the vehicle in the lowest gear and
gently attempt to move it forward. The ve-
hicle should not move.
If the vehicle moves, the parking brakes
are not operating correctly and must be 1
repaired before the vehicle is operated.
18. Test the backup alarm.
18.1 Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in reverse. 05/21/2007 f820442
1. Washer Fluid Filler Cap
18.2 Move the vehicle slightly backward to en-
sure that the backup alarm is operating Fig. 23.10, Windshield Washer Reservoir
correctly.
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O)
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections Engine Make
GHG14 and GHG17
Engines
and Maintenance Cummins 25
Engine Compartment Inspection Detroit 18
Table 23.2, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
WARNING (inH2O)

Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous. 2.2 If air restriction exceeds the maximum al-
Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or lowable value, operate the vehicle for one
any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always more day, making sure not to run the en-
comply with the washer fluid manufacturer’s rec- gine over rated rpm. Refer to the engine
ommended safety precautions. operation manual for more information on
rated rpm for your engine.
1. Check the windshield washer reservoir fluid level.
The reservoir is usually located near the right- 2.3 If air restriction exceeds the maximum
hand frame rail. See Fig. 23.10. value again, replace the air cleaner. For
instructions, refer to Group 09 of the New
2. After resetting the air intake restriction indicator Cascadia Workshop Manual.
during the daily pretrip inspection, check the indi-
cator again with the engine off. 3. Inspect water evacuation components.
2.1 Check an indicator with graduations to see 3.1 Inspect the vacuator valve(s) installed on
if air restriction exceeds the value shown the hood interior and air cleaner. Make
in Table 23.2. sure the lips of each valve are undam-
aged and pliable, free of debris, and re-
Check a go/no-go indicator without gradu-
main closed during inspection. See
ations to see if the colored bar shows
Fig. 23.11.
through the clear window.
3.2 Inspect the rain tray installed at the base
of the windshield. Ensure that the seal on
the forward edge of the rain tray is in
good condition.

23.9
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

3.3 Inspect the drain hoses installed on the 5.2 If the engine is equipped with a built-in
rain tray. Both hoses should be securely water separator, loosen the drain valve,
attached to the rain tray and direct water and allow the water to run out. Close the
down the aft side of the front fenders. drain valve, taking care not to overtighten
it.
5.3 Detroit/Racor Models: Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise to open it.
1 1 DAVCO Models: Remove the vent cap
and open the drain. See Fig. 23.12.
5.4 Stop draining fluid when fuel begins to
drain out.
Detroit/Racor Models: turn the drain plug
clockwise to close it.
DAVCO Models: close the drain valve.
Install and hand-tighten the vent cap.
6. Inspect the steering components.
6.1 Inspect tie rods, steering arms, and the
drag link for signs of looseness (i.e., shiny
03/14/2016 f880940 spots or rust tracks).
1. Vacuator Valves
6.2 Check the steering gear mounting bolts
Fig. 23.11, Hood Vacuator Valves (hood interior shown) and pitman arm nut, if equipped, for signs
of looseness. See Fig. 23.13.
4. If the vehicle is equipped with an Allison auto-
6.3 Check the drag link nuts for missing cotter
matic transmission, check the automatic trans-
mission fluid level. pins.

5. 6.4 Inspect the steering intermediate shaft and

Check for water in the fuel/water separator, if
equipped. end yokes for excessive looseness or
other damage.
IMPORTANT: When draining fluid from a
fuel/water separator, drain the fluid into an NOTICE
appropriate container and dispose of it prop-
erly. Many jurisdictions now issue fines for Do not drive with a drive belt that is visibly worn
draining fuel/water separators onto the or damaged. If it fails, the lack of coolant flow
ground. could rapidly cause damage to engine compo-
nents.
5.1 Place a suitable container under the fuel/
water separator. 7. Inspect the serpentine drive belts for signs of
glazing, frayed edges, breaks, cracks, or oil con-
NOTE: A hose may be used to direct water tamination.
into the container. On older DAVCO models,
the drain valve has a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) Monthly Post-Trip Inspections
pipe with threads. Use a hose with a 1/2-
inch pipe thread to fit correctly and open the and Maintenance
drain valve by turning it one-quarter revolu- Brake Component Inspection
tion. On new DAVCO models, the drain
valve has a 3/4-inch (19-mm) slip-on hose Walk around the vehicle and inspect brake system
connection; pipe threads are no longer used. components for visible damage.
Open the drain valve by turning it one to NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with a
one-and-a-half revolutions. brake check valve on the dash, which allows the

23.10
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

10/03/2016 f462304
1. Steering Gear Mounting Bolts
2. Pitman Arm Pinch Bolt Nut
3. Drag Link Nut
Fig. 23.13, Steering Gear Fasteners

parking brakes must be applied before the

brake check valve will function.
1. Inspect all visible brake system components for
missing fasteners or signs of looseness, such as
rust tracks.

NOTICE
If the external breather tube or breather cap is
missing or incorrectly installed, road dirt and de-
bris can adversely affect the operation of the
brake chamber. Once inside of the chamber, dirt
and debris can cause the internal parts of the
chamber to deteriorate faster.
2. Inspect the exterior surfaces of brake chambers
for damage. Make sure that breather holes are
1. Lower Housing 8. Spring open and free of debris.
2. Drain Valve 9. Cover O-Ring
3. Inlet Port/Check Valve 10. Clear Cover NOTE: Do not route air brake lines on top of
4. 12VDC Pre-Heater 11. Vent Cap O-Ring anything likely to be stepped on.
5. 120VAC Pre-Heater 12. Vent Cap
6. Bypass Valve 13. Collar 3. Inspect air brake lines for dents, swelling, kinks,
7. Filter Element twisting, abrasion, and damage, especially near
moving parts.
Fig. 23.12, DAVCO Fuel Pro 485
4. Inspect flex air lines for deterioration or signs of
driver to set the service brakes and exit the ve- abrasion.
hicle to check the brake system for leaks. The

23.11
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

5. Inspect for cracked, worn, or oil-contaminated stalled component in order to maintain compli-
brake linings and brake drums (or rotors). ance with greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency
6. Check the thickness of the brake linings. Re- regulations (GHG14).
place brake linings on all brake assemblies on 3. Inspect the following aerodynamic components, if
the axle if any brake linings are worn to less than equipped, for structural damage, cracks, or wear.
approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) at the thinnest
point. • Chassis fairings
• Roof fairing/deflector
Saddle Tank Areas Inspection
• Side skirts
WARNING • Cab/sleeper extenders
• Battery access cover
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and Engine Compartment Inspection and
could cause injury. Adjustments
IMPORTANT: If replacement of the hood or
NOTICE bumper is necessary, the replacement compo-
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
nent must meet or exceed the drag reduction
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the performance of the originally installed item in
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the order to maintain compliance with greenhouse
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air gas and fuel efficiency regulations (GHG14).
brake system, which could adversely affect brak- 1. Inspect the bumper and hood for structural dam-
ing. age, cracks, or wear.
1. Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs 2. Check the hydraulic clutch reservoir, if equipped.
with automatic drain valves only). If necessary, add DOT 4 brake fluid.
NOTE: Battery locations vary between vehicles. 3. Inspect the radiator and heater hoses, including
2. Inspect the batteries. the clamps and support brackets.
3.1 Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler
WARNING for damage and accumulated debris.
Straighten bent or damaged fins to permit
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories airflow across all areas of the cores.
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer NOTE: When traveling through areas of high
and reproductive harm. To prevent possible per- insect concentration, it may be necessary to
sonal injury, always wash your hands after han- clean the exterior of the radiator or the
dling battery parts and related accessories. charge air cooler core as often as every 200
miles (320 km).
2.1 Remove the battery box cover and inspect
all visible battery cables for loose wiring or 3.2 Make sure the radiator inlet and outlet
damage. hoses are pliable and are not cracking or
ballooning.
2.2 Check that the battery hold-down is se-
cure. 3.3 Make sure the heater hoses are pliable
and are not cracking or ballooning.
IMPORTANT: Aerodynamic components de-
crease drag force as a vehicle moves, thereby 3.4 Tighten hose clamps as necessary.
improving fuel efficiency. If replacement of an IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten hose
aerodynamic component is necessary, replace- clamps, as hose life can be adversely af-
ment components must meet or exceed the fected.
drag reduction performance of the originally in-

23.12
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

3.5 Ensure hose support brackets are se-

curely fastened. Make sure hoses are not
located near sources of wear, abrasion, or
high heat.
IMPORTANT: When replacing hoses, install
service-type knitted or braided yarn-reinforced
neoprene hose. Extended-service-life silicone
hoses may also be used. See the Alliance Parts
Catalog at www.alliancebrandparts.com or
contact your Freightliner Dealer.
4. Check the steering wheel for excessive play.
4.1 Start the engine. With the front tires
straight ahead, turn the steering wheel
until motion is observed at the front
wheels.
4.2 Align a reference mark on the steering
wheel to a rule, then slowly turn the steer-
ing wheel in the opposite direction until
motion is again detected at the wheels.
4.3 Measure the lash (free play) at the rim of
the steering wheel. Excessive lash exists
if steering wheel movement exceeds 2-1/4
inches (57 mm) with an 18-inch (450-mm)
steering wheel.
4.4 If there is excessive lash, check the steer-
ing system for wear or incorrect adjust-
ment before operating the vehicle.

23.13
 24
In An Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Emergency Starting With Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5
In An Emergency

Hazard Warning Lights the flares and reflector along the side of the road to
alert other drivers that an emergency situation exists.
The hazard warning light switch is located on the
dash in what is referred to as the master module. Emergency Starting With
See Fig. 24.1. The hazard lights can be activated
regardless of the ignition switch position. Jumper Cables
To activate the hazard lights, push the center of the When using jumper cables, follow the instructions
switch once. The switch will blink at the same rate below.
that the hazard lights flash. Push the switch again to
turn them off. All the turn signal lights on the vehicle WARNING
and trailer, as well as the turn signal indicators in the
ICU, flash simultaneously when the hazard lights are Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke
activated. when working around batteries. Put out all flames
and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat
in the vicinity of the battery. Do not allow the ve-
hicles to touch each other. Do not lean over the
batteries when making connections, and keep all
other persons away from the batteries. Failure to
follow these precautions could lead to severe
personal injury as a result of an explosion or
acid burns.

NOTICE
Make sure both electrical systems are the same
voltage. Electronic devices on both vehicles can
be damaged when connected to a vehicle with a
different operating voltage.
03/09/2016 f611340
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with optional un-
Fig. 24.1, Hazard Warning Switch derhood jump start posts, connect to these
posts instead of the batteries.
Fire Extinguisher 1. Apply the parking brakes and turn off the lights
An optional factory-installed fire extinguisher may be and all other electrical devices.
located in the cab, usually by the driver’s door, or in 2. Remove the battery box cover.
the sleeper baggage compartment.
NOTE: The battery box on a New Cascadia may
Emergency Equipment be located in a variety of locations, including
under the passenger seat, behind the side fair-
Emergency equipment and tools may be supplied in ing, or behind the cab. If the battery box is lo-
the cab or sleeper baggage compartment. The equip- cated behind the side fairing, it can be accessed
ment may include: a first aid kit, triangular reflectors, by opening the side fairing kick panel.
flares, tire-changing equipment, and tools.

WARNING NOTICE
Always connect the battery, jumper cables, and
Use extreme care when placing flares in emer- charger correctly (positive-to-positive and
gency situations that involve exposure to flam- negative-to-negative). Connecting a charging de-
mable substances such as fuel. An explosion or vice backwards (positive-to-negative) can se-
fire could occur causing serious personal injury. verely damage the vehicle electrical content and
If there is an emergency while driving, cautiously pull cause non-warrantable failures.
off the road. Turn on the hazard warning lights. Place

24.1
 In An Emergency

3. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the

positive battery post on the New Cascadia need- WARNING
ing the jump start, then connect the other end of
the positive jumper cable to the positive battery Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
or jump start post of the vehicle providing the allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
jump. See Fig. 24.2. clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
A B severe personal injury from explosion or acid
burns.
8. Disconnect the grounded cable from the frame or
other non-battery location, then disconnect the
+

+
other end of the cable.
− − − − 9. Disconnect the remaining cable from the newly
charged battery (or jump-start post if equipped)
first, then disconnect the other end.
10. Install the cover; be sure it is positioned properly
07/06/2007 C D f545111 before fastening the latches.
A. – Battery Cable to Vehicle
B. + Battery Cable to Vehicle Towing
C. + Jumper Cable (connect first and disconnect last)
D. – Jumper Cable (connect last and disconnect first) When it is necessary to tow the vehicle, make sure
the instructions below are closely followed to prevent
Fig. 24.2, Jumper Connections damage to the vehicle.

WARNING WARNING
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not Do not tow an unbraked vehicle if the combined
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) of the tow-
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in ing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be in-
severe personal injury from explosion or acid adequate, which could result in personal injury or
burns. death.
4. Connect one end of the second jumper cable to
the negative terminal of the booster battery, and Use of Tow Hooks
connect the other end of the cable to to the Tow hooks not are designed for on-road towing of
negative battery post of the New Cascadia need- the vehicle, but to recover and move the vehicle to a
ing the jump start. position where it can be hooked up properly for front
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster or rear towing.
batteries, and let the engine run a few minutes to
charge the batteries of the other vehicle. NOTICE
6. Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle with the When using tow hooks to move the vehicle, do
batteries receiving the charge. Do not operate not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
the starter longer than 30 seconds, and wait at from one hook to another. Known as reeving, this
least two minutes between starting attempts to practice is not permissible in most industrial ap-
allow the starter to cool. plications of towing and hoisting. Reeving can
7. When the engine starts, let it idle a few minutes. overload the hooks and result in damage to the
vehicle. See 24.3.

Front Towing Hookup

1. Disconnect the battery ground cables.

24.2
In An Emergency

OK

1 OK 2
10/05/2016 f880793a
IMPORTANT: Do not reeve when towing.
1. Tow Hook 2. Chain
Fig. 24.3, Reeving

NOTICE NOTICE
Failure to remove the driveline(s) or the drive Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
axle shafts when towing the vehicle with the rear could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
wheels on the ground could result in damage to failure.
the transmission and other parts.
4. On dual drive axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted
2. Remove the driveline and the interaxle driveline and towed, chain the forward rear-axle assembly
(if equipped), or the axle shafts for each axle that to the vehicle frame. Use protection to keep the
may touch the ground during the towing process. chains from damaging the frame.
3. For any axle shaft that has been removed, cover
the ends of the hubs with metal plates or ply- NOTICE
wood cut to fit the axle opening, and drilled to fit
the axle shaft studs. This prevents lubricant from Before towing, failure to remove an aerodynamic
leaking out and will keep contaminants from get- bumper equipped with an air dam could result in
ting into and damaging the wheel bearings and damage to the air dam, which will impact the ve-
axle lubricant. hicle’s aerodynamic performance.
If the driveline(s) were removed, ensure the 5. Remove the aerodynamic bumper if it is
U-joint caps are secure so they will not come off. equipped with an air dam.
6. Attach the towing device.

24.3
 In An Emergency

NOTE: Due to the many variables that exist in mph (70 kph) is necessary, hold down the cab as
towing, positioning the lifting and towing device follows:
is the sole responsibility of the towing-vehicle 2.1 Drain the air from the cab air springs.
operator.
2.2 Loop a 2-inch (5-cm) ratchet-style tension
7. Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If strap (rated 2000 lb [900 kg] minimum
extra towing clearance is needed, remove the work load) over the top of the cab shock
front wheels. and under the frame rail. See Fig. 24.4.
8. Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and sig- Tighten the strap for a snug fit. If the cab
nal lights. Connect any special towing lights re- is equipped with two or more shocks, re-
quired by local regulations. strain the aftmost shock on each side of
the vehicle.
WARNING
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow
truck’s air brake system before releasing the
spring parking brakes could allow the disabled
vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause prop-
erty damage or personal injury.
9. Chock the tires on the disabled vehicle and con-
nect the towing vehicle’s air brake system to the
vehicle being towed. Then, release the spring
parking brakes and remove the chocks.

Rear Towing Hookup

NOTICE
Using a rear towing hookup on a vehicle 05/13/2014 f602527
equipped with a roof fairing could cause damage
to the cab structure. Fig. 24.4, Tension Strap Installed to Hold Down the Cab

If reverse towing at speeds above 45 mph (70 3. Place the front tires straight forward and secure
kph) is necessary, note the following precau- the steering wheel in this position.
tions: 4. Disconnect the battery ground cables.
• Remove the rubber flex extenders from the
side extenders. Failure to do so could re- NOTICE
sult in the loss of the rubber flex extenders.
• Hold down the cab with tension straps Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
looped over the cab shocks and under the could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
frame rails. Failure to do so could allow the failure.
wind load to lift the cab unexpectedly, re- 5. On dual drive axles, using protection to keep the
sulting in damage to the air springs and chains from damaging the vehicle frame, chain
other components. the forward-rear drive axle to the frame.
1. If the vehicle is equipped with side extenders,
and reverse towing at speeds above 45 mph (70 NOTICE
kph) is necessary, remove the rubber flex ex-
tenders from the side extenders. Before towing, failure to remove an aerodynamic
bumper equipped with an air dam could result in
2. If the vehicle is equipped with cab air suspen- damage to the air dam, which will impact the ve-
sion, and reverse towing at speeds above 45 hicle’s aerodynamic performance.

24.4
In An Emergency

6. Remove the aerodynamic bumper if it is

equipped with an air dam.
7. Attach the towing device.
NOTE: Due to the many variables that exist in
towing, positioning the lifting and towing device
is the sole responsibility of the towing-vehicle
operator.
8. Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If
extra clearance is needed, remove the bumper
extension if equipped.
9. Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and sig-
nal lights. Also connect any special towing lights
required by local regulations.

Fire in the Cab

The incidence of fire in heavy- and medium-duty
trucks is rare, according to data from the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard #302 limits the flammability
of specified materials used inside the cab, but de-
spite this, most materials can burn.

WARNING
Do not allow flames, sparks, or any other heat
sources (such as cigarettes or light bulbs) to
contact materials in the cab. Any materials in the
cab in contact with these heat sources could
cause serious personal injury or vehicle damage.

In Case of a Cab Fire

As quickly as possible, bring the vehicle to a safe
stop, apply the parking brake, turn off the ignition,
and get out of the vehicle.

24.5
 26
Telematics Data
Terms of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Telematics Data

Terms of Use Vehicle more effectively and to help you main-

tain it.
Your vehicle ("Vehicle") may be equipped with one or • To improve your customer service experi-
more devices that gather information described ence. Telematics Information may be used by
below regarding the Vehicle and the environment in DTNA and its affiliates, dealers and service
which it may be operating ("Telematics Information"). providers to provide you a more efficient and
The devices may periodically send Telematics Infor- effective customer service experience in con-
mation to Daimler Trucks North America LLC junction with Vehicle service, maintenance,
("DTNA"). Additionally, DTNA and its dealers may field service campaigns and recalls.
manually retrieve Telematics Information from the
devices for the purposes described below. • For product development and product im-
provement. Telematics Information may be
Telematics Information We Collect analyzed and used to identify and resolve per-
and Why We Collect It formance and safety issues and to develop
improvements to our products that will benefit
The Telematics Information we collect may in- you and our future customers.
clude, but is not limited to, information regarding • To develop more meaningful product mar-
the performance, operation, location, speed, keting. Telematics Information may be used to
trips, travel history, stop and idle times, fuel con- provide more customized and meaningful infor-
sumption, fault codes and diagnostic information, mation to our customers regarding products
steering and braking performance, air bag de- and services that best satisfy their operational
ployment and seatbelt use, decelerations, and requirements and improve the performance of
other information relating to the performance, their businesses.
operation, health and safety of your Vehicle.
DTNA gathers this information in order to improve • To help match our customers with the right
the performance, operation, health and safety of your products. Telematics Information may be used
Vehicle and other DTNA vehicles and products, in to develop future products and services that
the following ways, among others: best satisfy the operational requirements of our
customers.
• To enable your subscription services. DTNA
and other third party service providers have
developed a variety of applications and ser-
What We Do with Telematics
vices that are now available to you to optimize Information and Who We Share It
the performance, use, reliability and safe op- With
eration of your Vehicle. These services are en-
abled by the Telematics Information we receive DTNA may use Telematics Information for any pur-
from your Vehicle and will likely be made more pose allowed by law, including but not limited to
effective in the future by the use of that Telem- using the information for any of the purposes de-
atics Information and similar information we scribed in this chapter. DTNA may share Telematics
receive from other DTNA vehicles. Information with its service providers, affiliates, sub-
sidiaries, dealers and distributors, but only for lawful
• To make your Vehicle safer and to improve business purposes. This may include third parties
its performance. Depending on the type of who process information on behalf of DTNA, third
device installed on your Vehicle, DTNA may parties who you authorize directly to receive informa-
periodically update your Vehicle’s on-board tion from us, and law enforcement agencies pursuant
software to improve the performance and safe to applicable law.
use of the Vehicle. We may need to obtain cer-
tain Telematics Information to ensure the effec- DTNA may also combine Telematics Information it
tiveness of these updates. obtains from your Vehicle with data from others, ano-
nymize and de-identify that aggregated data ("Aggre-
• To monitor and manage the health and effi- gated Data"), and use and disclose that Aggregated
ciency of your Vehicle. Telematics Informa- Data and derivatives of it indefinitely and for any pur-
tion from your Vehicle may be used by DTNA pose whatsoever, including sharing it with third par-
and its affiliates, dealers and service providers ties for any purpose without restriction. You will not
to diagnose and resolve problems with your

26.1
 Telematics Data

have any rights in any Aggregated Data or any de- ceive telematics subscription services relating to your
rivatives or proceeds of it. DTNA will be the exclusive Vehicle and unable to remotely receive important Ve-
owner of all rights, title and interests in and to all Ag- hicle software updates, among other things. If you
gregated Data. DTNA shall not have any obligation to are interested in that option, please contact DTNA at:
provide any Aggregated Data to you or to compen- DetroitConnect@Daimler.com.
sate you for any use or disclosure of any Aggregated
Data. Privacy Statement Changes
Collection Method DTNA reserves the right to amend these terms of
use from time to time. Changes will be reflected in
The Telematics Information may be transmitted auto- the online version of this document found at: https://
matically or manually from the devices on your Ve- cmspublish-dtna.prd.freightliner.com/content/
hicle to DTNA or Detroit Diesel Corporation (DDC) public/dtnaconnect---daimler-trucks-north-
through diagnostic tools, including but not limited to america.html. By continuing to provide to us, or
DDC DiagnosticLink. allowing us to receive or retrieve, Telematics In-
formation through the devices on your Vehicle,
Safeguards you consent to and accept those changes.
DTNA will use reasonable data security systems and NOTE: These terms of use do not apply to after-
procedures in an effort to protect Telematics Informa- market telematics devices that may be provided
tion from unauthorized use, access, disclosure, distri- by others or configured to send information to
bution, loss or alteration. We do this through physi- someone other than DTNA or its affiliates,
cal, electronic and procedural safeguards that are dealers or service providers.
designed to protect the confidentiality, integrity and
availability of Telematics Information. However, no
security system is perfect. DTNA cannot guarantee
that Telematics Information will not be hacked, de-
leted, intercepted or altered. DTNA will also require
other parties to whom Telematics Information is dis-
closed to take reasonable steps to protect the Telem-
atics Information from unauthorized use, access, dis-
closure, distribution, loss or alteration.

Your Consent
By continuing to provide to us, or allowing us to re-
ceive or retrieve, Telematics Information through the
devices on your Vehicle, you consent to its collection
and use as described in this chapter. Although some
information may be transferred to and processed in
countries without laws providing the same level of
data protection as your country, our use and disclo-
sure of your information is subject to these terms of
use regardless of where your information is trans-
ferred. If you have subscribed to a subscription
service such as Virtual Technician or Detroit Ana-
lytics, the Telematics Terms and Conditions for
that service will apply to DTNA’s collection, stor-
age, use and sharing of the data covered by
those Terms and Conditions.

Your Rights
You may ask DTNA to discontinue receiving and re-
trieving Telematics Information from the devices on
your Vehicle. If you do so, you will be unable to re-

26.2
Index

Subject Page Subject Page

A Selected Gear (Detroit and
Eaton Transmissions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Accessory Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Suggested Shift (Detroit and
Eberspaecher (Espar) Eaton Transmissions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Webasto Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Adjustable Steering Column
B
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15 Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 Accessing Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 Exiting Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Brake System General Battery-Powered HVAC System
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 (BPHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Brake System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 BPHS Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10
Automatic Mode (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11
General Information, Allison
C
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10 Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Low (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Manual Mode (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Operation Tips, Allison Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10 Radio and CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Transmission Prognostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.12 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Analog Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Universal Serial Bus (USB)
Air Intake Restriction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Application Air Pressure Cab Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21 Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21 Mode Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Temperature Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22 Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Cab-to-Sleeper Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Engine Oil Temperature Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Primary and Secondary Air Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Suspension Air Pressure Daily Pretrip Inspection
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 Monthly Post-trip Inspection
Transmission Fluid Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Weekly Post-trip Inspection
Turbocharger Boost Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Cab Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Automated/Automatic Sleeper Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Transmission Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Direction Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Clutch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Clutch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Gear Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Gear Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Power Up and Shift into Customer Assistance Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2

I-1
 Index

Subject Page Subject Page

D Activating or Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15
5.12
Daily Pretrip Inspections and Monitoring Range of the
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
Cab Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5 Right-Turn Warning for
Engine Compartment Stationary Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
Saddle Tank Areas SGA Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4
Warning When Changing
Suspension and Slack Lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Adjuster Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Warning When Turning Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Wheel and Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Detroit Assurance Traffic Sign
Dashboard and Instrument Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Activating or Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Parking Brake Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Traffic Sign Display
Trailer Air Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Trailer Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 Detroit Assurance Vehicle
Detroit Assurance Active Lane Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Assist (ALA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Driver Facing Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Active Lane Assist (ALA) Multipurpose Camera 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Activation Conditions and
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Rain Light Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
Active Lane Assist Safety Detroit™ Automated
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Clutch Abuse Alerts and
Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Detroit Assurance Attention
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Clutch Abuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5
Activating or Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 Creep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
Function and Activation Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 eCoast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Engine Overspeed Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Hill Start Aid (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
Detroit Assurance Collision Transmission Low Air
Mitigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5
Active Brake Assist (ABA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Adaptive Cruise Control DEF Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 DEF Warnings and Engine
Driver Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Tailgate Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Detroit Assurance Lane Fuel/DEF Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Digital Gauges and System
Activating or Deactivating Monitors: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Lane Departure Warning Active Driver Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
(LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 Application Air Pressure
Cleaning the Distance Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Sensor and the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Functions and Activation Base ICC5 A-Panel Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Conditions for Lane Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Climate Control Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Safety Notes on Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Detroit Assurance Side Guard Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Assist (SGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12

I-2
Index

Subject Page Subject Page

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Engine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Engine Oil Temperature
Digital Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
DPF Soot Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 ICUC Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Drive Axle Oil Temperature ICUC Vehicle Operations:
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 Vehicle Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Eco Driver Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33 Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Engine Oil Temperature Other ICUC Gauges and
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Floating ICC5 A-Panel Suspension Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
ICC5 B-Panel Chassis Transmission Oil
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
ICC5 B-Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Transmission Prognostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
ICC5 Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Lift Axle Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 Turbocharger Boost
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41 Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Driver Display Overview: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Basic ICC5 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Primary and Secondary Air ICC5 Driver Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 ICC5 Steering Wheel
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Speedometer and Driver Display Overview: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 ICUC Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Suspension Air Pressure ICUC Driver Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 ICUC Time and Alarm
Tire Pressure Monitoring Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Driver-Controlled Differential
Trailer Application Air Lock (DCDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 DCDL Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Trailer Suspension Air Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Single Drive Axles with
Transmission Oil Traction Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Turbo Boost Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 E
Digital Gauges and System Eaton Automated
Monitors: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 Auto Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Application Air Pressure Auto Start Gear Selection
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 and Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 Automatic Mode (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 Clutch Abuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
DEF and Diesel Particulate Coasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Filter Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Creep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Engine Overspeed
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Hill Start Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Eco Driver Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Load-Based Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Engine Idle Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18

I-3
 Index

Subject Page Subject Page

Low (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
Manual Mode (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
F
Shuttle Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8 Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Skip Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Fifth Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Transmission Low Air
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9 Fifth Wheel Slide Control
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Transmission Prognostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Trailer Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Eaton® Fuller® Manual
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 Fontaine and Holland Fifth
Wheels Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Transmission Operation Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20 Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6
Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1 Air Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8
Emergency Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 Manual Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6
sSAM Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
Emergency Starting With Air-Actuated Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5
Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1 Manual Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Fifth Wheels, General
Aftertreatment System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Indicators Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Certified Clean Idle Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
EPA Noise Emission Control Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 In Case of a Cab Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5
Vehicle Emission Control Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
Engine Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 G
Engine Idle Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Grab Handles and Access
Idle Shutdown Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... 2.1
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Entering the Driver Side . . . ............... 2.2
Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Entering the Passenger Side ............... 2.2
Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Exiting the Driver Side . . . . ............... 2.2
High-Altitude Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Exiting the Passenger Side . ............... 2.3
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Greenhouse Gas Emissions
Safety and Environmental and Fuel Consumption
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Engine Protection—Warning
and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
H
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Halogen Headlamp Bulb
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3
Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Starting After Extended
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Headlight Aim Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
EPA-Regulated Emissions Headlight Aim Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Aftertreatment Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Headlight Aiming, Preliminary
ATS Warning Lamps and Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Euro V Emission Compliant General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Engines for Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Trailer Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Trailer Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

I-4
Index

Subject Page Subject Page

Closing the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5
2.5
L
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Air Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Exterior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Electric Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Interior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5

I M
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Meritor WABCO® Antilock
Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Infotainment: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
Connecting and
Disconnecting a Phone ECAS Automatic Load
Using Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 Transfer (ECAS only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50 Trailer ABS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
General ICC5 Infotainment Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 Monthly Post-Trip Inspections
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51 and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.10
Phone Contacts and Call List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46 Brake Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.10
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48 Engine Compartment
Inspection and
Smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12
Sound System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50 Saddle Tank Areas
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12
Using a Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
Infotainment: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
General ICUC Infotainment
N
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
ICUC Audio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 Current Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35
ICUC Telephone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Deleting a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
Navigation and Infotainment During Route Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.37
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 Global Positioning System
Instrumentation Control Unit: (GPS) Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 Navigation Menu and
ICC5 Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
ICC5 Steering Wheel Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27 Planning a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
ICC5 Touch Screen Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Saving a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Saving a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.38
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Instrumentation Control Unit:
ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 O
ICUC Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Mitigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Adaptive Cruise Control
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
Interaxle Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Collision Warning System
Interaxle Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 (CWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
Inverter/Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 Error Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
OnGuard Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21

I-5
 Index

Subject Page Subject Page

Optimized Idle® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Smartway Certified Parked
Activating Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Heater Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Deactivating Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Temperature Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Sleeper Compartment
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
P Bunk Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Periodic Inspections and Bunk Restraint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Maintenance, General Sleeper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1 Sleeper Luggage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Inspection and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Aftertreatment System Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Regen Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Aerodynamic Height Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Axle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Air Suspension Height
Engine Brake Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Engine Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 ECAS Dash Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Hill Start Aid Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 ECAS Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Power Take-Off (PTO)
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 T
Progressive Low Voltage Terms of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Collection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
Privacy Statement Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
R Safeguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15 Telematics Information We
Collect and Why We
Remote
. . . Keyless
. . . . . .Entry
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.6
2.6 Collect It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
RollTek Rollover Protection What We Do with Telematics
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Information and Who We
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Share It With . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Inspection and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Your Consent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Your Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
Touch Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
S Single-Finger Swipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.25
5.24
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1 Touching and Holding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Sears Atlas Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Touching, Holding and
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Two-Finger Swipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Seat Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17 Front Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Rear Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Use of Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
Baggage Compartment
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
V
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Vehicle Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Sleeper Access Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Battery Cable Access (BCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Sleeper Bunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Cab Load Disconnect Switch
Sliding Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 (CLDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Sleeper Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Single Signal Detect and
Actuation Module (sSAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

I-6
Index

Subject Page
Vehicle Power Distribution
Module (VPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Chewing Gum or Wax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Grease and Oil-Based Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Mildew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Sugar and Water-Based
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Ball Point Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Chewing Gum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Nail Polish and Nail Polish
Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Ordinary Dirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Shoe Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Sulfide Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2

W
Warnings, Indicators, and
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Audible Alerts: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Audible Alerts: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Engine Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65
Warnings, Indicators, and
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.9
Engine Compartment
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Windshield Wiper and Washer
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11

Z
Zonar® 2020 Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24

I-7